HUTTOM  &  FRELIGH'S  EDITIOI. 

RJT   ,B  AND  LIGHT  INPANTRl- 


.-^ 


ItOOLoKTlfFimlMKl;." 


;      ^\     ' 


COL.  GEORGE  WASHINGTON  FLOWERS 
MEMORIAL  COLLECTION 


DUKE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 
DURHAM.  N.  C. 


PRESENTED  BY 

W.  W.  FLOWERS 


EIFLE 


\ 


AJn> 


LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS; 


THE  EXERCISE  AND  MANEUVERS 


TROOPS    WTCEN    ACTING    A8    LIGHT    INFANTRY    OR 

RIFLEMEN. 


BY 


BREVET   LIEUT.    COL,    W.    J.    HARDBB, 

LATK  OP  C.    3.   ARMT.  NOW  OF  C.  8.  AEMT. 


Two    Volume?*    in    One. 
VOL.  I. 

SCHOOL     OF     THE     SOLDIER     AND     COMPANY. 


MEMPHIS: 

SOmiRRW  PtJBLWHINO  HOUSK  OP   nUTTON    k   TtUtUQIL,  SBOWTD  STRKrT. 

1861. 


Publishers'    Notice. 

Sappliea  of  this  work  from  the  North  having  been  stopped  sw  contraband  of  war,  thie 
.•dition  is  got  up  fir  practical  purposes  and  immediate  use,  in  an  emergency  tliat  admits  of 
mo  delay ;  and  a  considerable  portion  of  remarks  and  matter,  not  particularly  pertinent* 
3uw  been  omitted.  The  numberinji;  of  sections,  however,  has  been  retained,  which  will 
«Kp]ain  a  hiatu*  in  numbers,  wherever  it  occurs.  The  edition  has  been  revised  in  thie 
■lanner  to  subserve  the  pressing  demand  of  a  great  exigency,  and  gives  all  the  drill  in- 
ftrmation  imperatively  necessary  for  soldier  and  officer. 

BUTTON  &  FRKLIGH. 


r::^^ 


RIFLE  AND  LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 


TITLE    FIJRST. 


Article  First. — Formatiori  of  a  Regiment  i«  order  of  battle,  or  in  lint 

1.  A  regiment  is  composed  of  ten  companies,  whicli  will  habit- 
ually be  posted  from  rij^ht  to  left,  in  the  following  order:  first, 
sixth,  fourth,  ninth,  third,  eighth,  fifth,  tenth,  seventh,  second, 
according  to  the  rank  of  captains. 

2.  With  a  less  number  ol"  companies  the  same  principle  will  be 
observed,  viz.:  the  first  captain  will  command  the  right  company, 
the  second  captain  the  left  company,  the  third  captain  tin;  right 
center  company,  and  so  on. 

3.  The  companies  thus  posted  will  be  designated  from  right  to 
left,  first  company,  secotid  company,  «tc.  This  designation  will  be 
observed  in  the  manoeuvres. 

4.  The  first  two  com])anie8  on  the  right,  whatever  their  denomi- 
nation, will  form  {ho  first  division;  the  next  two  companies  the 
second  division  ;  and  so  on,  to  the  left. 

5.  Each  company  will  be  divided  into  two  equal  parts,  which 
will  be  designated  as  the  first  and  second  platoon,  counting  from 
the  right;  and  each  platoon,  in  like  manner,  will  be  subdivided 
into  two  sections. 

6.  In  all  exercises  and  manoeuvres,  every  regiment,  or  part  of  a 
regiment,  composed  of  two  or  more  companies,  will  be  designated 
as  a  battalion. 

7.  The  color,  with  a  guard  t<^  be  hereinafter  designated,  will  be 
posted  on  the  le(^  of  tl»e  right  center  battalion  company.  That 
company,  and  all  «»ii  \is  right,  will  be  donominat^^d  tlie  right  winf 
of  the  biiUaliuii  ;   the  remaining  i-ompanies  the  left  King. 

8.  The  formation  <»f  a  regiment  is  in  two  ranks;  and  each  com- 
pany will  be  formed  into  two  ranks,  in  the  following  manner:  the 
cor}»orals  will  be  p<jsted  in  the  front  rank,  and  on  the  right  and 
left,  of  platoons,  according  to  hight;  the  tallest  corporal  and  the 
tallest  man  will  form  the  first  file,  the  next  two  tallest  men  will 
form  the  second  file,  and  so  on  to  the  last  file,  which  will  be  com- 
posed of  the  shortcKt  eorp^jral  and  the  shortest  man. 

9.  The  odd  and  even  files,  nnmbercd  as  one,  two.  in  the  oom- 
nany,  from  right  to  left,  will  form  groups  of  four  men,  who  will 
be  dewignated  comrades  in  battle. 


20.9656 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION, 


10.  The  distance  from  one  rank  to  another  will  be  thirteen 
inches,  measured  from  the  breasts  of  the  rear  rank  men^o  the 
backs  or  knapsacks  of  the  front  rank  men. 

11.  For  manoeuvring,  the  companies  of  a  battalion  will  always 
be  equalized,  by  transferring  men  from  the  strongest  to  the 
weakest  companies.  'i*'';/    J'.'' 

Post  of  Company  Officers,  Sergeants  and  Corporals'. 

12.  The  company  officers  and  sergeants  are  nine  in  number,  and 
will  be  posted  in  the  following  manner : 

13.  The  captain  on  the  right  of  the  company,  touching  with  the 
left  elbow. 

14.  The  jfirst  sergeant  in  the  rear  rank,  touching  with  the  left 
elbow,  and  covering  the  captain.  In  the  manoeuvres  he  will  be 
denominated  covering  sergeant,  or  right  guide  of  the  company. 

15.  The  remaining  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  posted  as  file 
closers,  and  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

16.  The  first  lieutenant,  opposite  the  center  of  the  fourth  section. 

17.  The  second  lieutenant,  opposite  the  center  of  the  first  platoon, 

18.  The  third  lientenant,  opposite  the  center  of  the  second  platoon. 

19.  The  second  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  left  of 
the  company.  In  the  manamvres  he  will  be  designated  left  guide 
of  the  company. 

20.  The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  right  of 
the  second  platoon. 

21.  The  fourth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from  the  left  of 
the  first  platoon. 

22.  The  fifth  strgeant,  o})posite  the  second  file  from  the  right  of 
the  first  platoon. 

23.  In  the  left  or  t^-nth  company  of  the  battalion,  the  second 
sergeant  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank,  and  on  the  left  of  the 
battalion. 

24.  The  coqjorals  will  be  jjosted  in  the  fi-ont  rank,  as  prescribed 
No.  8.     ■  .      - 

25.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  replaced — officers  by 
sergeants,  and  sergeanta  by  corporals.  The  colonel  may  detach  a 
first  lieutenant  from  one  company  to  command  another,  of  which 
both  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant  are  absent ;  but  this  authority 
will  give  no  right  to  a  lieutenant  to  demand  to  be  so  detached. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff. 

2G.  The  field  officers,  colonel,  lieut^'nant  colonel  and  major,  are 
supposed  to  be  mounted,  and  on  active  service  shall  be  on  horse- 
back. The  adjutant,  when  the  battalion  is  manceuvring,  will  be 
on  foot. 

27.  The  colonel  will  take  post  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  file 
closers,  and  oppoi^^ite  the  center  of  the  battalion.  This  distance 
will  be  reduced  whenever  there  is  a  reduction  in  the  front  of  the 
battalion. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION.  6 

28.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major  will  be  opposite  the 
centers  of  the  right  and  left  wings  respectively,  and  twelve  paces 
in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

29.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  be  opposite  the  right 
and  left  of  tiic  battalion,  respectively,  and  eight  paces  in  rear  of 
the  file  closers. 

30.  The  adjutant  and  .sergeant  major  will  aid  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  major,  respectively,  in  the  mana?uvres. 

31.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by  the  lieutenant 
colonel,  and  the  latter  by  the  major.  If  all  the  field  officers  be 
absent,  the  senior  captain  will  command  the  battalion;  but  if 
either  be  present,  he  will  not  call  the  senior  captain  to  act  as  field 
officer,  except  in  case  of  evident  necessity. 

32.  The  quartk'-master,  surgeon,  and  other  stafl'  officers,  in  one 
rank,  on  the  left  of  the  colonel,  and  three  paces  in  his  rear. 

33.  The  quarter-master  sergeant,  on  a  line  with  the  front  rank 
of  the  field  music,  and  two  paces  on  the  right. 

Posts  of  Field  Music  and  Band. 

34.  The  buglers  will  be  drawn  up  in  four  ranks,  and  posted 
twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers,  the  let\  opposite  the  center 
of  the  left  center  com])any.  The  senior  principal  musician  will  be 
two  paces  in  front  of  the  field  music,  and  the  other  two  paces  in 
the  rear. 

35.  The  regimental  band,  if  there  be  one,  will  be  drawn  up  in 
two  or  four  ranks,  according  to  its  numbers,  and  posted  five  paces 
in  rear  of  the  field  music,  having  one  of  the  principal  musicians 
at  its  head. 

Color-guard. 

36.  In  each  battalion  the  color-guard  will  be  composed  of  eight 
corporals,  and  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right  center  company,  of 
which  company,  for  the  time  being,  the  guard  will  make  a  part. 

37.  The  front  rank  will  be  composed  of  a  sergeant,  to  be 
selected  l)y  the  colonel,  who  will  be  called,  for  the  time,  rolor- 
bearcr,  with  the  two  ranking  corporals,  re^])cctively,  on  his  right 
and  left;  the  rear  rank  will  be  composed  of  the  three  corporals 
next  in  rank  ;  and  the  three  remaining  corporals  will  be  ]>ostcd  in 
their  rear,  and  on  the  line  of  file  closers.  The  left  guide  of  the 
color-company,  when  these  three  last  named  corporals  are  in  the 
rank  of  file  closers.  Avill  be  immediately  on  their  left. 

38.  In  battalions  with  less  than  five  companies  present,  there 
will  he  no  color-guard,  and  no  display  of  colors,  except  it  may  be 
at  reviews. 

39.  The  corporaU  for  the  color-guard  will  be  selected  from  thoM 
most  distinguished  for  regularity  and  prcciHion,  af  well  in  thoir 
positions  under  arms  as  in  their  marching.  The  latter  advantage, 
and  a  just  carriage  of  the  person,  arc  U>  he  more  jiarticularly 
sought  for  in  the  selection  of  the  color-b«arer. 


6  INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


General  Guides. 

40.  There  will  bo  two  general  guides  in  each  battalion,  selected, 
for  the  time,  by  the  colonel,  from  among  the  sergeants  (other  than 
first  sergeants)  the  most  distinguished  for  carriage  under  arms, 
and  accuracy  in  marching. 

41.  Those  sergeants  will  be  respectively  denominated,  in  the 
manceuvree,  right  general  guide,  and  left  general  guide,  and  bo  posted 
in  the  line  of  file  closers;  the  first  in  rear  of  the  right,  and  the 
second  in  rear  of  the  left  flank  of  the  battalion. 


Article  Second. —  Instruction  of  the  Battalion. 

42.  Every  commanding  officer  is  responsible  for  the  instruction 
of  his  command.  He  will  assemble  the  officers  together  for  theo- 
retical and  practical  instruction  as  often  as  he  may  judge  necessary, 
and  when  unable  to  attend  to  this  duty  in  person,  it  will  be  dis- 
■charged  by  the  officer  next  in  rank. 

43.  Captains  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  theoretical  and  prac- 
tical instruction  of  their  non-commissioned  officers,  and  the  adju- 
tant for  the  instruction  of  the  non-commissioned  staff.  To  this  end, 
they  will  require  those  tactics  to  be  studied  and  recited  lesson  by 
lesson;  and  when  instruction  is  given  on  the  ground,  each  non-com- 
missioned officer,  as  he  explains  a  movement,  should  be  required  to 
put  it  into  practical  operation. 

44.  The  non-commissioned  officers  should  also  be  practiced  in 
giving  commands.  Bach  command,  in  a  lesson,  at  the  theoretical 
instruction,  should  first  be  given  by  the  instructor,  and  then  re- 
peated, in  succession,  by  the  non-commissioned  officers,  so  that 
while  they  become  habituated  to  the  commands,  uniformity  may  be 
established  in  the  manner  of  giving  them. 

45.  In  the  school  of  the  soldier,  the  company  officers  will  be  the 
instructors  of  the  squads ;  but  if  there  be  not  a  sufficient  number 
of  company  officers  present,  intelligent  sergeants  may  bo  substitu- 
ted ;  and  two  or  thi'oe  squads,  under  sergeant  instructors,  bo  super- 
intended, at  the  same  time,  by  an  officer. 

46.  In  the  school  of  the  company,  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  the 
major,  under  the  colonel,  will  be  the  principal  instructors,  substi- 
tuting frequently  the  captain  of  the  company,  and  sometimes  one 
of  the  lieutenants ;  the  substitute,  as  far  as  practicable,  being  one 
of  the  principals. 

47.  In  the  school  of  the  battalion,  the  brigadier  general  may  con- 
stitute himself  the  principal  instructor,  frequently  substituting  the 
colonel  of  the  battalion,  sometimes  the  lieutenant  colonel  or  major, 
and  twice  or  thrice,  in  the  same  course  of  instruction,  each  of  the 
three  senior  captains.  In  this  school,  also,  the  substitute  will  al- 
ways, if  practicable,  be  superintended  by  the  brigadier  general  or 
the  colonel,  or  (in  case  of  a  captain  being  the  instructor),  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel  or  major. 


INSTRUCTION  OP  THE  BATTALION. 


48.  Individual  instruction  being  the  basis  of  the  instruction  of 
companies,  on  which  that  of  the  regiment  depends,  and  the  first 
principles  having  the  greatest  influence  upon  this  individual  in- 
struction, classes  of  recruits  should  be  watched  with  the  greatest 
care. 

49.  Instructors  will  explain,  in  a  few  clear  and  precise  worda, 
the  movement  to  be  executed  ;  and  not  to  overburden  the  memory 
of  the  men,  they  will  always  use  the  same  terras  to  explain  the 
same  principles. 

50.  They  should  often  join  example  to  precedent,  should  keep  up 
the  attention  of  the  men  by  an  animated  tone,  and  pass  rapidly 
from  one  movement  to  another,  as  soon  as  that  which  they  com- 
mand has  been  executed  in  a  satisfactory  manner. 

51.  The  saber  bayonet  should  only  be  fixed  when  required  to  be 
used,  either  for  attack  or  defense;  the  exercises  and  manoeurres 
will  be  executed  without  the  bayonet. 

52.  In  the  movements  which  require  the  bayonet  to  be  fixed,  the 
chief  of  the  battalion  will  cause  the  signal  to  fix  bayonet  to  be 
sounded;  at  this  signal  the  men  will  fix  bayonets  without  com- 
mand, and  immediately  replace  their  pieces  in  the  position  they 
were  before  the  signal. 

Instruction  of  Officers. 

53.  The  instruction  of  officers  can  be  perfected  only  by  joining 
theory  to  practice.  The  colonel  will  often  practice  them  in  march- 
ing and  in  estimating  distances,  and  he  will  carefully  endeavor  to 
cause  them  to  take  steps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness.  They  will 
also  be  exercised  in  the  double  quick  step. 

54.  The  instruction  of  officers  will  include  all  the  Titlofl  in  thit 
system  of  drill,  and  such  regulations  as  prescribe  their  duties  in 
peace  and  war. 

55.  Every  officer  will  make  himself  perfectly  acquainted  with 
the  bugle  signals  ;  and  should,  by  practice,  bo  enabled,  if  necessary, 
to  sound  them.  This  knowledge,  so  necessary  in  general  instruc- 
tion, becomes  of  vital  importance  on  actual  service  in  the  field. 

Instruction  of  Sergeants. 

56.  As  the  discipline  and  efficiency  of  a  company  materially  de- 
pend on  the  conduct  and  charact<>r  of  its  sergeants,  they  should  be 
selected  with  care,  and  properly  instructed  in  all  the  duties  apper- 
taining to  their  rank. 

57.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the  School  of  the 
Soldier,  the  School  of  the  Company,  and  the  Drill  for  Skirmisherg. 
They  should  likewise  know  all  Uie  details  of  service,  and  the  reg- 
ulations prescribing  their  duties  in  garrison  and  in  campaign. 

58.  The  captain  selects  from  the  corporals  in  his  c/)mpany  thoM 
whom  ho  judges  fit  to  be  admitted  to  the  theoretical  instruction 
of  the  sergcantB. 


8  SCHOOL   OF  THE    SOLDIER. 

{,)  ,  Instruction  of   Corporals. 

'*59.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include  the  School  of  the 
Soldier,  and  such  regulations  as  prescribe  their  duties  in  garrison 
and  in  campaign. 

60.  The  captain  selects  from  his  company  a  few  privates,  who 
may  be  admitted  to  the  theoretical  instruction  of  the  corporals. 

61.  As  the  instruction  of  sergeants  and  corporals  is  intended 
principally  to  qualify  them  for  the  instruction  of  the  privates,  they 
should  be  taught  not  only  to  execute,  but  to  explain  intelligibly 
everything  they  may  be  required  to  teach. 

-i.i,  Commands. 

There  are  three  kinds. 

62.  The  command  of  caution,  which  is  attention. 

63.  The  preparatory  command,  which  indicates  the  movement 
which  is  to  be  executed. 

64.  The  command  of  execution,  such  as  marcli  or  halt,  or,  in  the 
manual  of  arms,  the  part  of  command  which  causes  an  execution. 

65.  The  tone  of  the  command  should  be  animated,  distinct,  and 
of  a  loudness  proportioned  to  the  number  of  men  under  instruction. 

66.  The  command  attention  is  pronounced  at  the  top  of  the  voice, 
dwelling  on  the  last  syllable. 

67.  The  command  of  execution  will  be  pronounced  in  a  tone  firm 
and  brief. 

68.  The  commands  of  caution  and  the  preparatory  commands 
are  herein  distinguished  by  italics,  those  of  execution  by  capitals. 

69.  Those  preparatory  commands  which,  from  their  length,  are 
difficult  to  be  pronounced  at  once,  must  be  divided  into  two  or 
three  parts,  with  an  ascending  progression  in  the  tone  of  command, 
but  always  in  such  a  manner  that  the  tone  of  execution  may  be 
more  energetic  and  elevated  :  the  divisions  are  indicated  by  a  hy- 
phen. The  parts  of  commands  which  are  placed  in  a  parenthesis, 
are  not  pronounced.  ' 


TITLE  SECOND— SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIEE. 

General  Rules   and  division  of  the  School   of  the  Soldier. 

70.  The  object  of  this  school  being  the  individual  and  progres- 
sive instruction  of  the  recruits,  the  instructor  never  requires  a 
movement  to  be  executed  until  he  has  given  an  exact  explanation 
of  it ;  and  he  executes,  himself,  the  movement  which  he  commands, 
so  as  to  join  example  to  precept.  He  accustoms  the  recruit  to  take, 
by  himself,  the  position  which  is  explained — teaches  him  to  rectify 
it  only  when  required  by  his  want  of  intelligence — and  sees  that 
all  the  movements  are  performed  without  precipitation. 

71.  Each  movement  should  be  understood  before  passing  to  ano- 
ther. After  they  have  been  properly  executed  in  the  order  laid 
down  in  each  lesson,  the  instructor  no  longer  confines  himself  to 


>^CHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER. 


that  order ;  on  the  contrary,  he  should  change  it,  that  he  may  judge 
of  the  intolligciice  of  the  men. 

72.  The  inntructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  at  the  end  of  each 
part  of  the  lessons,  and  oficner,  if  he  thinks  proper,  especially  at 
the  commencement;  for  this  purpose  he  commands  Rest. 

73.  At  the  command  Rest,  the  soldier  is  no  longer  required  to 
preserve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in  his  place.  If  the  instructor 
wishes  merely  to  relieve  the  attention  of  the  recruit,  he  commands. 
in  place — IiEst;  tlie  soldier  is  then  not  required  to  preserve  his  im- 
mobility, but  he  always  keeps  one  of  his  feet  in  its  place. 

74.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  commence  the  instruction,  he 
commands — Attention;  at  this  command  the  soldier  takes  his  po- 
sition, remains  motionless,  and  fixes  his  attention. 

75.  The  ScJiool  of  the  Soldier  will  be  divided  into  thi-ce  parts:  — 
the  first,  comprehending  what  ought  to  be  taught  to  recruits  with- 
out arms  ;  the  second  the  manual  of  arms,  the  loadings  and  firings ; 
th^third,  the  principles  of  allignmcnt.  the  march  by  the  front,  the 
different  steps,  the  march  by  the  flank,  the  principles  of  wheeling 
and  those"  of  change  of  direction ;  also,  long  marches  in  double 
quick  time  and  the  run. 

76.  Each  part  will  be  divided  into  lessons,  as  follows  : 

PART  FIRST. 

Lesson  1.  Position  of  the  soldier  without  arms;  Eyes  right,  lefl 
and  front. 

Lesson  2.  Facings. 

Lesson  3.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  common  and  quick 
time. 

Lesson  4.  I'rineiples  of  the  direct  step  in  double  quick  time  and 
the  run. 

PART  SECX3ND. 

Lesson  1.  Principles  of  shouldered  arms. 

Lesson  2.  Manual  of  arms. 

Lesson  3.  To  load  in  four  times  and  at  will. 

Lesson  4.  Firings,  direct,  oblique,  by  file  and  by  rank. 

Lesson  5.  To  fire  and  load,  kneeling  and  lying. 

Lesson  fi.  Bayonet  exercise. 

PART  THIRD. 

Lesson  1.  Union  of  eight  or  twelve  men  for  instruction  in  the 
principles  <tf  allignmcnt.  ^ 

Lesson  2.  The  direct  march,  the  oblique  mar<h,  and  the  differ- 
ent steps. 

Lesson  3.  The  march  by  th<^  flank. 

Lesson  4.  Princiitlcs  of  wheeling  and  change  of  direction. 

Lrsson  5.  Long  marches  in  double  quick  time,  and  the  run.  with 
arms  ami  knapsacks. 

PART  FIRST. 

77.  This  will  be  taught,  if  praotifuible.  to  one  reernit  at  a  time: 
but  three  or  four  may  bo  united,  when  the  number  Vte  great  com- 


10  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

pare^  with  that  of  the  instructors.  In  this  case  the  recruits  will 
be  phiced  in  a  single  rank,  at  one  pace  from  each  other.  In  this 
part,  the  recruit  will  be  without  arms. 

Lesson  I. — Position  of  the  Soldier. 

78.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  each  other  as  the  conforma- 
tion of  the  man  will  permit ; 

The  feet  turned  out  equally,  and  forming  with  each  other  some- 
thing less  than  a  right  angle  ; 

The  knees  straight  without  stiffness ; 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  forward ; 

The  shoulders  square  and  falling  equally ; 

The  arms  hanging  naturally  ; 

The  elbows  near  the  body  ; 

The  palm  of  the  hand  turned  a  little  to  the  front,  the  little  fin- 
ger behind  the  seem  of  the  pantaloons ; 

The  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  without  constraint; 

The  chin  near  the  stock,  without  covering  it; 

The  eyes  fixed  straight  to  the  front,  and  striking  the  ground 
about  the  distance  of  fifteen  paces. 

REMARKS  ON  THE  POSITION  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

JTeels  on  the  same  Line ; 

79.  Because,  if  one  were  in  the  i-ear  of  the  other,  the  shoulder 
on  that  side  would  be  thrown  back,  or  the  position  of  the  soldier 
would  be  constrained. 

Heels  more  or  less  closed; 
Because,  men  who  are  knock-kneed,  or  who  have  legs  with  large 
calves,  cannot,  without  constraint,  make  their  heels  touch  while 
standing. 

The  feet  equally  turned  out,  and  not  forming  too  large  an  angle; 

Because,  if  one  foot  were  turned  out  more  than  the  other,  a  shoul- 
der would  be  deranged,  and  if  both  feet  be  too  much  turned  out,  it 
would  not  be  practicable  to  incline  the  upper  part  of  the  body  for- 
ward without  rendering  the  .whole  position  unsteady. 
Knees  extended  without  stiffness ; 
Because,  if  stiffened,  constraint  and  fatigue  would  be  unavoidable. 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips ; 
Because,  it  gives  equilibrium  to  the  position.  The  instructor 
will  observe  that  many  recruits  have  the  bad  habit  of  dropping  a 
shoulder,  of  drawing  in  a  side,  or  of  advancing  a  hip,  particularly 
the  right,  when  under  arms.  These  are  defects  he  will  labor  to 
correct. 

The  upper  part  of  the  body  inclining  fonvard ; 

Because,  commonly,  recruits  are  disposed  to  do  the  reverse,  to 
project  the  belly  and  to  throw  back  the  shoulders,  when  they  wish 
to  hold  themselves  erect,  from  which  result  great  inconveniences 
in  marching. ,   The  habit  of  inclining  forward  the  upper  part  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER,  11 

the  body  ia  so  important  to  contract,  that  the  instructor  must  on- 
forco  it  at  the  bcginninij,  particularly  with  recruits  who  have  nat- 
urally the  opposite  habit. 

Shoulders  square; 

Bocauso,  if  the  shoulders  be  advanced  beyond  the  line  of  the 
breast,  and  the  back  arched  (the  defect  called  round-shouldered, 
not  uncommon  with  recruits,)  the  man  cannot  allifijn  himself,  nor 
use  his  piece  with  address.  It  is  important,  thtm,  to  correct  this 
defect,  and  necessary  to  that  end  that  the  coat  should  set  easy 
about  the  shoulders  and  arm  pits;  but  in  correcting  this  defect, 
the  instructor  should  take  care  that  the  shoulders  l)e  not  thrown 
too  much  to  the  rear,  which  would  cause  the  belly  to  project,  and 
the  small  of  the  back  to  be  curved. 

The  aryns  hanging  naturally,  elboirs  near  the  bodij,  the  palm  of  the> 
hand  a  little  turned  to  the  front,  the  little  finger  behind  the  scam  of 
the  pantaloons ; 

Because  these  positions  are  equally  important  to  the  shoulder- 
arms,  and  to  prevent  the  man  from  occupying  more  space  in  a  rank 
than  is  necessary'  to  a  free  use  of  the  piece ;  they  hav<>,  moreover, 
the  advantage  of  keeping  in  the  shoulders. 

The  face  straight  to  the  front,  and  ivithout  constraint ; 

Because,  if  there  be  stiffness  in  the  latter  position,  it  would  com- 
municate itself  to  the  whole  of  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  embar- 
rass its  movements,  and  give  pain  and  fatigue. 

Eyes  direct  to  the  front ; 

Because,  this  is  the  surest  means  of  maintaining  the  shoulders 
in  line — an  essential  object,  to  be  insisted  on  and  attained. 

80.  The  instructor  having  given  the  recruit  the  position  of  the 
soldier  without  arms,  will  now  teach  him  the  turning  of  the  head 
and  eyes.     He  will  command  : 

1.  J^ljjes — EioHT.     2.  Front. 

81.  At  the  word  right,  the  recruit  will  turn  the  head  gently,  ho 
aa  to  bring  the  inner  corner  of  the  left  eye  in  a  lino  with  the  but- 
tons of  the  foat,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men 
in,  or  supposed  to  be  in,  the  same  rank. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  the  head  will  resume  the  direct  or 
habitual  position. 

8.3.  The  movement  of  Eye^'i  —  Lkft  will  be  executed  by  inverse 
means. 

84.  The  instructor  will  take  particular  care  that  the  movement 
of  the  head  does  not.  derange  the  squareness  of  the  shoulderti, 
which  will  happen  if  the  movement  of  the  former  be  too  sudden. 

8ft.  When  the  in«truct<:»r  shall  wish  the  recruit  to  pa^s  from  the 
aU^  of  attention  to  that  of  ease,  he  will  cvommand  : 


IBi  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


Eest. 

86.  To  cause  a  reaiimption  of  the  habitual  position,  the  instruot- 
or  will  command : 

1.  Attention.     1.  Squad. 

87.  At  the  first  word,  the  recruit  will  fix  his  attention ;  at  the 
second,  he  will  resume  the  prescribed  position  with  steadiness. 

Lesson  II. — Facings. 

88.  Facings  to  the  right  or  left  will  be  executed  in  one  time,  or 
pause.     The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad.      2.  Might  (or  I(ift)  —  FAC^ . 

89.  At  the  second  command,  raise  the  right  foot  slightly,  turn  on 
the  left  heel,  raising  the  toes  a  little,  and  then  replace  the  right 
heel  by  the  side  of  the  left,  and  on  the  same  line. 

90.  The  full  face  to  the  rear  (or  front)  will  be  executed  in  two 
times,  or  pauses.     The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  About  —  Face. 

91.  (First  time.)  At  the  word  about,  the  recruit  will  turn  on  the 
left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe  to  the  front,  carry  the  right  foot  to  the 
rear,  the  hollow  ojiposite  to.  and  full  three  inches  from,  the  left 
heel,  the  feet  square  to  each  other. 

92.  (Second  time.)  At  the  word  face,  the  recruit  will  turn  on 
both  heels,  raise  the  toes  a  little,  extend  the  hams,  face  to^^the  rear, 
bringing,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

93.  The  instructor  Avill  take  care  that  tliose  motions  do  not  de- 
range the  position  of  the  body. 

Lesson  III. —  Principles  of  the  Direct  Step. 

94.  The  length  of  the  direct  step,  or  pace,  in  common  time,  will 
be  twenty-eight  inches,  reckoning  from  heel  to  heel,  and,  in  swift- 
ness, at  the  rate  of  ninety  in  a  minute. 

95.  The  instructor,  seeing  the  recruit  confirmed  in  his  position, 
will  explain  to  him  the  principle  and  mechanism  of  this  step — pla- 
cing himself  six  or  seven  paces  from,  an^  facing  to  the  recruit. 
He  will  himself  execute  slowly  the  step  in  the  way  of  illustration, 
and  then  command : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.   Common  time.     3.  March. 

96.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw  the  weight  of 
the  body  on  the  right  leg,  without  bending  the  left  knee. 

97.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  smartly,  but  without  a  jerk, 
carry  straight  forward  the  left  foot  twenty -eight  inches  from  the 
right,  the  sole  near  the  ground,  the  ham  extended,  the  toe  a  little 
depressed,  and,  as  also  the  knee,  slightly  turned  out ;  he  will,  at 
the  same  time,  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  forward,  and  plant 
flat  the  left  foot,  without  shock,  precisely  at  'the  distance  where  it 
finds  itself  from  the  right  when  the  weight  of  the  body  is  brought 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  13 

forward,  the  whole  of  which  will  now  rest  ou  the  advanced  foot. 
The  I'ccruit  will  next,  in  like  manner,  advance  the  right  foot  and 
plant  it  as  above;  the  heel  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  heel  of  the 
left  foot,  and  thus  continue  to  march  without  crossing  the  legs,  or 
striking  the  one  against  the  other,  without  turning  the  shoulders, 
and  preserving  always  the  face  direct  to  the  front. 

98.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the  marcVi,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Squad,     i.  Halt.  '  , 

99.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  foot  in  the  rear  will 
be  brought  up.  and  planted  by  the  side  of  the  other,  without  shock. 

100.  The  iustructor  will  indicate,  from  time  to  time,  to  the  re- 
cruit, the  cadence  of  the  step,  by  giving  the  command  one  at  the 
instant  of  raising  a  foot,  and  two  at  the  instant  it  ought  to,  bo 
planted,  observing  the  cadence  of  ninety  steps  in  a  minute.  This 
method  will  contribute  greatly  to  impress  upon  the  mind  the  two 
motions  into  Avhich  the  step  is  naturally  divided. 

101.  Common  time  will  be  employed  onl}'  in  the  first  and  second 
part^  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier.  As  soon  as  the  recruit  has  ac- 
quired steadiness,  has  become  established  in  the  principles  of  shoul- 
dered arms,  and  in  the  mechanism,  length  and  sAviftness  of  the 
stop  in  common  time,  he  Avill  be  practiced  only  in  quick  time,  the 
double  quick  time,  and  the  run. 

102.  TIk!  principles  of  the  step  in  quick  time  are  the  same  us 
for  common  time,  but  its  swiftness  is  at  the  rate  of  one  hundred 
and  ten  stej)s  per  minute. 

10.'{.  The  iri--trurt<.»r  wishing  the  squad  to  march  in  quick  time, 
will  command 

1.  ,^{Ua<^.  fonrar<l.      2.  March. 

Lehson  IV. —  HrifK^ipli'.*  of  thp  Double  Quick  Step. 

104.  The  length  of  the  double  quick  .step  is  thirty-three  inchea, 
and  its  swil\ncss  at  the  rat*  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  stepfi 
per  minute. 

105.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teacli  the  recruits  the  principles 
and  mechanism  of  the  double  quick  stej),  will  command  : 

1.  Double  quick  step.     2.  March. 

lOG.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  raise  his  hands  to  a 
level  with  hit  hip-<.  the  hand'*  closed,  the  nails  toward  the  body, 
the  elbow.-,  to  the  rear. 

107.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  raise  to  the  front  his  lefl 
leg  bent,  in  order  to  give  to  the  knee  the  greatest  elevation,  the 
part  of  the  leg  betwet-n  the  knee  and  the  instep  verticle.  the  toe 
depref'Sed  ;  he  will  tlien  replace  his  foot  in  it^  former  position  ; 
with  the  right  leg  he  will  then  execute  what  hju*  just  been  pro- 
ecribed  for  the  leit.  and  the  alternate  movement  of  the  le^  will  be 
continued  until  the  c<tmmaDd: 


14  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt. 

108.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruit  will  bring  the  foot 
which  ie  raised  by  the  aide  of  the  other,  and  dropping  at  the  same 
time  his  hands  by  his  side,  will  resume  the  position  of  the  soldier 
without  arms. 

109.  The  instructor  placing  himself  seven  or  eight  paces  from, 
and  facing  the  recruit,  will  indicate  the  cadence  by  the  commands, 
one  and  two,  given  alternately  at  the  instant  each  foot  should  be 
brought  to  the  ground,  which  at  first  will  be  in  common  time,  but 
its  rapidity  will  be  gradually  augmented. 

110.  The  recruit  being  sufficiently  established  in  the  principles 
of  this  step,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Squad,  forward.     2.  Double  quick.     3.  March. 

111.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw  the  weight  of 
his  body  on  the  right  leg. 

112.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  place  his  arms  as  indicated 
No.  106. 

113.  At  tiie  third  command,  he  will  carry  forward  the  left  foot,, 
the  leg  slightly  bent,  the  knee  somewhat  raised  —  will  plant  hi& 
left  foot,  the  toe  first,  thirtj^-three  inches  from  the  right,  and  with 
the  right  foot  will  then  execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  left.  This  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will  take  place  by 
throwing  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  foot  that  is  planted,  and 
by  allowing  a  natural,  oscillatory  motion  to  the  arms. 

114.  The  double  quick  step  may  be  executed  with  diiferent 
degrees  of  swiftness.  Under  urgent  circumstances  the  cadence  of 
this  step  may  be  increased  to  one  hundred  and  eighty  per  minute. 
At  this  rate  a  distance  of  four  thousand  yards  would  be  pjuseed 
over  in  about  twenty-five  minutes. 

115.  The  recruitjs  will  be  exercised  also  in  running. 

IIG.  The  principles  are  the  same  as  for  the  double  quick  step^ 
the  only  diflf'erencc  consisting  in  a  greater  degree  of  swiftness. 

117.  It  is  recommended  in  mai-ching  at  double  quick  time,  or 
the  run,  that  the  men  should  breathe  as  much  as  possible  through 
the  nose,  keeping  the  mouth  closed.  Experience  has  proved  that-, 
by  conforming  to  this  principle,  a  man  can  pass  over  a  much 
longer  distiince,  and  with  less  fatigue. 

PARTSECOND. 

GENERAL     RULES. 

118.  The  instructor  will  not  pass  the  men  to  this  second  part 
until  they  sliall  be  well  established  in  the  position  of  the  body, 
and  in  the  manner  of  marching  at  the  different  steps. 

119.  He  will  tlien  unite  four  men,  whom  he  will  place  in  the 
same  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  instruct  them  in  the  position  of 
shouldered  arnss,  a*  Ibllows  : 


SCHOOJL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  16 

Lesson  1. — Principles  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

120.  The  recruit  being  placed  as  explained  in  the  first  lesson  of 
the  first  part,  the  instructor  will  cause  him  to  bend  the  right  arm 
slightly,  and  place  the  piece  in  it,  in  the  fi)llowing  manner: 

121.  The  piece  in  the  right  hand — the  barrel  nearly  vertical  and 
resting  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder — the  guard  to  the  front,  the 
Arm  hanging  nearly  at  its  full  length  near  the  body;  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard,  the  remaining  fingers  closed 
together,  and  grasping  the  swell  of  the  stock  just  under  tlie  cock, 
which  rests  on  the  little  finger. 

122.  llecruits  are  frequently  seen  with  natural  defects  in  the 
conformation  of  the  shoulders,  breast  and  hips.  These  the 
instructor  will  labor  to  correct  in  the  lessons  without  arms,  and 
afterwards,  by  steady  endeavors,  so  that  the  appearance  of  the 
pieces,  in  the  same  line,  may  be  uniform,  and  this  without  con- 
straint to  the  men  in  their  positions. 

123.  The  instructor  will  have  occasion  to  remark  that  recruits, 
on  first  bearing  arms,  are  liable  to  derange  their  poKition  by  low- 
ering the  right  shoulder  and  the  right  hand,  or  by  sinking  the  hip 
and  spreading  out  the  elbows. 

124.  He  will  be  careful  to  correct  all  these  faults  by  continually 
rectifying  the  position;  he  will  sometimes  take  away  the  piece  to 
replace  it  the  better  ;  he  will  avoid  fatiguing  the  recruits  too  much 
in  the  evening,  but  labor  by  degrees  to  render  this  jiosition  so 
natural  and  easy  that  they  may  remain  in  it  a  long  time  without 
fatigue. 

125.  Finally,  the  instructor  will  take  great  care  that  the  ])iece, 
at  a  shoulder,  be  not  carried  too  high  nor  too  low:  if  too  high, 
the  right  elbow  would  spread  out,  the  soldier  would  occupy  too 
much  space  in  his  rank,  and  the  piece  be  made  to  waver;  if  too 
low,  the  files  would  be  too  much  clof^ed,  the  soUiier  would  not  have 
the  necessary  space  to  handle  his  piece  with  facilit}',  the  right  arm 
would  become  t'OO  much  fatigued,  and  would  draw  down  the 
shoulder. 

126.  The  instructor,  before  passing  to  the  second  lesson,  will 
cause  to  be  repeated  the  movements  of  eyes  rights  left,  and  front, 
and  the  facings. 

Lesson  II. — Manual  of  Arms. 

127.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  to  foiir  men,  placed,  at 
first,  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  afterwards  in  tw(^  ranks. 

128.  Riioh  connnand  will  bo  executed  in  one  time  (or  pause),  but 
this  time  will  be  divich-d  into  motions,  the  better  to  make  knrtwn 
the  mechanism. 

129.  The  rate  (or  swiflness)  of  each  motion,  in  the  manual  of 
arms,  with  the  exceptions  herein  indicated,  is  fixed  at  the  nine- 
tieth part  of  a  minute;  but.  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  attention, 
the  inhtructor  will,  at  first,  look  more  particularly  to  the  execution 
c>f  the  motions,  without  requiring  a  nice  observance  of  the  cadence, 


16  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

to  which  he  will  brin<5  the  recruits  progressively,  and  after  they 
shall  have  become  a  little  familiarized  with  the  handling  of  the 
piece. 

130.  As  the  motions  relative  to  the  cartridge,  to  the  rammer, 
and  to  the  fixing  and  unfixing  of  the  bayonet,  cannot  be  executed 
at  the  rate  prescribed,  nor  even  with  a  uniform  swiftness,  they  will 
not  be  subjected  to  that  cadence.  The  instructor  will,  however, 
labor  to  cause  these  motions  to  be  executed  with  promptness,  and, 
above  all,  with  regularity. 

131.  The  last  syllable  of  the  command  will  decide  the  brisk 
execution  of  the  first  motion  of  each  time  (or  pause).  The  com- 
mands two,  three,  and  four,  will  decide  the  brisk  execution  of  the 
other  motions.  As  soon  a,s  the  recruits  shall  well  comprehend  the 
positions  of  the  several  motions  of  a  time,  they  will  bo  taught  to 
execute  the  time  without  resting  on  its  difi'erent  motions ;  the 
mechanism  of  the  time  will  nevertheless  be  observed,  as  well  to 
give  a  perfect  use  of  the  piece,  as  to  avoid  the  sinking  of,  or  slur- 
ring over,  either  of  the  motions. 

132.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the  following  pro- 
gression :    The  instructor  will  command  : 

Supiwrt — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

133.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece,  with  the  right  hand,  per- 
pendicularly to  the  front  and  between  the  eyes,  the  barrel  to  the 
rear ;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  raise 
this  hand  as  high  as  the  chin,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time 
with  the  right  hand  four  inches  below  the  cock. 

134.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  the 
barrel  to  the  front :  carry  the  piece  to  the  left  shoulder,  and  pass 
the  fore-arm  extended  on  the  breast  between  the  right  hand  and 
the  cock ;  support  the  cock  against  the  left  fore-arm,  the  left  hand 
resting  on  the  right  breast. 

135.  (Third  motion.)     Drop  the  right  hand  by  the  side. 

136.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose  in  this  posi- 
tion, he  will  command  : 

Eest. 

137.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  bring  up  smartly  the 
right  hand  to  the  handle  of  the  piece  (small  of  the  stock),  when 
they  will  not  be  required  to  preserve  silence,  or  steadinees  of 
position. 

138.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to  pass  from 
this  position  to  that  of  silence  and  steadine^ss,  he  will  command : 

1.  Attention.     2.  Squad. 

139.  At  the  sex'^ud  word,  the  recruits  will  resume  the  position 
of  the  third  motion  of  support  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  17 

^h(nilder — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  7notions. 

140.  {First  inotion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  under 
and  against  the  loft  forearm  ;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  at  the 
lower  band,  the  thumb  extended  ;  detatch  the  piece  slightly  from 
the  shoulder,  the  left  fore-arm  along  the  stock. 

141.  (Second  nxotion.)  Carry  the  piece  vertically  to  the  right 
shoulder  with  both  hands,  the  rammer  to  the  front,  change  thepo- 
Bition  of  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrac^c  the  guard  with  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the  hight  of  the  shoulder,  the 
fingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

142.  (Third  motion.)     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Present — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  viotions. 

143.  (First  motion.)  With  the  right  hand  bring  the  piece  erect 
before  the  center  of  the  body,  the  j-ammer  to  the  front;  at  the 
same  time  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  half-way  between  the 
guide  sight  and  lower  band,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  barrel 
and  against  the  stock,  the  fore-arm  horizonKil  and  resting  against 
the  body,  the  hand  as  high  as  the  elbow. 

144.  (Second  motion.)  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the 
right  hand  below  and  against  the  guard. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

\Af).  (First  motion.)'  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoulder,  at 
the  same  time  change  the  position  of  the  right  hand  so  as  to  em- 
brace the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  slip  up  the  left 
hand  to  the  hight  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  joined, 
the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

146.  (Second  motion.)     iJrop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Order — Arms. 
Onr.  tirKe  and  two  motions. 

147.  (First  motion.\  Seize  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand 
near  the  upper  bana,  and  detatch  it  slightly  from  the  shoulder 
with  the  right  hand;  loosen  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  lower  tho 

f)ie<K;  with  the  left,  rencize  the  piece  with  the  right  liaud  above  tho 
owcr  band,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel,  the  butt  about 
four  inches  from  the  ground,  the  right  hand  ,'Jup]V)rtod  against  the 
hip,  drop  the  loft  hand  by  the  side. 

*  148.  (Second  motion.)  Let  tho  piece  slip  through  tho  right  hand 
to  the  ground  by  opening  slightly  the  fingertj,  and  take  tho  posi- 
tion about  to  be  described. 

Position  of  order  arm  . 

149.  The   hand   k)w,  the   barr*»l  betw<>©n  thf>  thumb  «nd  fore- 


18  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

finger  extended  along  the  stock ;  the  other  fingers  extended  and 
joined  ;  the  muzzle  about  two  inches  from  the  right  shoulder;  the 
rammer  in  front ;  the  toe  (or  beak)  of  the  butt,  against,  and  in 
a  line  with,  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  the  barrel  perpendicular. 

150.  When  the  instinictor  may  wish  to  give  repose  in  this  posi- 
tiom,  he  will  command  : 

Eest. 

151.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  not  be  required  to  pre- 
serve silence  or  steadiness. 

152.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to  pass  from 
this  position  to  that  of  silence  and  steadiness,  he  will  command : 

1.  Attention.      2.  Squad. 

153.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume  the  position  of 
order  arms. 

Shoulder — Aems  . 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

154.  (First  ruotion.)  Eaise  the  piece  vertically  with  the  right 
hand  to  the  hight  of  the  right  breast,  and  opposite  the  shoulder, 
the  elbo\v  close  to  the  body ;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  be- 
low the  right,  and  drop  quickly  the  right  hand  to  grasp  the  piece 
at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the 
guard  ;  press  the  piece  against  the  shoulder  with  the  left  hand,  the 
right  arm  nearly  straight. 

155.  {Second  motion.)     Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Load  in  nine  times. 
*1.  Load. 

156.  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  as  high  as  the  right  el- 
bow, and  bring  it  vertically  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  shift 
the  right  hand  to  the  upper  band,  place  the  butt  between  the  feet, 
the  barrel  to  the  front;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  near  the  muz- 
zle, which  should  be  three  inches  from  the  body;  carry  the  right 
hand  to  the  cartridge  box. 

2.  Handle — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

157.  Hieze  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  next  two  fingers, 
and  place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.   Tear — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

158.  Tear  the  paper  to  the  powder,  hold  the  cartridn;e  upright 
between  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers,  near  the  top  ;  in  this  }X>- 

^Wbenever  tbe  loadiaga  and  firinofs  are  to  be  executed,  tho  inetructor  will  cause  the 
'eartridge  box  to  b«  brought  to  the  front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  19 


8ition  plate  it  in  front  of  and  noar  the  muzxle — the  back  of  the 
hand  to  the  front. 

4.  Charge — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

159.  Empty  the  powder  into  the  barrel ;  dlBcngagc  the  ball  from 
the  paper  with  the  right  hand  and  the  thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of 
the  left;  insert  it  into  the  bore,  the*  pointed  end  uppermost,  and 
press  it  down  with  the  right  thumb  ;  seize  the  bead  of  the  rammer 
with  t!ie  thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  other  fingers 
closed,  the  elbows  near  the  body. 

5.  Draw — Rammer. 

One  time  and  three  tnotions. 

160.  (First  motion.)  Half  draw  the  rammer  by  extending  the 
right  arm  ;  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb;  grasp 
the  rammer  near  the  muzzle  with  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger 
uppermost,  tbe  nailH  to  the  front,  the  thumb  extended  along  the 
rammer. 

161.  {Second  motion.)  Clear  the  rammer  from  the  pipes  by 
again  extending  the  arm  ;  the  rammer  in  the  prolongation  of  the 
pipes. 

VG2.  {Third  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  little  end  of  tho 
rammer  passing  near  the  left  shoulder ;  place  tho  head  of  the  ram- 
mer on  the  ball,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

G.  Ram — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  en",  motion. 

163.  Insert  the  rammer  us  far  as  the  right,  and  steady  it  in  this 
position  with  the  thumb  of  the  left  hand  ;  seize  the  rammer  at  the 
small  end  with  tho  thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand,  the 
back  of  the  hand  to  the  front;  press  the  ball  home,  the  elbows 
near  the  body. 

7.  lieiurn — Rammer. 

One  \ime  and  three  motions. 

iCy  (Fir.ot  moti/fli.)  Draw  tho  rammer  half-way  out,  and  steady 
it  in  this  ]>c>Mit ion  with  the  left  thumb;  grasp  it  near  the  muzzle 
with  ViiC  right  hand,  (he  little  finger  uppermost,  the  nails  to  tho 
front,  the  thni^jb  along  the  rnmnicr;  clear  the  rammer  from  tho 
iKtre  by  extending  iI)o  arm,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  rammer  in 
the  prolongation  of  the  bore. 

105.  {Srcoiid  root  Inn)  Tnr.'"»  the  rammer,  the  head  of  the  mm- 
mor  passing  near  the  left  shoulder,  and  insert  it  in  the  pipes  until 
tho  right  hand  reaches  theonuzzlc,  thd  iiriils  to  the  front. 

1(»G.  {Third  motion.)  Force  the  rammer  home  b}'  placing  tho 
little  finger  of  the  right  hand  on  the  head  of  the  rammer  ;  pmetlo 
h'ft  hand  down  t!m  barrel  to  the  extent  of  the  arm,  without  de- 
pressing the  shoulder. 


20  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

8.  Prime.* — One  time  and  two  motions. 

167.  (First  motion.)  With  the  left  hand  raise  the  piece  till  the 
hand  is  as  high  as  the  eye,  grasp  the  small  of  the  stock  with 
the  right  hand;  half  face  to  the  right;  place,  at  the  same  time, 
the  right  foot  behind  and  at  right  angles  with  the  left;  the  hollow 
of  the  right  foot  against  the  left  heel.  Slip  the  left  hand  down  to 
the  lower  band,  the  thumb  along  the  stock,  the  left  elbow  against 
the  body ;  bring  the  piece  to  the  right  side,  the  butt  below  the  right 
fore-arm — the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two  inches 
below  the  right  breast,  the  barrel  upwards,  the  rau7-zle  on  a  level 
with  the  eye. 

168.  (Second  motion.)  Half  cock  with  the  thumb  of  the  right 
hand,  the  fingers  supported  against  the  guai'd  and  the  small  of  the 
stock — remove  the  old  cap  with  one  of  the  fingers  of  the  right 
hand,  and  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  same  hand  take 
a  cap  from  the  pouch,  place  it  on  the  nipple,  and  press  it  down 
with  the  thumb;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand. 

9.  Should er—AR-MB. 
One  time  and  tv:o  motion-^. 

169.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right  shoulder  and 
support  it  there  with  the  left  hand,  face  to  the  front;  bring  the 
right  heel  to  the  side  of  and  on  a  line  with  the  left;  grasp  tlio 
piece  with  the  right  hand  as  indicated  in  the  position  of  shoulder 
arms. 

170.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 

Ready. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

171.  (First  motion.)  Eaisethe  piece  slightly  with  the  right  hand, 
making  a  half  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel ;  carry  the  right 
foot  to  the  rear,  and  place  it  at  right  angles  to  the  left,  the  h»llow 
of  it  opposite  to,  and  against  the  left  heel  ;  grasp  the  piece  with 
the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the 
shoulder. 

172.  (Second  )7iotion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the 
barrel  upward.^,  the  left  thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  the  butt 
below  the  right  fore-arm,  the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body 
and  two  inches  below  the  right  breast,  the  muzp^le  n&  high  as  the 
eye,  the  left  elbow  against  the  side ;  place  at  tha  same  time  the 
right  thumb  on  the  heiid  of  the  cook,  the  other  fingers  under  and 
against  the  guard. 


*If  Maynard's  j-irimer  bo  uaed,  ti\f.  eommund  will  be:  load  in  eight  Hrn-es,  and  the 
eighth  command  will  be,  Bh</ul<hT  arms,  and  executed  from  rtiurn  ramrner,  in  one  time  and 
two  motion.s,  a.'^  follow*' ; 

(First  vwtion.)  Rair<e  the  piece  with  the  left-hand,  und  ti\kc  the  poi?it4on  of  shoulder 
arms,  aa  indicated  No.  146. 

(Second  vuytion.)    Drop  the  left  hand  quiildy  hy  thf   sidf-. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  21 


173.  (Third  motion.)  Cock,  and  seize  the  pioc-e  at  the  pmall  of 
the  stock  without  deranging  the  position  of  the  butt. 

Aim. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

174.  Raise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  and  support  the  butt 
against  the  right  shoulder;  the  left  elbow  down,  the  right  as  high 
as  the  shoulder;  incline  the  head  upon  the  butt,  so  that  the  right 
eye  may  perceive  quickly  the  notch  of  the  haussc,  the  front  sight, 
and  the  object  aimed  at;  the  left  eye  closed,  the  right  thumb 
extended  along  the  stock,  the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger. 

175.  When  recruits  are  formed  in  two  ranks  to  execute  the 
firings,  the  front  rank  men  will  raise  a  little  less  the  right  elbow, 
in  order  to  facilitate  the  aim  of  the  rear  rank  men. 

176.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  aiming,  will  each  carry  the  right 
foot  about  ten  inches  to  the  right,  and  towards  the  left  heel  of  the 
man  next  on  the  right,  inclining  the  upper  part  of  the  body 
forward. 

Fire. 

(h\e  time  and  one  motion. 

177.  rres.s  the  fore-finger  against  the  trigger,  fire,  without  low- 
ering or  turning  the  head,  and  remain  in  this  position. 

178.  Instructors  will  bo  careful  to  observe  when  the  men  fire, 
that  thej^  aim  at  some  distinct  object,  and  that  the  barrel  be  so 
directed  that  the  line  of  fire  and  the  line  of  sight  be  in  the  same 
vertical  plane.  They  will  often  cause  the  firing  to  be  executed  on 
ground  of  different  inclinations,  in  order  to  accustom  the  men  to 
fire  at  objects  either  above  or  below  them. 

Load. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

179.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  at  the  same  time 
face  to  the  front  and  Uike  the  position  of  load  as  indicated  No. 
156.  Each  rear  rank  man  will  bring  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of 
the  loft. 

180.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  the  instructor  will  cause 
the  loading  to  be  continued  by  the  commands  and  means  pre- 
scribed No.  15G  and  following. 

181.  \f^  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not  wish  the  recruits 
to  reload,  ho  will  command  : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

182.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left  hand  and  resume 
the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  at  the  same  time  face  to  the  front, 
turning  on  %he  left  heel,  and  bring  the  right  heel  on  a  line  with 
the  left. 


22  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

183.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the  command  firCy  the 
instructor,  when  they  are  in  the  position  of  aim,  will  command : 

Recover — -Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

184.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  withdraw  the  finger 
from  the  trigger ;  at  the  command  arms,  retake  the  position  of  the 
third  motion  of  ready. 

185.  The  recruits  being  in  the  position  of  the  third  motion  of 
ready,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to  bring  them  to  a  shoulder, 
he  will  command : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

186.  At  the  command  shoulder,  place  the  thumb  upon  the  cock, 
the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger,  half-cock,  and  seize  the  small  of  the 
stock  with  the  right  hand.  At  the  command  arms,  bring  up  the 
piece  briskly  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  position  of 
shoulder  arms. 

187.  The  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  fix  bayonets,  he  will  command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

188.  (First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the 
hight  of  the  shoulder,  and  detach  it  slightly  from  the  shoulder 
with  the  right  hand. 

189.  {Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  lower 
it  with  the  left  hand,  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  and  place 
the  butt  between  the  feet  without  shock  ;  the  rammer  to  the  rear, 
the  barrel  vertical,  the  muzzle  three  inches  from  the  body ;  seize 
it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  uj^per  band,  and  carry  the  left  hand 
reversed  to  the  handle  of  the  sabre-bayonet. 

190.  {Third  motion.)  Di-aw  the  sabre-bayonet  from  the  scabbard 
and  fix  it  on  the  extremity  of  the  barrel ;  seize  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand,  the  arm  extended,  the  right  hand  at  the  upper  band. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

191.  (First  motion.)  Eaise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and  plaoo 
it  against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front;  seize  the 
piece  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  swell  of  the 
stock,  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard,  the  right 
a,rm  nearly  extended. 

192.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  briskly  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Charge — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

193.  (First  motion.)  Eaise  the  piece  slightly  with  the  right  hand 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  23 

and  make  a  lialf  face  to  the  right  on  the  left  heel;  place  the  hol- 
low of  the  right  foot  opposite  to,  and  three  inches  from  the  left 
heel,  the  feet  squai-e ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the 
left  hand  a  little  above  the  lower  band. 

194.  (Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the 
barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body;  seize  the  small 
of  the  stock,  at  the  same  time,  with  the  right  hand,  which  will  be 
supported  against  the  hip ;  the  point  of  the  sabre-bayonet  as  high 
as  the  eye. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

195.  (First  motion.)  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left 
hand  in  facing  to  the  front,  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  the 
rammer  to  the  front;  turn  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the 
guard,  slide  the  left  hand  to  the  hight  of  the  shoulder,  the  right 
hand  nearly  extended. 

196.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the  Bide. 

Trail — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  ?notions. 

197.  (First  ynotion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  order  arms. 

198.  (Second  motion.)  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly  to  the  front, 
the  butt  to  the  rear  and  about  four  inches  from  the  ground.  The 
right  hand  supported  at  the  hip,  will  so  hold  the  piece  that  the 
rear  rank  men  may  not  touch  witli  their  bayonets  the  men  in  the 
front  rank. 

Shoulcter — Arms. 

199.  At  the  command  shoulder,  raise  the  piece  perpendicularly 
in  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the  barrel ;  at  the 
command  arms,  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  shudder 
from  the  position  of  order  anns. 

Unfix — Bayonet. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

200.  (First  and  second  vwtions.)  The  same  as  the  first  and  second 
motions  o^  fix  bayonet,  except  that,  at  the  end  of  the  second  com- 
mand, the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  will  be  placed  on  the  spring  of 
the  sabre-bayonet,  and  the  left  hand  will  embrace  the  handle  of 
the  sabre-bayonet  and  the  l)a»rel.  the  thumb  extended  along  the 
blade. 

201.  (Third  motion.)  Press  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  on  the 
spring,  wrest  off  the  sabre-ltayonet,  turn  it  to  the  right,  the  edge 
to  the  front,  lower  the  guard  until  it  touches  the  right  hand,  whic^i 
will  seize  the  back  and  the  (.(Ige  of  the  blade  between  the  thumb 
and  first  two  fingers,  the  other  fingers  holding  the  piece;  change 
the  position  of  the  hand  without  quitting  the  handle,  return  the 
sabre-bayonet  to  the  scabbard,  and  seize  the  piece  with  the  loft 
hand,  the  arm   extended. 


34  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

202.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  from  jix  bayo- 
net, No.  191. 

'  203.  (Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  motion  from  fix 
bayonet,  No.  192. 

Secure — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

204.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  support  arms, 
No.  133,  except  with  the  right  hand  seize  the  piece  at  the  small  of 
the  stock. 

205.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  bar- 
rel to  the  front;  bring  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt 
against  the  hip,  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  as  high 
a.s  the  chin  and  extended  on  the  rammer ;  the  piece  erect  and 
detached  from  the  shoulder,  the  left  fore-arm  against  the  piece. 

206.  (Third  motion.)  Eeverse  the  piece,  pass  it  under  the  left 
arm,  the  left  hand  remaining  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  on  the 
rammer  to  prevent  it  from  sliding  out,  the  little  finger  resting 
agaiHst  the  hip,  the  right  hand  falling  at  the  same  time  by  the 
side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

207.  (First  ^notion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  seize 
it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock.  The  piece  erect 
and  detached  from  the  shoulder,  tke  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left 
fore-arm  along  the  piece. 

208.  (Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  motion  of  shoulder 
arms  from  a  support. 

209.  (Third  motion.)  The  same  as  the  third  motion  of  shoulder 
arms  from  a  support. 

Eight  shoulder  shift — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

210.  (First  motion.)  Detach  the  piece  perpendicularly  from  the 
shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  and  seize  it  with  the  left  between 
the  lower  band  and  guide-sight,  raise  the  piece,  the  left  hand  at  the 
bight  of  the  shoulder  and  four  inches  from  it ;  place,  at  the  same 
time,  the  right  hand  on  the  butt,  the  beak  between  the  first  two* 
fingers,  the  other  two  fingers  \inder  the  butt  plate. 

211.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  raise 
and  place  the  piece  o»  the  right  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  the 
lock  plate  upwards;  let  fall,  at  the  same  time,  the  left  hand  by  the 
side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

212.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  perpendicularly  by  extend- 


SCirOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  ^^ 

ing  the  right  arm  to  its  full  length,  the  rammer  to  the  front,  at  the 
same  time  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  between  the  lower 
band  and  guide  sight. 

213.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  butt  with  the  right  hand,  whic*li 
will  immediately  embrace  the  guard,  lower  the  piece  to  the  posi- 
tion of  shoulder  arms,  slide  up  the  left  hand  to  the  hight  ol"  tho 
shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and  closed.  Drop  the  left  hand  by 
the  side. 

214.  The  men  being  at  support  arms,  the  instructor  will  some- 
times cause  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder.  To  this 
effect,  he  will  command  : 

Right  shoulder  shift — Arms. 
One  time  and  tico  motions. 

215.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  below 
and  near  the  Icfl  fore-arm,  place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt,  the 
heel  of  the  butt  between  the  first  two  lingers. 

216.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock 
plate  upwards,  carry  it  to  the  right  shoulder,  the  left  hand  still 
holding  the  butt,  the  muzzle  elevated  ;  hold  the  piece  in  this  posi- 
tion and  place  the  right  hand  upon  the  butt  as  is  prescribed  No. 
210,  and  let  fall  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Support — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  ^notions. 

217.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  fix'st  motion  of  shoulder 
arms,  No.  212. 

218.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel 
to  the  fi'ont,  carry  it  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  slip  the  right  hand 
to  the  small  of  the  stock,  place  the  left  fore-arm  extended  on  the 
breast  as  is -prescribed  No.  134,  and  let  fall  the  right  hand  by  the 
side. 

Arms — At  will. 

One  time  jind  one  motion. 

219.  At  this  command,  carry  the  piece  at  pleasure  on  either 
shoulder,  with  one  or  both  hands,  the  muzzle  elevated. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

220.  At  this  command,  retake  quickly  the  position  of  shoulder 
arms. 

'>.21.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  when  the  instructor 

"isn  w  cause  the  pieces  to  be  pUiccd  on  the  ground,  he  will 
oommana-.  r.  ' 

Ground — Arms. 

^<-  Hme  and  ttto  motion-^ 

222.  (Fint  motion.)  Turn  tht  piece  with  the  right  hand,  Uie  bar- 


26  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

rel  to  the  left ;  at  the  same  time  seize  the  cartridge  box  with  the 
left  hand,  bend  the  body,  advance  the  left  foot,  the  heel  opposite 
the  lower  band  ;  lay  the  piece  on  the  ground  with  the  right  hand, 
the  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with  the  right  toe,  the  knees  slightly 
bent,  the  right  heel  raised.  ' 

223.  (Second  motion.)  Rise  up,  bring  the  left  foot  by  the  side  of 
the  right,  quit  the  cartridge  box.  with  the  left  hand,  and  drop  the 
h-ands  by  the  side. 

jRaise — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

224.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand, 
bend  the  body,  advance  the  left  foot  opposite  the  lower  band,  and 
seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand. 

225.  (Second  motion.)  Raise  the  piece,  bringing  the  left  foot  by 
the  side  of  the  right;  turn  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  the  ram- 
mer to  the  front ;  at  the  same  time  quit  the  cartridge  box  with  the 
left  hand,  and  drop  this  hand  by  the  side. 

Inspection  of  Ar7ns. 

226.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  and  having  the  sabre- 
bayonet  in  the  scabbard,  if  the  instrustor  wishes  to  cause  an  in- 
spection of  arms,  he  will  command : 

Inspection — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

227.  (First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  wnth  the  left  hand  below  and 
near  the  upper  baud,  carry  it  with  both  hands  opposite  the  middle 
of  the  body,  the  butt  between  the  feet,  the  rammer  to  the  rear, 
the  barrel  vertical,  the  muzzle  about  three  inches  from  the  body; 
carry  the  left  hand  reversed  to  the  sabre  bayonet,  draw  it  from  the 
scabbai-d  and  fix  it  on  the  barrel ;  grasp  the  piece  with  tbe  left 
hand  below  and  near  the  upper  band,  seize  the  rammer  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand  bent,  the  other  fingers 
closed. 

228.  (Second  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  as  has-been  explained 
in  loading,  and  let  it  glide  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore,  replace  the 
piece  with  the  left  hand  opposite  the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the 
position  of  ordered  arms. 

229.  The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succession  the  piece  of 
each  recruit,  in  passing  along  the  front  of  the  rank.  Each,  as  the 
instructor  reaches  him,  will  raise  smartly  his  piece  with  his  right 
hand,  seize  it  with  the  left  between  the  lower  band  and  guide  sight 


the  recruit,  who  will  receive  i1 

place  it  in  the  position  of  ordered  arms.  ,   vAon 

230.     When  the  instructor  shall  hav^  passed  him,  eacn  iei.iv 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  27 

will  retake  the  position  prescribed  at  the  command  inspcctiori  a7'7t\s, 
roturn  the  rammer,  and  resume  the  position  of  ordered  anyis. 

231.  If,  instead  of  inspection  o/^7-wi5,  the  instructor  Rhonld  merely 
wish  to  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  he  will  command  : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

232.  Take  the  position  indicated  in  No.  227,  fix  bayonets  as  has 
been  explained,  and  immediately  resume  the  position  of  ordered 
arms. 

233.  If  it  bo  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after  firing,  to  ascertain 
whetlvcr  the  pieces  have  been  discharged,  he  will  command  : 

Spring — Rammers. 

234.  Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel  as  has  been  explained  above, 
and  immediately  retake  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

235.  The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can  take  the  ram- 
mer by  the  small  end,  and  spring  it  in  the  barrel,  or  cause  each 
recruit  to  make  it  ring  in  the  barrel. 

236.  Each  recruit,  after  the  instructor  passes  him,  will  return 
rammer  and  resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

Remarks  on  the  Manual  of  Arms. 

237.  The  manual  of  arms  frequently  distorts  the  persons  of  re- 
cruits before  tlicy  acquire  case  and  confidence  in  the  several  posi- 
tions. The  instructor  will  therefore  frequently  recur  to  element- 
ary principles  in  the  course  of  the  lessons. 

238.  Tlecruits  are  also  extremely  liable  to  curve  the  sides  and 
back,  and  to  derange  the  shoulders,  especially  in  loading.  Conse- 
quently, the  instructor  will  not  cause  them  to  dwell  too  long  at  a 
time  in  one  position. 

239.  When,  after  smne  days  of  exercise  in  the  manual  of  arms, 
the  four  men  shall  be  well  established  in  their  use,  the  instructor 
will  always  terminate  the  lesson  by  marching  the  men  for  some 
time  in  one  rank,  and  at  one  pace  apart,  in  common  and  quick 
time,  in  order  to  confirm  them  more  and  more  in  the  mechanism  of 
the  step  ;  he  will  also  teach  them  to  mark  time  and  to  change  stej; ; 
which  will  bo  executed  in  the  following  manner: 

To  mark  time. 

240.  The  four  men  marching  in  the  direct  step,  the  instructor 
will  command  : 

1.  Mark  time.     2.  March. 

241.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
A  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  tiie  recruit*  will  make  a  semblance 
of  marching,  by  bringing  the  heels  by  the  side  of  each  other,  and 
observing  the  cadence  of  the  step,  by  raising  each  foot  alternately 
without  advancing. 

242.  The  instructor  wishing  the  direct  step  to  be  rowumed,  will 
command  : 


28  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

243.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  as  prescribed 
above,  the  recruits  will  retake  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches. 

To  change  step. 

244.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will   command: 

1.  Change  step.     2.  March. 

245.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  bring  the  foot  which  is  in  rear 
by  the  side  of  that  which  is  in  front,  and  step  off  again  with  the 
foot  which  was  in  front. 

2^0  march  backwards. 

246.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  backwards,  will 
command : 

1.  Squad  backward.     2.  March. 

247.  At  the  second  command,  the  reci'uits  will  step  oif  smartly 
with  the  left  foot  fourteen  inches  to  the  rear,  reckoning  from  heel 
to  heel,  and  so  on  with  the  feet  in  succession  till  the  command  halt, 
which  will  always  be  preceded  by  the  caution  squad.  The  men 
will  halt  at  this  command,  and  bring  back  the  foot  in  front  by  the 
side  of  the  other. 

248.  This  step  will  always  be  executed  in  quick  time. 

249.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  recruits  march 
straight  to  the  rear,  and  that  the  erect  position  of  the  body  and  the 
piece  be  not  deranged. 

Lesson  III. —  To  load  in  four  times. 

250.  The  object  of  this  lesson  is  to  prepare  the  recruits  to  load 
at  will,  and  to  cause  them  to  distinguish  the  times  which  require 
the  greatest  regularity  and  attention,  siich  as  charge  cartridge,  ram 
cartridge  and  prime.     It  will  be  divided  as  follows  : 

251.  The  first  time  will  be  executed  at  the  end  of  the  command; 
I3ie  three  others  at  the  commands,  two,  three  and/owr. 

The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Load  in  four  times.     2.  Load. 

252.  Execute  the  times  to  include  charge  cartridge. 

Two. 

253.  Execute  the  times  to  include  ram  cartridge. 

Three. 
,  254.  Execute  the  times  to  include  prime. 

Four. 

255.  Execute  the  time  of  shoulder  arms. 

To  load  at  will. 

256.  The  instruotor  will  next  teach  loading  at  will,  which  will 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  29 


be  executed  a«  loading  in  four  times,  but  continued,  and  without 
resting  on  either  of  the  times.     lie  Avill  command  : 

1.  Load  at   icill.     2.  Load. 

257.  Thw  instructor  will  habituate  the  recruits,  by  degress,  to 
load  with  the  greatest  posKible  promptitude,  each  without  regula- 
ting him8elf  by  his  neighbor,  and  above  all  without  waiting  for 
hi.nXj 

268.  The  cadence  prescribed  No.  129,  i.s  not  applicable  to  load- 
ing in  fourtime^s,  or  at  will. 

Lesson    IV. — Firings. 

259.  The  firings  are  direct  or  oblique,  and  will  be  oxciiutcd  as 
follows  . 

The  direct  fire. 

260.  The  instructor  will  give  the  following  commands  : 

1.  Fire  by  sqwid.      2.  Squad.      3.   Ready.       4.    Aim.       5.  Fjrk. 

G.  Load. 

261.  ThoHe  several  c<^nimands  will  be  executed  as  has  been  pre- 
scribed in  the  Manual  of  Arms.  At  the  third  command,  the  men 
will  come  to  the  position  of  ready  as  heretofore  explained.  At 
the  fourth  they  will  aim  according  to  the  rank  in  which  each  may 
find  himself  placed,  the  rear  rank  men  inclining  forward  a  little 
the  upper  part  of  the  body,  in  order  that  their  pieces  may  reach 
as  much  beyond  the  front  rank  as  post^iblc. 

262.  At  the  sixth  command  they  will  load  their  pieco.i  and  re- 
turn immediately  to  the  position  of  ready. 

263.  Tho  iiiPtruct<)r  will  recommence  the  firing  by  the  command  : 

1.  Squad.     2.  Aim.     8.  Fire.     4.  Load. 

164.  Whe.ri  the  instruet'^r  wishes  the  firing  to  cease,  he  will 
command  : 

Cc/ise  firiiX'g. 

2n5.  At  this  rr^mmand  the  men  will  cca«e  firing,  but  will  load 
their  pie<yvj  If  unloarled,  and  afterwards  bring  them  to  a  shoulder. 

Oblique  firings. 

266.  The  obliqut'  firings  will  be  cxtxjut<Hi  to  the  right  and  left, 
and  by  the  same  commands  a.s  the  direct  fire,  with  this  single  dif- 
ferenc<> — the  command  aim  will  alvvHyrt  be  |>roccded  by  the  cau- 
Mo«,  right  or  left  ol)lique. 

Position  of  thf  tiro  rari/\s  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  tJw.  right. 

a6T.  At  the  command  ready,  the  two  ranks  will  oxe<'Ute  what 
ha«  been  prt*»cribc<l  for  the  direct  fire. 

268.  At  the  cautionary  command,  right  oldique.  tho  two  ranlcM 
will  throw  back  tho  right  shoiildor  and  look  st^'adily  at  thf  object 
to  b*'  hit 


30  SCHOOL  OF  thp:  soldier. 

^  269.  At  the  command,  aim,  each  front  rank  man  will  aim  to  the 
right  without  deranging  the  feet ;  each  rear  i*ank  man  Avill  ad- 
vance the  left  foot  about  eight  inches  toward  the  right  heel  of  the 
man  next  on  the  right  of  his  file  leader  and  aim  to  the  right,  in- 
clining the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  and  bending  a  little 
the  left  knee. 

Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  the  left. 

270.  At  the  cautionary  command,  left  oblique,  the  two  ranks  will 
throw  back  the  left  shoulder  and  look  steadily  at  the  object  to  be 
hit. 

27L  At  the  command,  aim,  the  front  rank  will  take  aim  to  the 
left  without  deranging  the  feet;  each  man  in  the  rear  will  advance 
the  right  foot  about  eight  inches  toward  the  right  heel  of  the  man 
next  on  the  right  of  his  file  leader,  and  aim  to  the  left,  inclining  the 
upper  part  of  the  body  forward  and  bending  a  little  the  right  knee, 

272.  In  both  cases,  at  the  command,  load,  the  men  of  each  rank 
will  come  to  the  position  of  load  as  pre-scribod  in  the  direct  firej 
the  rear  rank  men  bringing  back  the  foot  Avhich  is  to  the  right  and 
fi'ont  by  the  side  of  the  other.  Each  man  will  continue  to  load  as 
if  isolated. 

To  fire  by  fiU. 

273.  The  fire  by  tile  will  be  executed  by  the  two  ranks,  the  files 
of  which  will  fire  successively,  and  without  regulating  on  eaoh 
other,  except  for  the  first  fire. 

274.  The  instructor  will  command: 

1.  Fire  by  file.     2.  Squad.     3.  REApy.     4.    Commence  firing. 

275.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take  the  po8l'ti<» 
prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 

276.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  file  on  the  right  will  aim  and 
fire;  the  rear  rank  man  in  aiming  will  take  the  position  indicated 
No.  176. 

277.  The  men  of  this  file  will  load  their  pieces  briskly  and  fire  a 
second  time  ;  reload  and  fire  again,  and  so  on  in  continuation. 

278.  The  second  file  will  aim  at  the  instant  the  first  brings 
down  pi(>ces  to  reload,  and  will  conform  in  all  respects  to  that  which 
has  just  been  pi'cscribed  for  the  first  file. 

279.  After  the  first  fire,  the  front  and  rear  rank  men  will  not  be 
required  to  fire  at  the  same  time. 

280.  Each  man,  after  loading,  will  return  to  the  position  of 
ready,  and  continno  the  fire. 

281.  Wlien  the  instructor  wishes  tho  fire  to  cease,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

Cease — Firing. 

282.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing.  If  they  havS 
fired  they  will  load  their  pieces  and  bring  them  to  a  shoulder;  if 
at  tho  position  of  ready,  they  will  half-coc!v  and  shoulder  arms. 
If  in  the  position  oP  aim,  they  will  bring  down  tlieir  pieces,  half- 
cock,  and  shoulder  ai-ms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  31 


To  fire  by  rank. 

283.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  each  entire  rank,  al- 
ternately. 

284.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  rank.     2.  Squad.     3.    Ready.     4.   Rear  Hank.     5.  Aim. 
G.  Fire.      7.  Load. 

285.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take  the  position 
of  ready,  an  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 

286.  At  the  seventh  command,  the  roar  rank  will  execute  that 
which  has  been  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire,  and  al"terward»  take 
the  position  of  ready. 

287.  As  soon  as  the  instructor  sees  several  men  of  the  rear  rank 
in  the  position  of  ready,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Front  Jiaiik.     2.  Aim.     3.  Fire.      4.  Load. 

288.  At  these  commands,  the  men  in  the  front  rank  will  execute 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  roar  rank,  but  they  will  not  step 
off  with  right  foot. 

289.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by  the  rear  rank, 
and  will  thus  continue  to  alternate  from  rank  to  rank,  until  he 
shall  wish  the  firing  to  cease,  when  he  will  command,  cease  firingy 
which  will  be  executed  as  heretofore  pi'cscribed. 

-Lesson  V. —  To  fire  and  load  kneeling. 

290.  \y\  this  exorcise  the  ^quad  will  be  supposed  loaded  and 
drawn  up  in  one  rank.  The  instruction  will  be  given  to  each  man 
individually,  without  times  or  motions,  and  in  the  following 
manner. 

29L  The  instructor  will  command: 

Fire  and  load  kn£Elino. 

202.  At  thin  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  squad  will 
move  forward  three  paces  and  halt;  then  carry  the  right  foot  to 
the  rear  and  to  the  right  of  the  left  heel,  and  in  a  ])OHition  conve- 
nient for  placing  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground  in  bending  the 
left  leg ;  place  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground;  lower  the  piece, 
the  left  f<jre  arm  supported  upon  the  thigh  on  tlio  same  side,  the 
right  hand  on  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  butt  resting  on  the  right 
thigh,  the  led  hand  supjtorting  the  piece  m  ar  the  lower  Viand. 

29.J.  }lc  will  next  move  the  right  leg  to  the  lefl  .sirouml  the  knoo 
supported  on  the  ground,  until  this  leg  is  nearly  jtcrpendicular  to 
the  direction  of  the  left  foot,  and  thus  scat  himself  comfortably  on 
the  right  heol. 

294.  Itiiiso  the  piece  vrith  the  right  hand  and  wupjiort  it  with  the 
left,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band,  the  Icfl  elbow  resting  on  the 
left  thigh  near  the  knee  ;  seize  the  hammer  with  tin-  thumb,  the 
f)rc  finger  under  the  guard,  crck  and  Beiz.e  the  pie<  e  at  the  Bmall 
of  the  BUjck  ;  bring  the  piece  to  the  shoulder,  a\m  and  fire. 


^2  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


295.  Bring  the  piece  down  as  soon  as  it  is  fired,  and  support  it 
witli  the  left  hand,  the  butt  resting  against  the  right  thigh  ;  carry 
the  piece  to  the  rear  rising  on  the  knee,  the  barrel  downwards,  the 
l)utt  resting  on  the  ground  ;  in  this  position  support  the  piece  with 
the  left  hand  at  the  upper  band,  draw  cartridge  with  the  right  and 
load  the  piece,  ramming  the  ball,  if  necessary,  with  both  hands. 

296.  When  loaded  bring  the  piece  to  the  front  Avith  the  left 
hand,  which  holds  it  at  the  upper  band ;  seize  it  at  the  same  time 
with  the  right  hand  at  the  smsiU  of  the  stock  ;  turn  the  piece,  the 
barrel  uppermost  and  nearly  horizontal,  the  left  elbow  resting  on 
the  left  thigh  ;  half-cock,  l*emove  the  old  cq^  and  prime,  rise,  and 
return  to  the  ranks. 

297.  The  second  man  will  then  be  taught  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on  through  the  remainder  of  the 
squad. 

Fire  and  load  lying. 

298.  In  this  exorcise  the  squad  will  be  in  one  rank  and  loaded : 
the  instruction  will  be  given  individually  and  without  times  or 
motions. 

299.  The  instructor  will  command  : 

Fire  and  load  lying. 

300.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  squad  will 
move  forward  three  paces  and  halt;  he  will  then  bring  his  piece 
to  an  order,  drop  on  both  knees,  and  place  himself  on  the  ground 
flat  on  his  belly.  In  this  position  he  wil  Isupport  the  piece  nearly 
horizontal  with  the  left  hand,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band,  the 
butt  end  of  the  piece  and  the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  ground,  the 
barrel  uppermost ;  cock  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  and  carry 
this  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock ;  raise  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  press  the  butt  against  the  shoulder,  and  resting  on  both 
elboAvs,  aim  and  fire. 

301.  As  soon  as  he  has  fired,  bring  the  piece  down  and  turn 
upon  his  left,  side,  still  resting  on  his  left  elbow;  bring  back  the 
piece  until  the  cock  is  opposite  his  breast,  the  butt  end  resting  on 
the  ground;  take  out  a  cartridge  with  the  right  hand;  seize  the 
small  of  the  stock  with  this  hand,  holding  the  cartridge  with  the 
thumb  and  two  first  fingers  ;  he  will  then  throw  himself  on  his 
back  still  holding  the  piece  with  both  hands  ;  carry  the  piece  to 
the  rear,  place  the  butt  between  the  heels,  the  barrel  up,  the  muz- 
zle elevated.  In  this  position,  charge  cartridge,  draw  rammer, 
ram  cartridge,  and  return  rammer. 

302.  When  finished  loading,  the  man  will  turn  again  upon  his 
left  side,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime,  then  raise  the  piece  verti- 
cally, rise,  turn  about,  and  resume  his  position  in  the  ranks. 

303.  The  second  man  Avill  be  taught  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  first,  and  so  on  throughout  the  squad. 


SCHOOL   OF    THE   SOLDIER.  33 

i '  ' 

Lesson  VI. — Bayonet  Exercise. 

304.  The  bayonet  exercise  in  this  book  will  be  confined  to  two 
movements,  the  guard  against  infantry,  and  the  guard  against  cav- 
alry. The  men  will  be  placed  in  one  rank,  with  two  pacea  interval, 
and  beint;  at  nlioulder  arms,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

I.  Guard  against  Infantry.     2.  Guard. 
One  time  and  tico  tnotions. 

ii05.  (First  motion.)  iSiixkc  a  half  face  to  the  right,  turning  on 
both  heels,  the  feet  square  to  each  other  ;  at  the  same  time  rai.so 
the  piece  slightly,  and  seize  it  with  the  loft  hand  above  and  near 
the  lower  band. 

30G.  (Seco7id  motion.)  Carry  the  right  foot  twenty  inches  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  rear,  the  right  heel  ou  the  prolongation  of  the  left, 
the  knees  slightlj*  bent,  the  weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  on 
both  legs;  lower  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost, 
the  left  elbow  again.st  the  body;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time 
with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  arms  falling 
naturally,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  slightly  elevated. 

Shoulder — Aiim.s. 

One  tiw^.  and  one  ^notion. 

307.  Throw  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  place  it  against 
the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time  bring  the  right  heel  by  the 
aide  of  the  left  and  face  to  the  front. 

1.   Guard  against  Cavalry.     2.  Guard. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

308.  ]ioth  motions  the  same  as  for  guard  against  infantry.,  except 
that  the  right  hand  will  be  supported  against  the  hip,  and  the 
bayonet  held  at  the   hight  of  the  eyi-,  jvh  in  charge  bayonet. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
(h\f  time  and  one  motion. 

309.  Spring  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and  place  it  against 
the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time  bring  the  right  hool  bv  the 
aide  of  the  left,  and  face  to  the  front. 

PAIIT     THIRD. 

310.  Wheu  the  recruits  are  well  estiiblislied  in  tho  principles  and 
mechanism  of  the  .ttrp,  the  position  of  the  body,  and  tfie  manual  of 
arms,  the  instructor  will  unite  eight  men.  at  least,  and  twolve  men, 
at  most,  in  order  to  tearh  them  the  principleH  of  alignment,  the 
principles  of  the  touch  of  elbowH  in  marching  to  the  front,  the 
princi|>le8  (^'f  the  march  by  tho  flank,  wheeling  from  a  halt,  wheel- 
ing in  marching,  and   the  chnngo  of  dirt»f:lion   to  the  Hide  of  tbo 

.1 


34  SCHOOL   OF  THE   SOLDIER. 

guide.     He  will  place  the  squad  in  one  rank  elbow  to  elbow,  and 
number  the  men  from  right  to  left. 

Lksson  I. — Alignments. 

311.  The  instructor  will  at  first  teach  the  recruits  to  align 
themselves  man  by  man,  in  order  the  better  to  make  them  com- 
prehend the  principles  of  alignment;  to  this  end,  he  will  command 
the  two  men  on  the  right  flank  to  march  two  paces  to  the  front, 
and  having  aligned  them,  he  will  caution  the  remainder  of  the 
squad  to  move  up,  as  they  may  be  successively  called,  each  by  his 
number,  and  align  themselves  successively  on  the  line  of  the  first 
two  men. 

312.  Each  recruit,  as  designated  by  his  number,  will  turn  the 
head  and  eyes  to  the  right  as  prescribed  in  the  first  lesson  of  the 
first  part,  and  will  march  in  quick  time  two  paces  fonvard,  shorten- 
ing the  last,  so  as  to  find  himself  about  six  inches  behind  the  new 
alignment,  which  ho  ought  never  to  pass ;  he  will  next  move  up 
steadily  by  steps  of  two  or  three  inches,  the  hams  extended,  to  the 
side  of  the  man  next  to  him  on  the  alignment,  so  that,  without 
dei'anging  the  head,  the  line  of  the  eyes,  or  that  of  the  shoulders, 
he  may  find  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  his  neighbor,  whose  elbow 
he  will  lightly  touch  without  opening  his  own. 

313.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rank  well  aligned,  will  command: 

Front. 

314.  At  this,  the  recruits  will  turn  eyes  to  the  front,  and  remain 
firm. 

315.  Alignments  to  the  left  will  be  executed  on  the  same 
principles. 

316.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  thus  learned  to  align  them- 
selves man  by  man,  correctly,  and  without  groping  or  jostling,  the 
instructor  will  cause  the  entire  rank  to  align  itself  at  once  by  the 
command  : 

Eight  (or  left) — Dress. 

317.  At  this,  the  rank,  except  the  two  men  placed  in  advance  as 
a  basis  of  alignment,  will  move  up  in  quick  time,  and  place  theni- 
selves  on  the  new  line,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  No. 
312. 

318.  The  instructor,  placed  five  or  six  paces  in  front,  and  facing 
the  rank,  will  carefully  observe  that  the  principles  are  followed, 
and  then  pass  to  the  flank  that  has  served  as  the  basis,  to  verify 
the  alignment. 

319.  The    instructor  seeing  the  greater   number   of  the    rank 

aligned,  will  command  : 

Front. 
,)if.i 

320.  The  instructor  may  afterwards  ovdcv  this  or  that  ^\q  foncard 
or  hack,  designating  each  by  its  number.  The  file  or  files  desig- 
nated, only,  will  slightly  turn  the  head  towards  the  basis,  to  judge 
how  much  they  ouglit  to  move  up  or  back,  steadily  place  them- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  36 

selves  on  the  line,  and  then  turn  eyes  to  the  front,  without  a  parti- 
cular command  to  that  effect. 

321.  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  executed  on  the  name  prin- 
ciples, the  recruits  stepping  back  a  little  beyond  the  line,  and  then 
dressing  up  according  to  tlie  principles  prescribed  No.  312,  the  in- 
structor commanding  : 

Right  (or  left)  bachuard — Dbi.ss 

322.  Arter  each  alignment,  the  instructor  will  examine  the  posi- 
tion of  the  men,  and  eause  the  rank  to  come  to  ordered  arms,  to 
prevent  too  much  fatigue,  and  also  the  danger  of  negligence  at 
shouldered  ar77is. 

LESSON  II. 

323.  The  men  liaving  learned,  in  the  first  and  second  parts,  to 
marcli  with  steadiness  in  common  time,  and  to  take  steps  equal  in 
length  and  swiftness,  will  be  exercised  in  the  third  part  only  in 
quick  time,  double  quick  time,  and  the  run ;  the  instructor  will  cause 
them  to  execute  successively,  at  these  different  gaits,  the  march  to 
the  front,  the  facing  about  in  marching,  the  march  by  the  flank, 
the  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  nianhing.  and  the  changes  of  direction 
to  the  side  of  the  guides. 

324.  The  instructor  will  inform  the  recruits  that  at  the  com- 
mand 1/utrch.  they  will  always  move  off  in  quick  time,  unless  this 
command  should  be  preceded  by  that  of  double  quick. 

To  march  to  the  front. 

325.  The  rank  being  corrcctl}-  aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the  front,  he  will  place  a  well  in- 
structed man  on  the  right  or  the  loll,  according  to  the  side  on 
which  he  may  wish  the  guide  to  be,  and  command  : 

1.  Squad, forxcard.      2.   Guide  right  (or  left.)     3.  March. 

32(j.  At  the  command  march,  the  rank  will  step  off  umartly  with 
the  lefl  foot;  the  guide  «ill  take  care  to  march  straight  to  the 
front,  kce]>ing  his  shouhlers  always  in  a  square  with  that  line. 

327.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  marching  to  ihe  front,  that 
the  men  touch  lightly  th«  elbow  towards  tin-  side  of  the  gui<le; 
that  they  do  not  open  out  the  left  elbow,  nor  the  right  arm  :  that 
they  yield  lo  presstin!  coming  from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  re- 
sist that  coming  from  the  opposite  side  ;  that  they  recover  by  in- 
sensible degrees  the  slight  toiieh  of  the  elbow,  if  lost;  (hat  thej- 
maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  no  matter  on  which  side  the 
guide  nay  be;  and  if  found  >R'fore  or  behind  the  alignment,  that 
the  man  in  fault  corrects  himself  by  shortening  (»r  lengthening  the 
step,  by  degrecis,  almost  insensible. 

32S.  The  ins(rucl^)r  will  labor  to  cause  recruits  to  C(»mprehend 
that  the  alignment  can  otil}'  be  preserved .  in  marching,  b}-  the  re- 
gularity of  the  step,  the  touch  of  the  elbow,  and  the  mainfcfiance 
>f  the  shoulders  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction  ;  that  if,  for 


36  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

example,  the  step  of  some  bo  longer  than  that  of  others,  or  if  gome 
march  faster  than  others,  a  separation  of  elbows,  and  a  loss  of  the 
alignment,  would  be  inevitable  ;  that  if  (it  being  required  that  the 
head  should  be  direct  to  the  front)  they  do  not  strictly  observe  the 
touch  of  elbows,  it  would  bo  impossible  for  an  individual  to  judge 
whether  ho  marches  abreast  witb  his  neighbor,  or  not,  and  whether 
there  bo  not  an  interval  between  them. 

329.  The  impulsion  of  the  quick  step  having  a  tendency  to  make 
men  too  easy  and  free  in  their  movements,  the  instructor  will  be 
careful  to  regulate  the  cadence  of  this  step,  and  to  habituate  them 
to  preserve  always  the  erectness  of  the  body,  and  the  duo  longth 
of  the  pace. 

330.  The  men  being  well  established  in  the  principles  of  the  di- 
rect march,  the  instructor  will  exercise  them  in  marching  oblique- 
ly.    The  rank  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Itight  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

331.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a  half  face 
to  the  right  (or  loft),  and  will  then  march  straight  forward  in  the 
new  direction.  As  the  men  no  longer  touch  elbows,  they  will 
glance  along  the  shoulders  of  tho  nearest  files,  towards  the  side  to 
which  the}''  are  obliquing,  and  will  I'Ogulato  their  steps  so  that  the 
shoulders  shall  always  bo  behind  that  of  their  next  neighbor  on 
that  side,  and  that  his  head  shall  conceal  the  heads  of  tho  other 
men  in  the  rank.  Besides  this,  the  men  should  preserve  the  same 
length  of  pace,  and  the  same  degree  of  obliquity. 

332.  Tho  instructor,  wishing  to  resume  tho  primitive  direction, 
will  command : 

1.  Forward.     2.  Marcu. 

333.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make  a  half  face  to 
the  left  (or  right),  and  all  will  thou  march  straight  to  the  front, 
conforming  to  the  principles  of  the  direct  march. 

To  nuirch  to  the  front  in  Sbublc  cpiick  time. 

334.  When  the  several  principles,  heretofore  explained,  have  be- 
come familiar  to  tho  recruits,  and  they  shall  be  \vell  established  in 
the  position  of  the  body,  the  bearing  of  arms,  and  the  mechanism, 
length,  and  swiftness  of  tho  step,  tho  instructor  will  pass  them 
from  quick  to  double  quick  time,  and  the  reverse,  observing  not  to 
make  them  march  obliquely  in  double  quick  time,  till  they  are  well 
established  in  the  cadence  ot  this  step. 

335.  The  squad  being  at  a  march  in  quick  time,  tho  inytructor 
will  command  : 

1.  Double  q^iick.     2.  March. 

336.  At  the  command  inarch,  which  will  be  given  when  either 
foot  is  coming  t<j  the  ground,  tho  squad  will  step  off  in  double  quick 
time.  The  men  will  endeavor  to  follow  the  principles  laid  down 
in  tho  first  part  of  this  book,  and  to  pretH-rve  the  alignment. 


SCHOOL     OF  THE  SOLDIER.  37 


337.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  squad  to  resume  tlie  sU'p  in 
quick  time,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Quick  time. .  2.  March. 

338.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  when  either 
foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad  will  retake  the  step  in 
quick  time. 

339.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will  halt  it  by 
the  commands  and  means  prescribed  Nos.  98  and  99.  The  com- 
mand halt,  will  be  given  an  instant  before  the  foot  is  ready  to  be 
placed  on  the  ground. 

340.  The  squad  being  in  march  in  double  quick  time,  the  in- 
structor will  occasionally  cause  it  to  mark  time  by  the  commands 
proscribed  No.  240.  The  men  will  then  mark  double  quick  time, 
without  altering  the  cadence  of  the  step.  He  will  also  cause  them 
to  pass  from  the  direct  to  the  oblique  stc]),  and  reciprocal  1}',  con- 
forming to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  330,  and  following; 

341.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to 
march  in  double  quick  time,  by  preceding  the  command  march,  by 
double  quick. 

342.  The  instructor  will  endeavor  to  regulate  well  the  cadence 
of  this  step. 

To  face  about  in  marching. 

343.  If  the  squad  be  marching  in  quick,  or  double  quick  time, 
and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  tSguad  right  about.     2.  March. 

344.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
the  left  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  recruit  will  bring  this 
foot  to  the  ground,  and  turning  on  it,  will  face  to  the  rear ;  he  wWl 
then  place  the  right  foot  in  the  new  direction,  and  step  ofl'  with 
the  left  foot. 

To  maj'ch  backward.^. 

345.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  to 
inarch  it  in  the  back  8t<;p,  lie  will  command  : 

1.  Squad  backward.     2.   Quide  left  (or  right).     3.  March. 

340.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  by  the  means  prescribed 
No.  247. 

347.  The  instructor,  in  this  step,  will  be  watchful  that  the  men 
do  not  lean  on  each  other. 

348.  As  the  march  to  the  front  in  quick  time  should  only  be  ex- 
ecuted at  shouldered  arros,  the  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue 
the  men  too  much,  and  also  to  prevent  negligence  in  gait  and  posi- 
tion, will  halt  the  squad  from  time  to  time,  and  cause  arms  to  be 
ordered. 

349.  In  marching  at  double  quick  time,  the  men  will  always  carry 
Ibor  pieces  on  the  right  sJwuldcr  or  at  a  trail.      Thvi  rule  is  general. 


38  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

350.  If  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  pieces  carried  at  a  trail,  he 
will  give  the  command  trail  arms,  before  the  command  double  quick. 
If,  on  the  contrary,  this  command  be  not  ^iven,  the  men  will 
shift  their  pieces  to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  double  quick. 
In  either  case,  at  the  command  halt,  the  men  will  bring  their  pieces 
to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms.     This  rule  is  general. 

"V;  Lesson  III. —  The  march  by  the  flank. 

351.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  and  correctly  aligned,  the  in- 
structor will  command : 

1.  Squad,  right — Face.     2.  Forward.    S.  March. 

352.  At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  the  rank  will  face  to 
the  right;  the  even  numbered  men,  after  facing  to  the  right,  will 
step  quickly  to  the  right  side  of  the  odd  numbered  men,  the  latter 
standing  fast,  so  that  when  the  movement  is  executed,  the  men  will 
be  formed  into  files  of  two  men  abreast.  .-qi 

353.  At  the  third  command,  the  squad  will  step  oif  smartly  witk 
the  left  foot ;  the  files  keeping  aligned,  and  preserving  their  in- 
tervals. 

354.  The  inarch  by  the  left  flank  will  be  executed  by  the  same 
commands,  substituting  the  word  left  for  right,  and  by  inverse 
means ;  in  this  case,  the  even  numbered  men,  after  facing  to  the 
left,  will  stand  fast,  and  the  odd  numbered  will  place  themselves 
on  their  left. 

355.  The  instructor  will  place  a  well-instructed  soldier  by  the 
side  of  the  recruit  who  is  at  the  head  of  the  rank,  to  regulate  the 
step,  and  to  conduct  him ;  and  it  will  be  enjoined  on  this  recruit 
to  march  always  elbow  to  elbow  with  the  soldier. 

356.  The  instructor  Avill  cause  to  be  observed  in  the  march,  by  ,{j 
the  flank,  the  following  rules: 

That  the  step  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed,  for  the 

direct  step; 

Because  these  ])rinciples,  without  which  men,  placed  elbow  to 
olbow,  in  the  same  rank,  cannot  preserve  unity  and  harmony  of 
movement,  are  of  a  more  necessary  observance  in  marching  in 
file. 

That  the  head  of  the  man  who  immediately  precedes,  covers  the  heads 
of  all  v-ho  are  in  front; 

Because  it  is  the  most  certain  rule  by  which  each  man  may 
maintain  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  the  file. 

357.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  habitually  five  or  six  pa- 
ces on  the  flank  of  the  rank  marching  in  file,  to  watch  over  the  ex- 
ecution of  the  principles  prescribed  above.     He  will  also  place  .; 
himself  sometimes  in  its  rear,  halt,  and  suffer  it  to  pass  fifteen  or  ■. 
twenty  paces,  the  better  to  see  whether  the  men  cover  each  other^' 
accurately. 

358.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  rank,  marching  by  the 
flank,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front,  he  will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER.  39 


1.  Squad.      2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

359.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and  afterwards 
no  man  Nvill  Htir,  although  he  may  have  lost  his  distance.  Tiiis 
prohibition  is  necessary,  to  habituate  the  men  to  a  constant  pres- 
ervation of  their  distances. 

360.  At  tlie  third  command,  each  man  will  front  by  facing  to  the 
left,  if  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  by  a  face  to  the  right,  if 
marching  by  the  left  flank.  The  I'car  rank  men  will  at  the  same 
time  move  quickly  into  their  places,  so  as  to  form  the  squad  again 
into  one  rank. 

361.  When  the  men  have  become  accustomed  to  marching  by  the 
flank,  the  instructor  will  cause  them  to  change  direction  by  file  ; 
for  this  purpose,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  file  left  (or  right).      2.  March. 

362.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  change  direction 
to  the  left  (or  right)  in  describing  a  small  arc  of  a  circle,  and  will 
then  march  straight  forward  ;  the  two  men  of  this  file,  in  wheeling, 
will  keep  up  the  touch  of  the  elbows,  and  the  man  on  the  side  to 
which  the  wheel  is  made,  will  shorten  the  first  three  or  four  stops. 
Each  file  will  come  successively  to  wheel  on  the  same  spot  where 
that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

363.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  squad  to  face  by  the  right 
or  left  flank  in  marching,  and  for  this  purpose  will  command  : 

1.  Squad  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank.     2.  March. 

364.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  a  little  before 
either  foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the  recruits  will  turn  the  body, 
plant  the  foot  that  is  raised  in  the  new  direction,  and  step  off"  with 
the  other  foot  without  altering  the  cadence  of  the  step;  the  men 
will  double  or  undouble  rajiidly. 

365.  If,  in  facing  by  the  right  or  left  flank,  the  squad  should 
face  to  the  rear,  the  men  will  come  into  one  rank,  agreeably  to  the 
principles  indicated  No.  360.  It  is  to  be  remarked  that  it  is  the 
men  who  are  in  rear  who  always  move  up  to  form  into  single  rank 
and  in  such  manner  as  never  to  invert  the  order  of  the  numbers 
in  the  rank. 

366.  If,  when  the  squad  has  been  faced  to  the  rear,  the  instructor 
should  cause  it  to  face  by  the  left  flank,  it  is  the  even  numbers  who 
will  double  by  moving  to  the  leflof  the  odd  numbers ;  but  if  by  tho 
right  flank,  it  is  the  odd  numbers  who  will  double  to  the  right  of, 
the  even  numbers, 

367.  This  lesson,  like  the  preceding  one,  will  be  practiced  with 
pieces  at  a  shoulder;  but  the  instructor  may,  to  give  relief  by 
change,  occasionally  order  nuppori  armn,  and  he  will  require  of  the 
recruits  marching  in  this  position,  as  much  regularity  as  in  the 
former. 

The  march  by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time. 

368.  Tho  principles  of  the  marfb  bv  the  flank  in  double  quick 


40...  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

time,  are  the  same  as  in  quick  time.  The  instructor  will  give  the 
commands  prescribed  No.  351,  taking  care  always  to  give  the  com-' 
mand  double  quick  before  that  of  march. 

369.  He  will  pay  the  greatest  attention  to  the  cadence  of  the  1 
step.  * 

370.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  change  of  direction,  and  the 
march  by  the  flank,  to  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  by  the 
same  commands,  and  according  to  the  same  principles  as  in  quick     '^ 
time.  ' 

371.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  pieces  to  be  carried  either  on 
the  right  shoulder  or  at  a  trail. 

372.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  march  the  squad  by  the 
flank,  without  doubling  the  files. 

373.  The  principles  of  this  march  are  the  same  as  in  two  ranks, 
and  it  will  always  be  executed  in  quick  time. 

374.  The  instructor  will  give  the  commands  pi'cscribed  No.  351, 
but  ho  will  be  careful  to  caution  the  squad  not  to  double  tiles. 

375.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  men  do  not  bend  ^ 
their  knees  unequally,  which  would  cause  them  to  tread  on  the  :  ^ 
heels  of  the  men  in  front,  and  also  to  lose  the  cadence  of  the  .'[ 
step  and  their  distances.  , 

376.  The  various  movements  in  this  lesson  will  be  executed  in  ^ 
single  rank.  In  the  changes  of  direction,  the  leading  man  will 
change  direction  without  altering  the  length  or  the  cadence  of  the 
step.  The  instructor  will  recall  to  the  attention  of  the  men,  that 
in  facing  by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  they  will  not 
double,  but  march  in  one  rank. 

■  Lesson  IV. — Wheelings. — General  j)inciples  of  Wheelings. 

377.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds  :  fi'om  halts,  or  on  fixed  pivots, 
and  in  march  or  on  moveable  pivots. 

378.  Wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot  takes  place  in  passing  a  corps 
from  the  order  in  battle  to  the  order  in  column,  or  from  the  latter 
to  the  former. 

379.  Wheels  in  marching  take  ])lace  in  changes  of  direction  in 
column,  as  often  as  this  movement  is  executed  to  the  side  opposite 
to  the  guide. 

380.  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot-man  only  turns  in  his 
place,  without  advancing  or  receding. 

381.  In  the  wheels  in  marching,  the  pivot  takes  steps  of  nine  or 
eleven  inches,  according  as  the  squad  is  marching  in  quick  or 
double  quick  time,  so  as  to  clear  the  wheeling  point,  which  is 
necessary,  in  order  that  the  subdivisions  of  a  column  may  change 
direction  without  losing  their  distances,  as  will  be  exj^lained  in 
the  school  of  the  company. 

382.  The  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  will  take  the  full  step  of 
twenty-eight  inches,  or  thirty -three  inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

Wheeling  from  a  halt,  or  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

383.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will  place  a  well- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER,  41 

instructed   man  on  the  wheolinf^   flank   to  condiiet  it.  and  thon 
command : 

1.  By  squad,  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

384.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  stop  oil'  with  the 
left  foot,  turning  at  the  same  time  the  head  a  little  to  the  left,  the 
eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of  the  ej-os  of  the  men  to  their  loll;  the 
pivot-man  will  merely  mark  time  in  gradually  turning  his  body, 
in  order  to  conform  himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching 
flank;  the  man  Avho  conducts  this  flank  will  take  steps  of  twenty- 
eight  inches,  and  from  the  iirst  step  advance  a  little  the  left 
shoulder,  cast  his  eyes  from  time  to  time  along  the  rank  and  feel 
constantly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man  lightlj',  but  never  push  him. 

385.  The  other  man  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man 
towards  the  pivot,  resist  pressure  coming  from  the  opposite  side, 
and  each  will  conform  himself  to  the  marching  flank — shortening 
his  step  according  to  his  approximation  to  the  i)ivot. 

38G.  The  instructor  will  make  the  rank  wheel  round  the  circle 
once  or  twice  before  halting,  in  order  to  cause  the  principles  to  be 
the  better  understood,  and  he  will  be  watchful  that  the  center 
does  not  break. 

387.  lie  will  cause  the  wheel  to  the  left  to  be  executed  according 
to  the  same  principles. 

388.  When  the  instructor  shall  Avish  to  arrest  the  wheel,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Squad.    2.     Halt. 

3»'».  At  the  f-ocond  command,  the  rank  will  halt,  and  no  man 
stir.  The  instructor,  going  to  the  flank  opposite  the  pivot,  will 
place  the  two  outer  men  of  that  flank  in  the  direction  he  may  wish 
to  give  to  the  rank,  without  however  displacing  the  pivot;  who 
will  conform  the  line  of  his  shoulders  to  this  direction.  The 
instructor  will  take  care  to  have  between  these  two  men,  and  the 
pivot,  only  the  space  necessary  to  contain  the  other  men.  He  will 
then  command  : 

Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

300.  At  this,  tlic  rank  will  place  itself  on  the  alignment  of  the 
two  men  established  as  the  ba,sis,  in  conformity  with  the  principles 
prescribed. 

391.  The  instructor  will  next  c<^;mmand  Front,  which  will  be 
executed  as  prescribed  No.  314. 

Rrmarks:  on  the  principles  of  the  xrhcd  from  a  halt. 

392.  Turn  a  little  the  head  towards  the  marching  flank,  and  fix  the 
eyes,  on  the  live  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  who  are  on  that  side  ; 

Because,  othorwiso,  it  would  be  impossible  for  each  man  to  reg- 
ulate the  length  of  his  st<^ji  so  as  to  conform  his  own  movement  to 
that  of  the  marching  flank. 

Touch  lightly  the  clboxc  of  the  ne.vt  man  towards  the  pivot ; 

In  order  that  the  filee  may  not  open  out  in  the  wheel. 


42  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

Resist  pressure  that  comes  from  the  side  of  the  marching  flank ; 

Because,  if  this  i)i-inciplo  be  neglected,  the  pivot,  which  ought 
to  be  a  fixed  point,  in  wheels  from  a  halt,  might  be  pushed  out  of 
its  place  by  pressure. 

Wheeling  in  marching,  or  on  a  movable  pivot. 

393.  When  the  recruits  have  been  taught  to  execute  well  the 
wheel  from  a  halt,  they  will  be  taught  to  wheel  in  marching. 

39-4.  To  this  end,  the  rank  being  in  march,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the  reverse  flank,  (to 
the  side  opposite  to  the  guide  or  pivot  flank,)  he  will  command : 

1.  Bight  (or  left)  wheel.     2.  March. 

395.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank  is  yet  four 
paces  from  the  wheeling  f)oint. 

396.  At  the  second  command,  the  wheel  will  be  executed  in  the 
same  manner  as  fi'om  a  halt,  except  that  the  touch  of  the  elbow 
will  remain  towards  the  marching  flank  (or  side  of  the  guide) 
instead  of  the  side  of  the  actual  pivot;  that  the  pivot  man,  instead 
of  merely  turning  in  his  place,  will  conform  himself  to  the  move- 
ment of  the  marching  flank,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next 
man,  take  steps  of  full  nine  inches,  and  thus  gain  ground  forward 
in  describing  a  small  curve  so  as  to  clear  the  point  of  the  wheel. 
The  middle  of  the  rank  will  bend  slightly  to  the  rear.  As  soon  as 
the  movement  shall  commence,  the  man  who  conducts  the  march- 
ing flank  will  cast  his  eyes  on  the  ground  over  which  he  will  have 
to  pass. 

397.  The  wheel  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  command : 

'"''  1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

398.  The  first  command  will  bo  pronounced  when  four  paces  are 
yet  required  to  complete  the  change  of  direction. 

399.  At  the  command'march,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
of  completing  the  wheel,  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching 
flank  wmII  direct  himself  straight  forwai'd ;  the  pivot-man  and  all 
the  rank  will  retake  the  stej)  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  bring 
the  head  direct  to  the  front. 

Turning,  or  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

400.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide;  in  march- 
ing, will  be  executed  as  follows  :    The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  turn.     2.  March. 

401.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank  is  yet  four 
paces  from  the  turning  point. 

402.  At  the  command  march,  to  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  the 
rank  ought  to  turn,  the  guide  will  face  to  the  left  (or  right)  in 
marching,  and  move  forward  in  the  new  direction  without  slack- 
ening or  quickening  the  cadence,  and  without  shortening  or 
lengthening  the  step.     The  whole  rank  will  promptly  conform 


SCH06t,  OF  THK  SOLDIER.  43  i 

itself  to  tho  now  diivction  ;  to  effoct  which,  each  man  will  advance 
the  shoulder  oppoHit<>  to  the  jjfuide,  take  the  double  quick  step,  to 
Ciirrj  himHclf  ii)  the  new  direction,  turn  the  head  and  eyc>8  to  the 
side  of  the  guide,  and  retake  the  touch  of  tho  elbow  on  that.Hido, 
in  placinc^  himself  on  the  aliirnment  of  the  f^uide,  from  whom  be 
will  take  the  step,  and  then  resume  the  direct  position  of  the  head. 
Each  man  will  thus  arrive  Hiujcessivel}'  on  the  aliujnment. 

Wheeling  and  changing  direction  to  the.  side  of  the  guide,  in  double 

quick  time. 

403.  When  the  reci-uits  comprehend  and  execute  well,  in  quick 
time,  the  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  marching,  and  the  change  of 
direction  to  the  side  ol'  the  guide,  the  inntructor  will  cause  the 
same  movements  to  be  repeated  in  double  quick  time. 

404.  These  various  movements  will  be  executed  by  the  same 
commands  and  according  to  the  same  principles  as  in  quick  time, 
except  that  the  command  double  quick  will  precede  that  of  march. 
In  wheeling  while  marching,  the  pivot  man  will  take  Hteps  of 
eloven  inches,  and  in  the  changes  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide,  the  men  on  the  side  opposite  the  guide  must  increase  the 
gait  in  order  to  bring  themselves  into  line. 

405.  The  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  recruits,  and  not 
to  divide  their  attention,  will  cause  them  to  execute  the  several 
movements  of  which  this  lesson  is  composed,  first  without  arms, 
and  next,  after  the  mechanism  be  well  comprehended,  with   arms. 

liEssoN  V. — Long  marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run. 

406.  Tho  infrtpwctor  will  cause  to  bo  resumed  tho  exerciBcs  in 
double  quick  time  and  the  run,  with  arms  and  knapsacks. 

407.  He  will  cause  long  marches  to  be  execute<l  in  double  quick 
time,  boih  b)^  the  front  and  by  the  flank,  and  by  constant  i)ractice 
will  lead  the  men  t-o  ])as8  over  a  distance  of  live  miles  in  sixty  min- 
utoe.  Th6  pieces  will  be  carried  on  either  shoulder,  and  sometimes 
at  a  trail. 

408.  Ho  will  also  exercise  them  in  long  marches  at  a  run,  the 
pioco«  carried  at  will;  tho  men  will  be  instructerl  tokeepH.s  imited 
RH  po«*it>lo,  without  however  exacting  much  regularity,  which  is 
impracticable. 

409.  The  run,  in  actual  service,  will  only  be  resorted  to  when  it 
may  bo  highly  important  to  reach  a  given  point  with  great  prompt- 
itude. 

To  stack  arms. 

The  men  being  at  order  arms,  the  instructor  will  command  : 
Stack — Arms. 

410.  At  this  command  the  front  rank  man  of  every  even  num- 
bered file  will  pass  bis  piece  before  him,  seizing  it  with  the  left 
hand  near  the  upper  band  ;  will  plac^  the  butt  a  little  in  advance 
of  his  left  toe,  the  barrel  turned  towards  the  body,  and  draw  tho 
rammer  slightly  from  its  place ;  tho  front  rank  man  of  every  odd 


44  SCHOOL  OF  THE  80LDIER. 

numbered  file  will  also  draw  the  rammer  slightly,  and  pass  his 
piece  to  the  man  next  on  his  left,  who  will  seize  it  with  the  right 
hand  near  the  upper  baud,  and  place  the  butt  a  little  in  ad- 
vance of  the  right  toe  of  the  man  next  on  his  right,  the  barrel 
turned  to  the  front ;  he  will  then  cross  the  rammers  of  the  two 
pieces,  the  rammer  of  the  piece  of  the  odd  numbered  man  being 
inside ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  even  file  will  also  draw  his 
rammer,  lean  his  piece  forward,  the  lock  plate  downwards,  advance 
the  right  foot  about  six  inches,  and  insert  the  rammer  between  the 
rammer  and  barrel  of  the  piece  of  his  front  rank  man  ;  with  his 
left  hand  he  will  place  the  butt  of  his  piece  on  the  ground,  thirty- 
two  inches  in  rear  of,  and  perpendicular  to,  the  front  rank,  bring- 
ing back  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left ;  the  front  rank  man 
of  every  even  file  will  at  the  same  time  lean  the  stack  to  the  rear, 
quit  it  with  his  right  hand,  and  force  all  the  rammers  down.  The 
stack  being  thus  formed,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd  file  will 
pass  his  piece  into  his  left  hand,  the  bai'rel  to  the  front,  and  inclin- 
ing it  forward,  will  rest  it  on  the  stack. 

411.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  taken  the  position  of  the 
soldier  without  arms,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1 .  Break  ranks.     2.  March. 

To  resume  arms. 

412.  Both  ranks  being  re-formed  in  rear  of  their  stacks,  the  in-  ' 
structor  will  command  : 

Take — Arms. 

413.  At  this  command  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd  numbered 
file  will  withdraw  his  piece  from  the  stack  ;  the  front  rank  man  of 
every  even  file  Avill  seize  his  own  piece  with  the  left  hand  and  that 
of  the  man  on  his  right  with  his  right  hand,  both  above  the  lower 
band ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  even  file  will  seize  his  piece  with 
the  right  hand  below  the  lower  band  ;  these  two  men  will  raise  up 
the  stack  to  loosen  the  rammers  ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  odd 
file  will  facilitate  the  disengagement  of  the  rammers,  if  necessary, 
by  drawing  them  out  slightly  with  the  left  hand,  and  will  receive 
his  piece  from  the  hand  of  the  man  next  on  his  left ;  the  four  men 
will  retake  the  position  of  the  soldier  at  order  arms. 

END   OF   THE   SCHOOL    OF   THE   POLIjIKK, 


TTTLK     THIRD 


SCnOOL  OV  THE  COMPANY. 

(rener<il  RyJes  and  Divi-vott  of  the  School  of  th^  Company. 

1.  Instruction  by  company  will  always  precede  that  by  batta- 
lion, and  the  object  being  to  prepare  the  soldiers  for  the  higher 
school,  the  exercises  of  detail  by  co'nj)any  will  be  strictly  adhered 
to,  as  well  in  rt*si)eot  to  principles,  as  the  order  of  pi'ogresKion  heroin 
prescribed. 

2.  There  will  bo  attached  to  a  company  undergoing  elementary 
instruction,  a  captain,  a  covering  sergeant,  and  a  certain  number 
of  file  cIosiTS,  the  whole  posted  in  the  manner  indicated,  Title 
First,  and,  according  to  the  same  Title,  the  officer  charged  with 
the  cxvmHO  of  tiucli  company  will  herein  be  denojninated  the  in- 
structor. 

3.  The  School  of  the- Company  will  l)o  divided  into  six  lessons, 
and  Cxioh  k^«on  will  comprehend  five  artick*,  as  follows : 

T.IM'SnN-  I. 

1.  To  open  ranks. 

2.  AHgr)mentfl  in  open  rMnks. 

3.  Manual  of  arms. 

4.  To  closi:  ranks. 

5.  Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  ch>Hed  ranks. 

Li>>.S<>>   II. 

1.  To  load  in  tour  timcv*  and  nt  will. 

2.  To  fire  l>y  eonipany 

3.  To  fire  by  file. 

4.  To  fire  by  rank. 

")  To  fir*^'  '>v  tlif>  rofir  rnnk. 

].VSh'f>'S  MI. 

I     To  inarcli  in  line  of  battle. 

2.  To  halt  the  eonipany  inarehing  in  line  of  battle,and  to  allign  it. 

3.  C)l)li(pie  march  in  line  of  battle. 

4.  To  mark  timf,  in  marcli  in  double  (piick  time,  and  the  baek 
step. 

F)    To  m.'irrli  in  ritr>>it   in  line  of  battl'V 

,J-XHON   IV. 

1.  To  rniircli  bv  iIk-  llank. 

2.  To  change  diri*rtion  by  file. 

.3.  To  halt  tho  eorapany  marcliing  by  the  flank,  and  to  fecc  it  to 
thf^  front. 


46  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


4.  Tlie  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  foi-ra  it  on  the 
right  or  left  by  file  into  line  of  battle. 

5.  The  company  marching  by  tlie  flank,  to  form  it  by  company 
or  platoon  into  line,  and  cauec  it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in 
marching. 

LESSON  V. 

1.  To  break  into  column  by  platoon  either  at  a  halt  or  while 
marching. 

2.  To  march  in  column. 

3.  To  change  direction. 

4.  To  halt  the  column. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  or  left  into 
line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

LESSON  VL 

1.  To  break  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form  the  company. 

2.  To  bx'eak  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  them  to  re-enter  into 
line. 

3.  To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to  execute,  the  movements 
incident  thereto. 

4.  Countermarch. 

5.  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right  or  left  into 
line  of  battle. 

4.  The  comj)any  will  always  be  formed  in  two  ranks.  The  in- 
structor will  then  cause  the  files  to  be  numbered,  and  for  this  pur- 
pose will  command  : 

In  each  rank — Count  Twos. 

5.  At  this  command,  the  men  count  in  each  rank,  from  right  to 
left,  pronouncing  in  a  loud  and  distinct  voice,  in  the  same  tone, 
without  hurry  and  without  turning  the  head,  one,  tioo,  according  to 
the  place  which  each  one  occupies,  lie  will  also  cause  the  com- 
pany to  be  divided  into  platoons  and  sections,  taking  care  that  the 
first  platoon  is  always  composed  of  an  even  number  of  files. 

6.  The  instructor  will  be  as  clear  and  concise  as  possible  in  his 
explanations  ;  he  will  cause  faults  of  detail  to  be  rectified  by  the 
captain,  to  whom  he  will  indicate  them,  if  the  captain  should  not 
haveliimsclf  observed  them;  and  the  instructor  will  not  otherwise 
interfere,  unless  the  captain  should  not  well  comprehend,  or  should 
badly  execute  his  intentions.  • 

7.  Composure,  or  ])resence  of  mind,  in  him  Avho  commands,  and 
in  those  who  obo}^  being  the  first  means  of  order  iji  a  body  of 
troops,  the  instructor  will  labor  to  habituate  the  company  to  this 
essential  quality,  and  will  himself  give  the  example. 

LESSON  FIEST. 
Artfolk  First. —  To  open  ra7}ks. 

®*         8.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the  rank  and  file  closers 
well  aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  vf'mh  to  cause  the  ranks  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THK  COMPANY.    .  ^  47 

be  opened,  lie  will  direct  the  left  guide  to  place  HtmHcrf  on  the  left 
of  the  front  rank,  which  heing  executed,  he  will  oonunand  : 

1.  Atteiition.      2.   Company.      3.  Shoulder — Amrs.      4.    To  the  rear 

open  order. 

9.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  left 
guide,  will  step  off  smartly  to  the  rear,  four  paces  from  the  front 
rank,  in  order  to  mark  the  alignment  of  the  rear  rank.  They  will 
judge  this  distance  by  the  eye,  without  counting  the  steps. 

10.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  at  the  same  time  on  the 
right  flank,  in  order  to  observe,  if  these  two  non-commissioned 
oflScers  are  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  front  rank,  and  if  necessary,  to 
correct  their  positions,  which   being  executed,   he  will  command: 

5.  March. 

11.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  will  stand  fast. 

12.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  the  rear,  without  counting  the 
steps,  and  will  pla(;e  themselves  on  the  alignment  marked  for  this 
rank,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  321. 

13.  The  covering  s(^rgeant  will  align  the  rear  rank  on  the  left 
guide  placed  to  mark  the  left  of  this  rank. 

14.  The  file  closers  will  march  to  the  rear  at  the  same  time  with 
the  rear  hank,  and  will  place  themselves  two  jiacen  fi-()m  this  rank 
when  it  is  aligned. 

15.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rear  rank  aligned,  will  command: 

().   Front. 

16.  At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank 
will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

17.  The  rear  rank  being  alignefl,  the  instructor  will  direct  the 
captain  and  the  covering  sergeant  to  observe  the  men  in  their  re- 
spective ranks,  and  to  correct,  if  necessary,  the  positions  of  persons 
and  pieees. 

AnTiri.K  Skconp. — Alignment.'^  in  open  ranks. 

18.  The  ranks  being  o))en,  the  instructor  will,  in  the  first  exer- 
cises, align  the  ranks,  man  by  man,  the  better  to  inculcato  the 
principles. 

19.  To  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  four  men  on  the  right  or 
left  of  eaeh  rank  to  murch  two  or  three  paces  forward,  and,  after 
Ijaving  aligned  them,  command  : 

Jiy  §lc  right  (or  left) — Dress. 

20.  v\t  this,  the  men  of  enc;h  mnk  will  move  up  wicocssively  on 
the  alignment,  each  man  being  preceded  by  his  ni'ighbor  in  the 
name  rank,  towards  the  basis,  by  twf)  ]»ac.cs,  and  having  correctly 
alignc(i  himself,  will  east  his  eye*  to  the  front. 

21.  Sii(ee>Hive    silignmcnl-'*   havitig   habituated    the   eoUJicrs    to 


48  SCHOOJ.  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

dress  correctly,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  ranks  to  align  them- 
selves at  once,  forwai-d  and  backward,  sometimes  in  a  direction 
parallel,  and  Bometimes  in  one  oblique,  to  the  original  dii'ection, 
giving,  in  each  case,  two  or  four  men  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  align- 
ment to  each  rank.     To  effect  which,  he  will  command  : 

].  Bight  (or  left) — Dress.     2.  Fron-i;.,!,  j^.^    ^> 

Or,  :  -i     ''■//  .'»f)iiiv 

i.  Jiight  (or  left)  backward — Drebs^  ,2.  Front.    '■"';■ 

22.  In  oblique  alignments,  in  opened  ranks,  the  men  of  the  rear 
rank  will  not  seek  to  cover  their  file  leaders,  as  the  sole  objiect  of 

>  the  exercise  is  to  teach  them  to  align  themselves  correctly  in  their 
respective  ranks,  in  the  different  directions. 

23.  In  the  several  alignments,  the  captain  will  superintend  the 
front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  the  rear  rank.  For  this  pur- 
pose, they  will  place  themselves  on  the  side  by  which  the  ranks 
are  dressed. 

24.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  men  will  conform  the  line  of  their 
shoulders  to  the  new  direction  of  their  rank,  and  will  place  them- 
selves on  the  alignment  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the 
Soldier,  No.  317  or  No.  321,  according  as  the  new  direction  shall 
be  in  front  or  rear  of  the  original  one. 

25.  At  the  end  of  each  alignment,  the  captain  and  the  covering 
sergeant  will  pass  along  the  front  of  the  ranlcs. to  correct  the  posi- 
tions of  persona  and  arms.  'iijiilij  i- 

Article  Third. — Manual  ofaiiris. 

26.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will  place  himself  in  a 
position  to  see  the  ranks,  and  will  command  the  manual  of  arms 
in  the  following  order : 

Present  arms.      (then)     Shoulder  arms. 
Order  arms. 
Ground  arms. 

Raise  anns.  Shoulder  armB. 

Support  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fi.v  bayonet.  Shoulder  anr^. 

Charge  bayonet.  Shoxdder  arms. 

Trail  arms.  Shoidder  arms. 

UnjLc  bayonet.  ShouMer  aiins. 

Secure  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Load  in  nine  times. 

27.  The  instructor  will  t^ike  wire  that  the  position  of  the  body, 
of  the  feet^  and  of  the  piec-e,  be  always  exact,  and  that  the  times 
be  briskly  executed  and  close  to  the  person. 

''  - '  "'         Article  Fourth. —  To  clo-^e  ranks. 

28.  The  manual  of  arms  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  com- 
m.and  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  49 

1.   Close  order.     2.  March. 

29.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  will  cTose  up  in  quick 
time,  each  man  directing  himself  on  hi.s  file  leader. 

Article  V. — Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed  ranks. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will  cause  to  be  exe- 
cuted parallel  and  oblique  alignments  by  the  right  and  left,  forward 
and  backward,  observing  to  place  alwa^'s  two  or  four  files  to  serve 
aH  a  l>asis  of  alignment.  He  will  give  the  commands  prescribed, 
No.  21. 

31.  In  alignments  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain  will  superintend 
the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  the  rear  rank.  They 
will  habituate  themselves  to  judge  the  alignment  by  the  lines  of 
the  eyes  and  shoulders,  in  casting  a  glance  of  the  eye  along  the 
front  and  rear  of  the  ranks. 

32.  The  moment  the  captain  perceives  the  greaternumber  of  the 
front  rank  aligned,  he  will  command  Front,  and  rectify,  after- 
wards, if  necessary,  the  alignment  of  the  other  men  by  the  means 
prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Soldier,  No.  320.  The  rear  rank 
will  conform  to  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank,  superint<;nded  by 
the  covering  sergeant. 

33.  The  ranks  being  steady,  the  instructor  will  place  him.self  on 
t%  flank  to  verify  their  alignment.  He  will  also  see  that  each 
rear  rank  man  covers  accurately  his  file  leader. 

34.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  instructor  will  observe  what  is 
prcHcribed  No.  24. 

35.  In  all  alignments,  the  file  closers  will  preserve  the  distance 
of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

36.  The  alignments  being  ended,  the  instructor  will  cause  to  bo 
fc.vocuted  the  manual  of  arms. 

37.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  rest  the  men,  without  deranging 
the  alignment,  will  first  cause  arras  to  be  supported,  or  ordered, 
and  then  command  : 

In  place — Rkst. 

38.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  no  longer  be  constrained  to 
proflcrve  silence  or  steadiness  of  position  ;  but  they  will  always 
keep  one  or  other  heel  on  the  alignment. 

31>.  If  on  the  contrary,  the  instructor  should  wish  to  rest  the 
men  without  constraining  them  to  ])rescrve  the  alignment,  ho 
will  command  : 

TIkst. 

40.  At  which  command,  the  men  will  not  be  required  to  pre- 
hervo  immobility,  or  to  remain  in  their  places. 

41.  the  instructor  may,  also,  when  he  shall  Judge  proper,  cause 
arms  to  be  stacked,  which  will  be  executed  as  proscribed,  school  of 
the  ^oldier. 

LEHRON  II. 

42.  The  inptruotor,  wishing  to  pafs  to  the  oeoond   leewjn,  will 

4 


50  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

cause  the  company  to  take  arms,  if  stacks  have  been  formed,  and 
command  : 

1.  Attention     2.   Company.     3.  Shoulder — Arms. 

43.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  loadings  and  firings  to  bo  ex- 
ecuted in  the  following  order  : 

Article  I. —  To  load  at  four  times  and  at  will. 

44.  Loading  in  four  times  will  be  commanded  and  executed  as 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  251,  and  following. 
The  instructor  will  cause  this  exercise  to  be  often  repeated,  in  suc- 
cession, before  passing  to  load  at  will. 

45.  Loading  at  will  will  be  commanded  and  executed  as  pre- 
scribed in  the"  school  for  the  soldier,  No.  256.  In  priming  when 
loading  in  four  times,  and  also  at  will,  the  captain  and  covering  ser- 
geant will  half  face  to  the  right  with  the  men,  and  face  to  the  front 
when  the  man  next  to  them,  respectively,  brings  his  piece  to  the 
shoulder. 

46.  The''instructor  will  labor  to  the  utmost  to  cause  the  men,  in 
the  different  loadings,  to  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  Nos.  257  and  258. 

47.  Loading  at  will,  being  that  of  battle,  and  consequently  the 
one  with  w'hich  it  is  most  impox'tant  to  render  the  men  famil- 
iar, it  will  claim  preference  in  the  exercises  the  moment  the  ftien 
bo  well  established  in  the  principles.  To  these  they  will  be  brought 
by  degrees,  so  that  every  man  may  be  able  to  load  with  cartridges 
and  to  fire  at  least  three  rounds  in  a  minute  with  case  and  regu- 
larity. 

Artcle  II.— 7 0  fire  by  Compjany. 

48.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  company  to  be 
execut^ed,  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  Company.     2.   Comynence  firing. 

49.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  promptly  place  him- 
self opposite  the  center  of  his  company,  and  four  paces  in  rear  of 
the  lino  of  file  closers  :  the  covering  sergeant  will  retire  to  that 
line,  and  place  himself  opposite  to  his  interval.  2'his  rule  is  gen- 
eral, for  both  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  in  all  the  different 
firings. 

50.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  add:  1.  Company ; 
2.  Eeady  ;  3.  Aim  ;  4.   Fire  ;  5.  Load. 

51.  At  the  command  ^oa^/,  the  men  will  load  their  pirces,  and 
then  take  the  position  ready,  as  pre-scribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier. 

52.  The  captain  will  imm(«ditttely  rocommcnce  the  firing,  by  the 
commands : 

1.   Company.     2.  Aim.  3.  Fire.     4.  Loai). 

53.  The  firing  will  ]>o  thus  continued  until  the  signal  to  cease 
firing  is  sounded. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  GOMPANY.  51 

"54.  The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be  taken  to  the 
right  and  lofl,  simply  observing  to  pronounce  right  (or  left)  oblique, 
before  the  command  aiwi. 

Article  III. —  The  fire  by  file. 

55.  The  instructor  wishii^  to  cause  the  fire  by  file  to  be  execu- 
ted, will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  file.     2.   Company.     3.  Rkadt.     4.   Commence  firing. 

56.  The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  275  and  following. 

57.  The  fire  will  be  commenced  by  the  right  file  of  the  company; 
the  next  file  will  take  aim  at  theinstant  thefirst  brings  down  pieces 
to  re-load,  and  so  on  to  the  left;  but  this  progression  will  only  be 
observed  in  the  first  discharge,  after  which  each  man  will  ro-load 
and  fire  without  regulating  himself  by  others,  conforming  himself 
to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  280. 

Article   IV. —  The  fire  by  rank. 

58.  The  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to  be  executed,  will 
command  : 

1.  Fire  by  rank.     2.  Company.      3.  Eeadt.      4.    7?mr  Jiank — Aim. 
^  5.  Fire.      6.  Load. 

59.  The  fifth  and  sixth  commands  will  bo  execute^  as  is  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  285  and  following. 

60.  When  the  instructor  sees  one  or  two  pieces  in  the  rear  rank 
at  a  ready,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Front  Ran/;.      2.  Aim.      :',.   Firk.     4.  Loah. 

61.  The  firing  will  be  continued  thus  by  alternate  ranks,  until 
the  signal  is  given  to  cease  firing. 

62.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  cau.se  aim  to  be  taken  to  the 
right  and  left,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  54. 

63.  The  instructor  will  c^iuse  the  firing  to  cease,  whether  by  com- 
pany, by  file,  or  by  rank,  by  sounding  the  signal  to  cease  firing, 
and  at  the  instant  this  sound  commences,  the  men  will  cease  to  fire, 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No. 
282. 

64.  The  signal  to  c<!a«e  firing  will  always  be  followed  by  a  l)uglo 
note  ;  at  which  f*ound.  the  captain  and  cfivoring  sergeant  will 
prr>niptly  resume  their  placos  in  line,  an<l  will  rectify,  if  nccwtsary, 
the  alignment  of  the  ranks. 

65.  In  this  school,  except  when  i>owder  in  u(«ed,  the  signal  to 
oc'ise  firing  will  bo  in<iicALed  by  the  command  cca.'<e  firing,  which 
will  be  i)roiiounced  by  the  instructor  when  he  wishes  the  sem- 
blance of  firing  to  coa*»e. 

66.  The  command  po.si-'\  will  be  likewise  substituted,  under  sim- 
ilar circumstances,  for  the  bugle  note  cmj)loyed  as  the  signal  for  the 
return  of  the    captain  and    covering  sergeant  to  their  placos  in 


62  SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY. 

line,  which  command  will  be  given  when  the  instructor  sees  the 
men  have  brought  their  pieces  to  a  shoulder. 

67.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  which  is  most  frequently  used 
against  an  enemy,  it  is  highly  important  that  it  be  rendered  per- 
fectly familiar  to  the  troops.  The  instructor  will,  therefore,  give 
it  almost  exclusive  preference,  and  labor  to  cause  the  men  to  aim 
with  care,  and  always,  if  possible,  at  some  particular  object.  As 
it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  the  men  should  aim  with  preci- 
sion in  battle,  this  principle  will  be  rigidly  enforced  in  the  exercises 
for  the  purposes  of  instruction. 

Article  V. —  To  Fire  by  the  rear  rank. 

68.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires  to  be  executed  ta 
the  rear,  that  is,  by  the  rear  rank.  To  effect  this,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.     2.  Company.     3.  About — Face. 

69.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  step  out  and  place 
himself  near  to,  and  facing  the  right  file  of  his  company  ;  the 
covering  sergeant,  and  file  closers,  will  pass  quickly  througli  the 
captain's  interval,  and  place  themselves  faced  to  the  rear,  the 
covering  sergeant  a  pace  behind  the  captain,  and  the  file  closers 
two  paces  from  the  front  rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line,  each 
passing  behind  the  covering  sergeant.  ' 

70.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
the  last  file  closer  shall  have  passed  through  the  interval,  the 
company  will  face  about;  the  captain  will  place  himself  in  his 
interval  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front,  and  the  covering 
sergeant  will  cover  him  in  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

71.  The  company  having  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  the  instructor 
will  cause  it  to  execute  the  fire  by  company,  both  direct  and 
oblique,  the  fire  by  file,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands 
and  means  prescribed  in  the  three  preceding  articles  ;  the  captain, 
covering  sergeant,  and  the  men  will  conform  themselves,  in  like 
manner,  to  what  is  therein  prescribed. 

72.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of  the  company, 
now  become  the  right.  In  the  fire  by  rank,  the  firing  Avill  com- 
mence with  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

73.  To  resume  the  proper  front,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.     2.   Company.     3.  About — Face. 

74.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  covering  sergeant  and  file 
closers  will  conform  to  what  is  proscribed  Nos.  60  and  70. 

75.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  having  faced  about,  the 
captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  resume  their  places  in  line. 

76.  In  this  lesson,  the  instructor  will  impress  on  the  men  the 
importance  of  aiming  always  at  some  particular  object,  and  of 
holding  the  piece  as  prescribed  irf'the  school  of  the  soldier,  No. 

178. 

77.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  captain  to  make  a 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  63 

short  pause  between  the  commanda  aim  and  /ire,  to  give  the  men 
time  to  aim  with  accuracy. 

78.  The  inHtructor  will  place  himself  in  position  to  see  the  two 
ranks,  in  order  to  detect  faults  ;  he  will  charge  the  captain  arid  file 
closers  to  be  equally  watchful,  and  to  report  to  him  when  the  ranka 
are  at  rest.  He  will  remand,  for  individual  instruction,  the  men 
who  may  be  observed  to  load  badly. 

79.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  soldiers,  in  the  firings, 
the  highest  degree  of  composure  or  presence  of  mind;  he  will 
neglect  nothing  that  may  contribute  to  this  end. 

80.  He  will  give  to  the  men,  as  a  general  principle,  to  maintain, 
in  the  direct  fire,  the  left  heel  in  its  place,  in  order  that  the  align- 
ment of  the  ranks  and  files  may  not  be  deranged  ;  and  ho  will 
verify,  by  examination,  after  each  exei'cise  in  firing,  the  observ- 
ance of  this  principle. 

81.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  addition  to  these  remarks,  all 
those  which  follow. 

82.  When  the  firing  is  executed  with  cartridges,  it  is  particularly 
recommended  that  the  men  observe,  in  uncocking,  whether  smoke 
escapes  from  the  tube,  which  is  a  certain  indication  that  the  piece 
has  been  discharged  ;  but  if,  on  the  contrary,  no  smoke  escapee, 
the  soldier,  in  such  case,  instead  of  reloading,  will  pick  and  prime 
again.  If.  believing  the  load  to  be  discharged,  the  soldier  should 
put  a  second  cartridge  in  his  piece,  he  ought,  at  least,  to  perceive 
it  in  ramming,  bj'  the  hight  of  the  load  ;  and  he  would  bo  very- 
culpable  should  he  put  in  a  third.  The  instructor  will  always 
cause  arms  to  be  inspected  after  firing  with  cartridges,  in  order  to 
observe  if  the  fault  has  been  committed,  of  putting  three  car- 
tridges, without  a  discharge,  in  the  same  piece,  in  wliich  case  the 
ball  screw  will  be  applied. 

83.  It  sometimes  happens  when  a  cap  has  missed  fire,  that  the 
tube  is  found  stopped  up  with  a  hard,  white,  and  compact  powder; 
in  this  case,  picking  will  be  dispensed  with,  and  a  new'  cap  substi- 
tuted for  the  old  one. 

LESSON  THIRD. 

Akticlk  I. —  To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

84.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  correctly  aligned, 
■when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  exercise  it  in  marching  by  the 
front,  he  will  assure  himself  that  the  shoulders  of  the  captain  and 
covering  sergeant  are  perfectly  in  the  direction  f)f  their  respective 
ranks,  and  that  the  sergeant  accurately  covers  the  captain  ;  the 
instructor  will  then  place  himself  twenty-five  or  thirty  paces  in 
front  of  them,  face  to  the  rear,  and  place  liimself  exactly  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  line  passing  between  tlteir  heels. 

85.  The  instructor,  being  aligned  on  th'  'lir<rting  file,  will 
command  : 

%  1.   Company,  foricard. 

86.  At  thin,  a  Aergoant,  previously  designated,  will   move  six 


54  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

paces  in  advance  of  the  captain  :  the  instructor,  from  the  position 
prescribed,  will  correctly  align  this  sergeant  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  directing  file. 

87.  'This  advanced  sergeant,  who  is  to  be  charged  with  the 
direction,  will,  the  moment  his  position  is  assured,  take  two  points 
on  the  ground  in  the  sti*aight  line  which  Avould  pass  between  his 
own  and  the  heels  of  the  instructor. 

88.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor  will  step  aside, 
and  command : 

2.  March. 

89.  At  this,  the  company  Avill  step  off  with  life.  The  directing 
sergeant  will  observe,  with  the  greatest  precision,  the  length  and 
cadence  of  the  step,  marching  on  the  two  points  he  has  chosen  ;  he 
will  take  in  succession,  and  always  a  little  before  arriving  at  the 
point  nearest  to  him,  new  points  in  advance,  exactly  in  the  same 
line  with  the  first  two,  and  at  the  distance  of  some  fifteen  or 
twenty  paces  from  each  other.  The  captain  will  march  steadily 
in  the  trace  of  the  directing  sergeant,  keeping  always  six  paces 
from  him  ;  the  men  will  each  maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front, 
feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor  on  the  side  of  direction,  and 
conform  himself  to  the  principles,  school  of  the  soldier,  for  the 
march  by  front. 

90.  The  man  next  to  the  captain  will  take  special  care  not  to 
pass  him  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  keep  the  line  of  his  shoulders  a  little 
in  the  rear,  but  in  the  same  direction  with  those  of  the  captain. 

91.  The  file  closers  will  march  at  the  habitual  distance  of  two 
paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

92.  If  the  men  lose  the  step,  the  instructor  will  command : 

To  the— Step. 

93.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  glance  towards  the  directing 
sergeant,  retake  the  step  from  him,  and  again  direct  their  eyes  to 
the  front. 

94.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant 
to  be  posted  sometimes  on  the  right,  and  sometimes  on  the  left  of 
the  company. 

95.  The  directing  sergeant,  in  advance,  having  the  greatest 
influence  on  the  march  of  the  company,  he  will  be  selected  for  the 
precision  of  his  step,  his  habit  of  maintaining  his  shoulders  in  a 
square  with  a  given  line  of  direction,  and  of  prolonging  that  line 
without  variation. 

96.  If  this  sergeant  should  fail  to  observe  these  princij^les,  undu- 
lations in  the  front  of  the  company  must  necessarily  follow ;  the 
men  will  be  unable  to  eonti-aet  the  habit  of  taking  steps  equal  in 
length  and  swiftness,  and  of  maintaining  their  shoulders  in  a 
square  with  the  line  of  direction — the  only  means  of  attaining 
perfection  in  the  mai'ch  in  line. 

97.  The  instructor,  with  a  view  the  better  1»  establish  the  men 
in  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  in  the  principles  of  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  5^ 

inarch  in  line,  will  cause  the  company  to  advance  three  or  four 
hundred  paccH,  at  once,  without  halting,  if  the  ground  will  permit. 
In  the  first  exercises,  he  Avill  inarch  the  company  with  open  ranks, 
the  better  to  observe  the  two  rankn. 

98.  The  instructor  will  see,  with  care,  that  all  the  principles  of 
the  march  in  line  arc  strictly  observed  ;  he  will  generally  be  on 
the  directing  flank,  in  a  position  to  observe  the  two  ranks,  and  the 
faults  they  may  commit;  he  will  sometimes  hjilt  behind  the  direct-', 
iug  file  during  some  thirty  successive  steps,  in  oi"der  to  judge' 
whether  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  directing  file,  deviate  fvotii^ 
the  perpendicular. 

Article  II. —  To  halt  the  company,  marching  in  line  of  battle^  and 

to  align  it. 

W.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  halt  the  company,  will  command  : 

1.  Company.      2.  Halt. 

100.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt;  the  direct- 
ing sergeant  will  remain  in  advance,  unless  ordered  to  return  to 
the  line  of  file  closers.  The  compan}'  being  at  a  halt,  the  instruct- 
or may  advance  the  first  three  or  four  files  on  the  side  of  direc- 
tion, and  align  the  comjiany  on  that  basis,  or  he  may  confine  him-*" 
self  to  causing  the  alignment  to  be  rectified.  In  this  last  case,  he 
will  command  :  Capfaiyi,  rectify  the  alignment.  The  captain  will 
direct  the  covering  sergeant  to  attend  to  the  rear  rank,  when 
each,  glancing  his  eyes  along  liis  rank,  will  promptl}'  rectiry  it, 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No. 
320. 

Article  III. — Obliqui:  march  in  line  of  battle.) 

101.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march,  when  the  instruct- 
or shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  obliquely,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

102.  At  tho  command  inarch,  the  company  will  take  the  oblique 
step.  The  men  will  accurately  observe  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  .^,;}1.  The  rear  rank  men  will  pre- 
serve their  distances,  and  march  in  rear  of  the  man  next  on  the 
right  (or  left)  of  their  habitual  file  leaders. 

103.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  din-et  »n;ire}i  t'>  bo  iv^umcd, 
he  will  command: 

1.  Foruard.     2.  Mak<  n. 

104.  At  the  command  mnrch,  the  company  will  resume  the  direct 
march.  The  instructor  will  move  briskly  twenty  paces  in  front  of 
the  captain,  and  facing  the  company,  will  place  himself  exactly  in 
the  prolongation  of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant;  and  then, 
by  a  sign,  will  move  the  directing  sergeant  on  the  same  line,  if  h« 
be  not  already  on  it;  the  latter  will  immediately  take  two  point%| 
on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the  instructor,  and  as  he  ad- 
vancoft,  will  take  new  points  of  direction,  as  is  explained  2^0.  89- 


s^' 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


105.  In  the  oblique  march,  the  men  not  having  the  tonch  of  el- 
bows, the  guide  will  aways  be  on  the  side  toward  which  the  oblique 
is  made,  without  an}"^  indication  to  that  effect  being  given  ;  and  when 
the  direct  march  is  resumed,  the  guide  will  be,  equally  without 
indication,  on  the  side  w^iei-e  it  was  previous  to  the  oblique. 

106.  The  instructor  will,  at  first,  cause  the  oblique  to  be  made 
toward  the  side  of  the  guide.  He  will  also  direct  the  captain  to 
have  an  eye  on  the  directing  sergeant,  in  order  to  keep  on  the  same 
perpendicular  line  to  the  front  with  him,  while  following  a  paral- 
lel direction. 

107.  During  the  continuance  of  the  march,  the  instructor  will  be 
watchful  that  the  men  follow  parallel  directions,  in  conforming  to 
the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  for  preserv- 
ing the  general  alignment ;  whenever  the  men  lose  the  alignment, 
he  will  be  careful  that  they  regain  it  by  lengthening  or  shortening 
the  step,  without  altering  the  cadence,  or  changing  the  direction. 

108.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  company 
and  face  to  it,  in  order  to  regulate  the  march  of  the  directing  ser- 
geant, or  the  man  who  is  on  the  flank  toward  which  the  oblique  is 
made,  and  to  see  that  the  principles  of  the  march  are  properly  ob- 
served, and  that  the  files  do  not  crowd. 

Article  IV. —  To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  and  the 

back  step. 

109.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march,  and  in  quick  time, 
the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  mark  time,  will  command  : 

1.  Mark  time.      2.  March. 

110.  To  resume  the  march,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Fonoard.     2.  Makch. 

111.  To  cause  the  march  in  double  quick  time,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

1.  Double  quick.      2.  March. 

112.  The  command  inarch  will  be  pronounced  at  the  instant  either 
foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

113.  To  resume  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 

114.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the  instant 
either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

115.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may  cause  it  to 
march  in  the  back  step  ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command : 

1.   Company  backward.      2.  March. 

116.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  247,  but  the  use  of  it 
being  rare,  the  instructor  will  not  cause  more  than  fifteen  or  twenty 
steps  to  be  taken  in  succession,  and  to  that  extent  but  seldom. 

117.  The  instructor  ought  not  to  exercise  the  company  in  march- 


sc;hooj.  of  the  company.  5f^' 

ing  in  double  quick  time  till  the  men  are  well  established  in  the 
length  and  pwiflncss  of  the  pace  in  quick  time;  he  will  then  en- 
deavor to  roiuler  the  march  of  one  hniuired  and  eixty-fivo  Bteps  in 
the  minute  equally  easy  and  familiar,  and  also  cause  them  to  ob- 
serve the  same  erectness  of  body  and  composure  of  mind,  as  if 
marchinif  in  quick  time. 

118.  When  marching  in  double  quick  time,  if  a  subdivision  (in 
a  column)  has  to  change  direction  by  turning,  or  has  to  form  into 
line,  the  men  will  quicken  the  pace  to  one  hundred  and  eighty  steps 
in  a  minute.  The  same  swiftness  of  step  will  be  observed  under 
all  circumstances  where  great  rapidity  of  movement  is  required. 
But,  as  ranks  of  men  cannot  mai'ch  any  length  of  time  at  so  swift 
a  rat<>,  without  breaking  or  confusion,  this  acceleration  Avill  not  bo 
considered  a  prescribed  exercise,  and  accordingly  companies  or  bat- 
talions will  only  be  habitually  exercised  in  the  double  quick  time 
of  one  hundred  and  sixty -five  steps  in  the  minuto. 

Articlk  V. —  To  march  in  retreat. 

119.  The  company  being  lialted  and  correctly  aligned,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.   Company.      2.  About — Fack. 

120.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear,  the  instructor  will 
plac«  himself  in  front  of  the  directing  file,  conforming  to  what  is 
prescribed,  No.  84. 

121.  The  instructor,  being  correctly-  established  on  the  prolon- 
gation of  the  directing  file,  will  command  : 

3.  Company,  foricard. 

122.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant  will  conform  him.s«if  to  what 
is  prescribed  Nos.  86  and  87,  with  this  ditierence — he  will  place 
himself  six  paces  in  front  of  the  line  of  file  closers,  now  leading. 

123.  The  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  line  of  file  closers, 
opposite  to  his  interval,  and  the  captain  will  place  himself  in  the 
rear  rank,  now  become  the  front. 

124.  This  disposition  being  pi'omptly  made,  the  instructor  will 
command  : 

4.   March. 

125.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain,  and  the  men, 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  89,  and  following. 

126.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed,  marching  in  re- 
treat, all  that  is  prescribe<l  for  marching  in  advance;  the  com- 
mands and  the  means  of  execution  will  be  the  same. 

127.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  company,  will,  when  ho 
may  wish,  cause  it  to  fac«  to  the  front  by  the  commands  prescribed 
No.  119.  The  captain,  th«!  covering  sergeant,  and  the  directing 
sergeant,  will  resume  their  habitual  places  in  line,  the  moment  thoy 
shall  have  faced  al>out. 

128.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  front  rank,  if  the  in- 


68  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


sti'uctor  should  wish  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  cause  the  right 
about  to  be  executed  while  marching,  and  to  this  effect  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Company.     2.  JRiyht  about.     3.  March. 

129.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  will  promptly  faco 
about,  and  recommence  the  march  by  the  rear  rank. 

130.  The  directing  sergeant  will  face  about  with  the  company^ 
and  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  front  of  the  file  closers,  and 
upon  the  prolongation  of  the  guide.  The  instructor  will  place  him 
in  the  proper  direction  by  the  means  prescribed  No.  104.  The 
captain,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  men,  will  conform  to  the 
principles  prescribed  for  the  march  in  retreat. 

131.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  company  to  march  by  the 
front  i-ank,  he  will  give  the  same  commands,  and  will  regulate  the 
direction  of  the  march  by  the  same  means. 

132.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed  in  double  quick 
time,  all  the  movements  prescribed  in  the  3d,  4th,  5th  and  6th  lea- 
sons  of  this  school,  with  the  exception  of  the  march  backwards, 
which  will  be  executed  only  in  quick  time.  He  will  give  the  same 
commands,  observing  to  add  double  quid<  before  the  command 
march. 

133.  When  the  pieces  arc  carried  on  the  right  shoulder,  in  quick 
time,  the  distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  sixteen  inches.  AVhen- 
ever,  therefore,  the  instructor  brings  the  comjjany  from  a  shoulder 
to  this  position,  the  rear  rank  must  shorten  a  little  the  first  steps 
in  order  to  gain  the  prescribed  distance,  and  will  lengthen  the 
steps,  on  the  contrary,  in  order  to  close  up  when  the  pieces  are 
again  brought  to  a  shoulder.     In  marching  in  double  quick  time 

he  distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  twenty-six  inches,  and  the 
pieces  will  be  carried  habitually  on  the  right  shoulder. 

134.  Whenever  a  company  is  halted,  the  men  will  bring  their 
pieces  at  once  to  a  shoulder  at  the  command  halt.  The  i-ear  rank, 
will  close  to  its  proper  distance.     These  rules  are  general. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  59 


i    (  LESSON  FOUETH. 

Article  I. —  To  march  by  the  flank. 

135.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  .march  by  the  right  flank,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Company,  ri{fht—FAc^.     2.  Foricard.     3.  March. 

CD    q:         B    E3       ;;^   □  cj 


•od  »a  <n 


136.  At  the  first  command,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right, 
the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front 
rank,  the  captain  having  stepped  out  for  the  purpose,  so  far  as  to 
find  himself  by  the  side  of  the  sergeant,  and  on  his  left ;  the  front 
rank  will  double  as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No. 
352  ;  the  rear  rank  will,  at  the  same  time,  side  step  to  the  right  one 
pace,  and  double  in  the  same  manner;  so  that  when  the  move- 
ment is  completed,  the  files  will  be  formed  of  four  men  aligned,  and 
elbow  to  elbow.     The  intervals  will  bo  preserved. 

137.  The  file  closers  will  also  move  by  side  step  to  the  right,  so 
that  when  the  ranks  are  formed,  they  will  be  two  paces  from  the 
rearmost  rank. 

138.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  move  offbri.skly 
in  quick  time  ;  the  covering  sergeant  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank, 
and  the  captain  on  his  left,  will  march  straight  forward.  Tho 
men  of  each  file  will  march  abreast  of  their  respective  front  rank 
men,  heads  direct  to  tiie  front  ;  the  file  closers  will  march  ojtposite 
their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

139.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  ))rincii)lcs  of  the  march  by 
the  flank  to  lie  observed,  in  placing  himself  pending  the  march,  as 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  357. 

140.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  by  the  left  flunk  to  be 
executed  by  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  for  rigfU ;  the 
ranks  will  double  as  has  been  ]»rescribod  in  thc^cbool  for  the  sol- 
dier, No.  354  ;  the  rear  rank  will  side-step  to  the  left  one  pa^o  bo- 
fore  doubling. 

141.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left,  the  left  guide 
will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank  ;    the  captain  will 


60i' 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


pass  rapidly  to  the  left,  and  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  this 
guide  ;  the  covering  sei-geant  will  replace  the  captain  in  the  front 
rank,  the  moment  the  latter  quits  it  to  go  to  the  left. 

Article  II. —  To  change  direction  by  file. 

142.  The  company  being  faced  by  the  flank,  and  either  in  march 
or  at  a  halt,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  wheel  by 
file,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  file ^  left,  (or  right).      2.  March. 


il3SEZEE3ZEE3:SECin2 


pa  DDfflD'DCE 
y$>M  B  0  151  PI     0 

.<!r.i..i...i..l3...i-.-.i.- 


D  -^j     m     El     4J  o  0 


143.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will  wheel ;  if  to  the 
side  of  the  front  rank  man,  the  latter  will  take  care  not  to  turn  at 
once,  but  to  describe  a  short  arc  of  a  circle,  shortening  a  little  the 
first  five  or  six  steps  in  order  to  give  time  to  the  fourth  man  of  this 
file  to  conform  himself  to  the  movement.  If  the  wheel  be  to  the 
side  of  the  rear  rank,  the  front  rank  man  will  wheel  in  the  step  of 
twenty-eight  inches,  and  the  fourth  man  will  conform  himself  to 
the  movement  by  describing  a  short  arc  of  a  circle  as  has  been  ex- 
plained. Each  file  will  come  to  wheel  on  the  same  ground  where 
that  which  preceded  it  wheeled. 

144.  The  instructor  will  see  that  the  wheel  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  these  principles,  in  order  that  the  distance  between  the  files 
may  always  be  preserved,  and  that  there  be  no  check  or  hin- 
drance at  the  wheeling  point. 

Article  III. —  To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  flank^  and  to 
face  it  to  the  front. 

145.  To  effect  these  objects,  the  instructor  will  command: 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.  .fjft  jjj 

146.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  executed  as  pre-" 
scribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos.  359  and  360.  As  soon  as 
the  files  have  undoubled,  the  rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper  dis- 
tance. The  captain  and  covering  sei'geant,  as  well  as  the  left 
guide,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left  flank,  will  return  to  their  habit- 
ual places  in  line  at  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front. 

147.  The  instructor  may  then  align  the  company  by  one  of  the 
means  prescribed,  No.  100. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  61 

Article  IV.  —  The  company  hein^  in  inarch  by  the  jftank,  to  form 
it  on  the  right  (or  left)  by  file  into  line  of  battle. 

148.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  i-ight  flank,  the 
instructor  will  command  : 

1.   On  the  right,  by  file  into  line.     2.  March. 

149.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  men  doubled  will 
mark  time  ;  the  captain  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  turn  to  the 
right,  march  straight  forward,  and  be  halted  by  the  instructor 
when  they  shall  have  passed  at  least  six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of 
file  closers,  the  captain  will  place  himself  correctly  on  the  line  of 
battle,  and  will  direct  the  alignment  as  the  men  of  the  front  rank 
successively  arive;  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  behind 
the  Ciiptain  at  the  distance  of  the  rear  rank  ;  the  two  men  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  continue  to  march,  and  pass- 
ing beyond  the  covering  sergeant  and  the  captain,  will  turn  to  the 
right;  after  turning,  they  will  contiinie  to  march  elbow  to  elbow, 
and  direct  themselves  towards  the  line  of  battle,  but  when  they 
shall  arrive  at  two  paces  from  this  line,  the  even  number  will 
shorten  the  step  so  that  the  odd  number  may  precede  him  on  the 
line,  the  odd  number  placing  himself  by  the  side  and  on  the  left 
of  the  cajitain  ;  the  even  number  will  afterwards  oblique  to  the 
left,,  and  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  odd  number;  the  next 
two  men  of  the  front  rank  doubled,  will  pass  in  the  same  manner 
behind  the  two  fii'st,  turn  then  to  the  right,  and  place  themselves, 
according  to  the  means  just  explained,  to  the  left,  and  by  the  side 
of,  the  two  men  already  established  on  the  line;  the  remaining 
files  of  this  rank  will  follow  in  succession,  and  be  formed  to  the 
left  in  the  same  manner.  The  rear  rank  doubled  will  execute  the 
movement  in  the  manner  already  explained  for  the  front  rank, 
taking  care  not  t^)  commence  the  movement  until  four  men  of  the 
front  rank  aro  established  on  the  line  of  battle  ;  the  rear  rank 
men,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  cover  ac<;urately  their  file 
leaders. 

150.  If  the  company  be  marching  b}'  the  left  flank,  the  in- 
structor will  cause  it  to  form  by  file  on  the  left  into  line  of  battle, 
aoc-ording  to  the  same  principles  and  by  the  same  commands,  sub- 
stituting the  indication  t-elffor  rig/U.  In  this  case,  the  odd  numbers 
will  short<>n  the  step,  so  that  the  even  numbei*s  may  jirecede  them 
on  the  line.  The  captain,  placed  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  and 
the  left  guide,  will  return  to  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  bv 
order  of  the  instructor,  after  the  company'  shall  be  Ibrmod  and 
abgnod. 

151.  To  enable  the  men  the  better  to  comprehend  themochanism 
of  this  movement,  the  instnict/ir  will  at  fii-st  cause  it  to  be  executed 
separately  liy  each  rank  doubled,  and  afterwards  by  the  two  ranks 

•   united  and  doubled. 

$'      \b2.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  lino  of  battle,  and 
without   the   point   where  the  right  or  left  is  U)  re^t.  in  order  to 


rl^ 


SGHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


establish  the  base  of  the  alignment,  and  afterwards,  he  will  follow 
up  the  movement  to  assure  himself  that  each  file  conforms  itself 
to  what  is  jii'escribed  No.  149. 

Article  Y. —  The   company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form 
it  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  into  line,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the 
right  and  left  in  marching. 
153.  The   company   being   in    march    by  the  right   flank,   the 

instructor  will  order  the  captain  to  form  it  into  line ;  the  captain 

will  immediately  command  : 

1.  By  compaixy,  into  line.     2.  March. 

/'•;0iT.i.^.i...- 


/^/  / /  /  / /  /   , ^-FSI- 

//////////y       ffl" 
///////////  ^ 


«K] 


154.  At  the  command  march,  the  covering  sergeant  will  continue 
to  march  straight  forward  ;  the  men  will  advance  the  right  shoul- 
der, take  the  double  quick  step,  and  move  into  line,  by  the  shortest 
route,  taking  care  to  undoublc  the  files,  and  to  come  on  the  line 
one  after  the  other. 

155.  As  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive  in  line  with  the 
covering  sergeant,  they  will  take  from  him  the  step,  and  then  turn 
their  eyes  to  the  front. 

156.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the  movements 
of  their  respective  file  leaders,  but  without  endeavoring  to  arrive 
in  line  at  the  same  time  with  the  latter. 

157.  At  the  instant  the  movement  begins,  the  captain  will  face 
f  to  his  company  in  order  to  follow  up  the  execution;  and,  an  soon 

as  the  company  is  formed,  he  will  command,  guide  left,  place  him- 
self two  paces  before  the  center,  face  to  the  front,  and  take  the 
I )  step  of  the  company. 

158.  At  the  command  guide  left,  the  second  sergeant  will  promptly 
place  himself  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  left,  to  serve  as  guide,  and 

i  the  covering  sergeant  who  is  on  the  oppo.sit«  flank  will  remain 
(\  there. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  ^  63 

159.  When  the  company  marches  by  the  left  flank,  thi.s  move- 
ment will  hf  executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  according  to 
the  same  principles ;  the  company  being  formed,  the  captain  will 
command  gw'de  right,  and  place  hin\self  in  front  of  his  company  as 
above  ;  the  covering  sergeant  who  is  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank 
will  serve  as  guide,  and  the  second  sergeant  placed  on  the  left 
flank  will  remain  there. 

160.  Thus,  in  a  column  by  com])any,  right  or  left  in  front,  the 
covering  sergeant  and  the  second  sergeant  of  each  company  will 
Always  be  placed  on  the  right  and  left,  respectively,  of  the  front 
rank  ;  they  will  be  denominated  light  guide  and  left  guide.,  and  the 
one  or  the  other  charged  with  the  direction. 

161.  The  comi^any  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  if  it  be  the  wish 
of  the  instructor  to  cause  it  to  i'orm  platoons,  he  will  give  an  order 
""JO  that  eflect  U.)  the  captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  into  line.     2.  March. 

162.  The  movement  will  be  executed  by  each  platoon  according 
to  the  above  principles.  The  cai)tain  will  ])lace  himself  l)efore  the 
center  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  first  lieutenant  before  the  cen- 
ter of  the  second,  ])assiiig  through  the  opening  made  in  the  cent<!r 
of  the  company,  if  the  march  be  by  the  right  flank,  and  around 
the  left  of  his  platoon,  if  the  march  be  by  the  left;  in  this  last  case 
the  captain  will  also  pass  around  the  left  of  tho  second  platoon  in 
order  to  place  himself  in  front  of  the  first.  Both  the  captain  and 
lieutenant,  without  waiting  for  each  other,  will  command  guide  left 
(or  right)  at  the  instant  their  i-espective  ]>latoons  are  formed. 

16:J.  Atthe  command  guide,  left  (or  light)  the  guide  of  each  p^a- 
toon  will  pa^iK  rapidly  to  the  iiidicjited  flank'  of  the  platoon,  if  not 
already  there. 

164.  The  riglit  guide  of  the  company  will  always  servo  as  the 
guide  of  the  right  or  left  of  the  fii'st  platoon,  and  the  left  guide  of 
the  company  will  serve,  in  like  manner,  as  the  guide  of  the  second 
•platoon. 

165.  Thus  in  a  column,  by  }ilatoon,  there  will  be  but  one  gJiide 
to  each  platoon  ;  hci  will  always  be  placed  o)i  its  left  flank,  if  the 
right  bo  in  fr(»nt,  and  on  the  right  flank,  if  the  left  be  in  front. 

166.  In  these  movements  the  file  closers  will  follow  the  platoons 
to  which  they  are  att-ached. 

167.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  company,  marching  by  tlie 
flank,  to  form  by  company,  ur  by  platoon,  into  line,  by  his  own 
dir^'t  commands,  using  those  ]irescribed  for  the  captain.  No.  15H 
or  161.  ' 

HiH.  The  instructor  will  e.xi  rii^e  the  (;om])any  in  passing,  witli- 
ont  a  halt,  from  the  march  by  the  front,  to  the  march  by  the  flank, 
and  nH'iprocally.  In  either  case,  he  will  employ  the  commands 
proscriltf<l  in  the  Sch(K>l  of  the  Soldier,  No.  HfJiJ,  sul)stituting  eom- 
pony  for  nqvad.  Tlu^  company  will  fac(^  to  the  riglit  or  h-fl  in 
•narching,  and  the  cnptnin.  the  guides,  and  flle  closers  will  fonforni 
tH^msolvVj*  to  ivhat  is    )>rcs<riltrd    for    (dch    in    tlw   m.-u'i  It    by  thr 


64 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


flank,  or  in  the  march  by  the  front  of  a  company  supposed  to  be 
a  subdivision  of  a  column. 

169.  If,  after  facing  to  the  right  or  left,  in  marching,  the  com- 
pany find  itself  faced  by  the  I'ear  rank,  the  captain  will  place  him- 
self two  paces  behind  the  center  of  the  front  i"ank,  now  in  the  rear, 
the  guides  will  pass  to  the  rear  rank,  now  leading,  and  the  file 
closers  will  march  in  front  of  this  rank. 

170.  The  instructor,  in  order  to  avoid  fatiguing  the  men,  and  to 
prevent  them  from  being  negligent  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms, 
will  sometimes  order  support  arms  in  marching  by  the  flank,  and 
arms  on  the  right  shoulder,  when  marching  in  line. 

LESSON  FIFTH. 

Article  I. —  To  break  into  column  by  platoon,  either  at  a  halt  or  in 

march. 

171.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  in  line  of  battle,  the  instruc- 
tor, wishing  to  break  it  into  column,  by  platoon  to  the  right,  will 
command  : 

1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel.     2.  March. 


0 


l> 


o 


n-U_L.LJ..J..J.X 
SI     Cb     iS        E         B        £      □ 

172.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  rapidly 
place  themselves  two  paces  before  the  centers  of  their  respective 
platoons,  the  lieutenant  passing  around  the  left  of  the  compan3\ 
They  need  not  occupy  themselves  with  dressing,  one  upon  the 
other.  The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  captain  in  the  front 
rank. 

173.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  front  rank  man  of  each 
platoon  will  face  to  the  right,  the  covering  sergeant  standing  fast; 
the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  move  quickly  by  the  shortest  line,  a 
little  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  marching  flank  will  rest  when 
the  wheel  shall  be  completed,  tace  to  the  late  rear,  and  place  him- 
self so  that  the  line  which  he  forms  with  the  man  on  the  right 
(who  had  faced,)  shall  be  perpendicular  to  that  occupied  by  the 
company  in  line  of  battle;  each  platoon  will  wheel  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and  when 
the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  shall  approach  near  to 
the  perpendicular,  its  chief  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

174.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at  the  inetint 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY.  65 

the  man  who  conducta  the  marching  flank  shall  havo  arrived  at 
three  paces  from  tlio  perpendicular,  the  platoon  will  halt;  the  cov- 
ering sergeant  will  move  to  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  first 
platoon  is  to  rest,  passing  by  the  front  rank;  the  second  sergeant 
will  place  himself,  in  like  manner,  in  respect  to  the  second  pla- 
toon. Each  will  take  care  to  leave  between  himself  and  the  man 
on  the  right  of  his  platoon,  a  space  equal  to  its  front ;  the  caj)tain 
and  first  lieutenant  will  look  to  this,  and  each  take  care  to  align 
the  sergeant  between  himself  and  the  man  of  the  platoon  who  had 
faced  to  the  right. 

175.  The  guide  of  each  platoon  being  thus  established  on  the 
perpendicular,  eacli  chief  will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of 
his  guide,  and  facing  towards  him,  will  command  : 

3.  Left — Dress. 

176.  The  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief  of  ])latoon  will  com- 
mand, Front,  and  place  himself  two  paces  before  its  center. 

177.  The  file  closers  will  conform  themselves  to  the  movement 
of  their  respective  platoons,  preserving  always  the  distance  of  two 
paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

178.  The  company  will  break  by  platoon  to  the  left,  according 
to  the  same  principles.     The  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  By  platooji,  left  wheel.     2.  March. 

17i).  The  first  command  will  be  executed  in  the  same  manner  an 
if  breaking  by  platoon  to  the  right. 

180.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  front  rank  man  of  each 
platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left, 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed 
pivot;  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  confonn  to  the  principles  indica- 
ted Nos.  173  and  174. 

181.  At  the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chief  of  each  j)latoon, 
the  covering  sergeant  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  first 
platoon,  and  the  second  sergeant  near  the  left  of  the  second  pla- 
toon, will  each  move  to  the  points  where  the  right  of  his  platoon 
is  to  rest.  The  chief  of  each  ])Iatoon  should  be  careful  to  align 
the  sergeant  between  himseltVind  the  man  of  the  platoon  who  had 
faced  to  the  left,  and  will  then  command : 

Rigid — ^Dress. 

182.  The  platoons  being  aligned,  each  chief  of  ])latoon  will  com- 
mand Front,  and  place  himself  opposite  its  center. 

183.  The  instructor  wishing  to  break  the  company  by  platoon 
to  the  right  and  to  move  the  column  forward  after  the  wheel  is 
completed,  will  caution  the  company  to  that  cffVict,  and  command  : 

1.  By  platoon^  right  wheel.     2.  March. 

184.  At  the  first  comraand  the  chio&  of  platoon  will  move  rapidly 
in  front  of  their  rospoctivc  platoons,  conforming  to  what  haa  been 
proscribed  No.  172,   and  will  remain   in  this  position  during  the 


66  SCHOOL   OF  THE   COMPANY. 

continuance  of  the  wheel.     The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the 
chief  of  the  first  platoon  in  the  front  rank. 

185.  At  the  command  march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  right, 
conforming  to  the  principles  herein  prescribed  ;  the  man  on  the 
pivot  will  not  face  to  the  right,  but  will  mai'k  time,  conforming 
himself  to  the  movement  of  the  marching  flank ;  and  when  the 
man  who  is  on  the  left  of  this  flank  shall  arrive  near  the  perpen- 
dicular, the  instructor  will  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  left. 

186.  At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
the  wheel  is  completed,  the  platoons  will  move  straight  to  the  front, 
all  the  men  taking  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches.  The  covering 
Bergeant  and  the  second  sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to  the  left  of 
their  respective  platoons,  the  former  passing  before  the  front  rank. 
The  leading  guide  will  immediately  take  points  on  the  ground  in 
the  direction  which  may  be  indicated  to  him  by  the  instructor. 

187.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of 
elbows  lightly  to  the  left. 

188.  If  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  should  lose  his  distance, 
or  the  line. of  direction,  he  will  conform  to  the  principles  herein 
prescribed,  Nos.  202  and  203. 

189.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  line  to  the  front,  the  in- 
structor will  cause  it  to  break  by  platoon  to  the  right  by  the  same 
commands.  At  the  command  march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  in  the 
manner  already  explained ;  the  man  on  the  pivot  will  take  cai-e  to 
mark  time  in  his  place,  without  advancing  or  rece(?ling  ;  the  in- 
structor, the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  guides,  will  conform  tO' 
what  ha«  been  prescribed  Kos.  184  and  following. 

190.  The  company  may  be  broken  by  platoons  to  the  left,  ac- 
cording to  the  same  princijDles,  and  by  inverse  mean^,  the  instructor 
giving  the  commands  prescribed  Nos.  183  and  185,  substituting 
left  for  right,  and  reciprocally. 

191.  The  movements  explained  in  Nos.  183  and  If  9  will  only  be 
executed  after  the  company  has  become  well  established  in  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  column,  Articles  Second  and  Third. 

Remarks. 

192.  The  instructor,  placed  in  front  of  the  company,  will  observe 
whether  the  movement  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  pi-e- 
scribed above  ;  whether  the  platoons,  after  breaking  into  column, 
are  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle  just  occupied  ;  and  whether 
the  guide,  who  placed  himself  where  the  marching  flank  of  his 
platoon  had  to  rest,  has  left,  between  himself  and  the  front  rank  man 
on  the  right  (or  left),  the  space  necessary  to  contain  the  front  of 
the  platoon. 

193.  After  the  platoons  have  broken,  if  the  rearmost  guard  should 
not  accurately  cover  the  leading  one,  he  will  not  seek  to  correct 
his  position  till  the  column  be  put  in  march,  unless  the  instructor 
wishing  to  wheel  immediately  into  line,  should  think  it  necessary 


SCHOOL    OF   THE    COMPANY.  67 

to  rectify  the  direction  of  the  guides,  which  would  be  executed   as 
will  be  hereinafter  explained  in  Article  Fifth  of  this  Lesson. 

194.  The  instructor  will  obsei've,  that  the  man  on  the  right  (or 
left)  of  each  platoon,  who,  at  the  command  anarch,  faces  to  the 
right  (or  left)  being  the  true  pivot  of  the  wheel,  the  front  rank 
man  next  to  him  ought  to  gain  a  little  ground  to  the  front  in  wheel- 
ing, 80  as  clear  the  pivot-man. 

Article  II. —  To  march  in  column. 

195.  The  company  having  broken  by  platoon,  right  {oy  left)  in 
front,  the  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  column  to  march,  will 
throw  himself  twenty-five  or  tdiirty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the 
guides,  place  himself  correctly,  on  their  direction,  and  caution  the 
leading  guide  to  take  points  on  the  ground. 

196.  The  instructor  being  thus  placed,  the  guide  of  the  leading 
platoon  will  take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight  line 
passing  between  his  own  and  the  heels  of  the  instructor.  ^ 

197.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor  will  step  aside 
and  command  : 

1.   Column ^  forward.      2.   Guide  left  (or  right).     3.  March. 

198.  At  the  command  march,  promptly  repeated  by  the  chiets  of 
platoon,  they,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will  lead  off,  by  a  decided  step, 
their  respective  platoons,  in  order  that  the  wliole  may  move 
smartly,  and  at  the  same  moment. 

199.  The  men  will  each  fi-el  lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor 
toward  the  guide,  and  conform  himself,  in  marching,  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  327.  The  man 
next  to  the  guide,  in  each  platoon,  will  take  care  never  \o  pass 
him.  and  also  to  march  alwaj's  about  six  inches  to  the  right  (or 
lefl)  from  him,  in  order  not  to  push  him  out  of  the  direction. 

200.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the  greatest  precision, 
the  length  and  cadence  of  the  stvp,  and  maintain  the  direction  of 
his  march  by  the  means  prescribed  No.  89. 

201.  The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the 
leading  one,  preserving  between  the  latter  and  himself  a  distance 
precisely  equal  to  the  front  of  his  platoon,  and  marching  in  the 
same  step  with  the  leading  guide. 

202.  If  the  followi?ig  guide  lose  his  distance  from  the  one  lead- 
ing, "(which  can  only  liap}ten  by  his  own  fault,)  he  will  correct 
himself  by  slightly'  lengthening  or  shortening  a  few  stejts,  in  or- 
der that  there  may  not  be  sudden  quickenings  or  slackenings  in 
the  march  of  his  platoon. 

203.  If  the  same  guide,  having  neglected  to  march  exactly  in 
the  trace  of  the  preceding  one,  find  himself  sensibly  out  of  the  di- 
rection, ho  will  remedy  tiiis  fault  by  advancing  more  or  less  the 
shoulder  opposite  to  the  true  direction,^and  thus,  in  a  few  steps,  in- 
sensibly regain  it,  without  the  inconvenience  of  the  oblique  step, 
which  would  cause  a  loss  of  distiince.  In  all  cases,  each  chief  of 
platoon  will  c.au8e  it  to  conform  to  the  movements  of  its  guide. 


68  SCHOOL   OF    THE   COMPANY. 

Remarks  on  the  viarch  in  column. 

204.  If  the  chiefs  and  guides  of  subdivisions  neglect  to  lead  off 
and  to  decide  the  march  from  the  first  step,  the  march  will  be  be- 
gun in  uncertainty,  which  will  cause  waverings,  a  loss  of  step  and 
a  loss  of  distance. 

205.  If  the  leading  guide  take  unequal  steps,  the  march  of  his 
subdivision,  and  that  which  follows  will  be  uncertain;  there  will 
be  undulations,  quickenings,  and  slackenings  in  the  march. 

206.  If  the  same  guide  be  not  habituated  to  prolong  a  given  di- 
rection, without  deviation,  he  will  describe  a  ci-ooked  line,  and  the 
column  must  wind  to  conform  itself  to  such  line. 

207.  If  the  following  guide  be  not  habituated  to  march  in  the 
trace  of  the  preceding  one,  he  will  lose  his  distance  at  every  mo- 
ment in  endeavors  to  regain  the  trace,  the  preservation  of  which 
is  the  most  important  principle  in  the  march  in  column. 

208.  The  guide  of  each  subdivision  in  column  will  be  responsi- 
ble for  the  direction,  distance  and  step;  the  chief  of  the  subdivi- 
sion, for  the  order  and  conformity  of  his  subdivision  with  the 
movements  of  the  guide.  Accordingly,  the  chief  will  frequently 
turn,  in  the  march,  to  observe  his  subdivision. 

209.  The  instructor,  placed  on  the  flank  of  the  guides,  will  watch 
over  the  execution  of  all  the  j)i'inciples  prescribed  ;  he  will,  also, 
sometimes  place  himself  in  the  rear,  align  himself  on  the  guides, 
and  halt,  pending  some  thirty  paces  together,  to  verify  the  accu- 
racy of  the  guides. 

210.  In  column,  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  always  repeat,  with 
the  greatest  promptitude,  the  commands  march  and  halt,  no  chief 
waiting  for  another,  but  each  repeating  the  command  the  moment 
he  catches  it  from  the  instructor.  They  will  repeat  no  other  com- 
mand given  by  him;  but  will  explain,  if  necessary,  to  their  subdi- 
visions, in  an  under  tone  of  voice,  what  they  will  have  to  execute, 
as  indicated  by  the  commands  of  caution. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY. 


69 


Article  III. —  To  change  direction. 


211.  Tlio  changes  of  direclion  of  a  column  while  marching,  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  wheeling  on 
the  march.  AVlienever,  therefore,  a  column  is  to  diange  direction, 
the  inntructor  will  change  the  guide,  if  not  already  there,  to  the 
flank  opposite  the  nide  to  which  the  change  is  to  be  made. 

212.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  it  be  the  wish 
of  the  instructor  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he  will  give  the 
order  to  the  chief  of  tlie  first  platoon,  and  immediately  go  himBclf, 
or  send  a  marker  to  the  point  at  which  the  change  of  direction  is 
to  bo  made  ;  the  instructor,  or  marker,  will  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  guides,  so  as  to  present  the  breast  to  that  flank  of 
the  column. 

213.  The  leading  guide  will  direct  hie  march  on  tliat  person,  so 
that,  in  passing.  Ins  left  arm  may  just  graze  his  breast.  When  the 
leading  guide  shall  have  approached  near  to  the  marker,  the  chief 
of  his  platoon  will  command  : 


70  SCHOOL   OF    THE   COMPANY. 

1.  Bight  wheel.     2.  March. 

214.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  platoon  is  at  the 
distance  of  four  paces  from  the  marker. 

215.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  bo  pronounced  at  the 
instant  the  guide  shall  have  arrived  opposite  the  marker,  the  pla- 
toon will  wheel  to  the  right,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  396. 

216.  The  wheel  being  finished,  the  chief  of  each  platoon  will 
command : 

3.  Forward.      4.  March. 

217.  These  commands  will  be  pronounced  and  executed  a,s  is 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos.  398  and  399.  The 
guide  of  the  first  platoon  will  take  points  on  the  ground  in  the  new 
direction,  in  order  the  bettor  to  regulate  the  march. 

218.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward 
till  up  with  the  marker,  when  it  will  wheel  to  the  right,  and 
retake  the  direct  march  by  the  same  commands  and  the  same 
means  which  governed  the  first  platoon. 

219.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if  the  instriictor 
should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the  left,  he  will  command,  guide 
right.  At  this  command,  the  two  guides  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
right  of  their  respective  jjlatoons,  each  passing  in  front  of  his 
subdivision ;  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right ; 
the  instructor  will  afterwards  conform  to  what  is  proscribed  No. 
212. 

220.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  then  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  as  the  change  of  direction  to  the 
right,  but  by  inverse  ineans. 

221.  When  the  change  of  direction  is  completed,  the  instructor 
will  command,  guide  left. 

222.  The  changes  of  direction  in  a  column,  left  in  front,  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles. 

223.  In  changes  of  direction  in  double  quick  time,  the  platoons 
will  wheel  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  soldier,  No.  404. 

224.  In  order  to  prepare  the  men  for  those  formations  in  line, 
which  can  be  executed  only  by  turning  to  the  right  or  the  left,  the 
instructor  will  sometimes  cause  the  column  to  change  direction  to 
the  side  of  the.  guide.  In  this  case,  the  chief  of  the  leading 
platoon  will  command :  Left  (or  right)  turn,  instead  of  left  (or 
right)  wheel.  The  subdivisions  wnll  each  turn,  in  succession,  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  402. 
The  leading  guide,  as  soon  as  ho  has  turned,  will  take  points  on 
the  ground,  the  better  to  regulate  the  direction  of  the  march. 

225.  It  is  highly  important,  in  order  to  preserve  distances  and 
the  direction,  that  all  the  subdivisions  of  the  column  should  change 
direction  precisely  at  the  point  where  the  leading  subdivision 
changed ;  it  is  for  this  reason  that  that  point  ought  to  be  marked 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.       .  71 

in  advance,  and  that  it  is  prescribed  that  the  guides  direct  their 
march  on  the  marker,  also  that  each  chief  of  subdivision  shall  not 
cause  the  change  to  commence  till  the  guide  of  liis  subdivision  has  ■ 
grazed  the  breast  of  this  marker. 

226.  Each  chief  will  take  care  that  his  subdivision  arrives  at  the 
point  of  change  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction  ;  with  this 
view,  he  will  face  to  his  su])division  when  the  one  which  precedes 
has  commenced  to  turn  or  to  wheel,  and  he  will  be  watchful  that  it 
continues  to  march  squarely  until  it  arrives  at  the  point  where 
the  change  of  direction  is  to  commence. 

227.  If,  in  changes  of  direction,  the  pivot  of  the  subdivision  which 
wheels  should  not  clear  the  wheeling  point,  the  next  subdivision 
would  be  arrested  and  distances  lost;  for  the  guide  who  conducta 
the  marching  flank  having  to  describe  an  arc,  in  length  about  a 
half  greater  than  the  front  of  the  subdivision,  the  second  subdi- 
vision would  be  already  up  with  the  wheeling  point,  whilst  the 
first  which  wheels  has  yet  the  half  of  its  front  to  execute,  and 
hence  would  be  obliged  to  mark  time  until  that  half  be  executed. 
It  is  therefore  prescribed,  that  the  pivot  of  each  subdivision  should 
take  steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches  in  length,  according  to  the 
swiftness  of  the  gait,  in  oi'der  not  to  arrest  the  march  of  the  next 
subdivision.  The  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  look  well  to  the  step 
of  the  pivot,  and  cause  his  step  to  be  lengthened  or  shortened  as 
may  be  judged  necessary.  By  the  nature  of  this  movement,  the 
center  of  each  subdivision  will  bend  a  little  to  the  rear. 

228.  The  guides  will  never  alter  the  length  or  the  cadence  of  the 
step,  whether  the  change  of  direction  be  to  the  side  of  the  guide  or 
to  the  opposite  side. 

229.  The  marker,  placed  at  the  wheeling  point,  will  always  pre- 
sent his  breast  to  the  flank  of  the  column.  The  instructor  will 
take  the  greatest  pains  in  causing  the  prescribed  principles  to  be 
observed;  he  will  see  that  each  subdivision  only  commences  the 
change  of  direction  when  the  guide,  grazing  the  breast  of  the 
marker,  has  nearly  passed  him,  and,  that  the  marching  flank  does 
not  describe  the  arc  of  too  large  a  circle,  in  order  that  it  may  not 
be  thrown  beyond  the  new  dii«cction. 

230.  In  change  of  direction  by  wheel,  the  guide  of  the  wheeling 
flank  will  cast  his  eyes  over  the  ground  at  the  moment  of  com- 
mencing the  wheel,  and  will  describe  an  arc  of  a  circle  whose 
radius  is  equal  to  the  front  of  the  subdivision. 

Article  IV. —  To  holi  the  column. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  ini?tructor  shall  wish 
to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Column.     2.  Halt. 

232.  At  the  second  command,  promptly  repeated  by  the  chie& 
of  platoon,  the  column  will  halt;  the  guides  will  also  stand  fa«t, 
although  they  may  have  lost  both  distance  and  direction. 


^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


233.  If  the  command  halt^  be  not  repeated  with  the  greatest 
vivacity,,  and  executed  at  the  same  instant,  distances  will  be  lost. 

234.  If  a  guide,  having  lost  his  distance,  seek  to  recover  it  after 
that  command,  he  will  only  throw  his  fault  on  the  following  guide, 
who,  if  he  have  marched  well,  will  no  longer  be  at  his  proper 
distance  ;  and  if  the  latter  regain  what  he  has  thus  lost,  the  move- 
ment will  be  propagated  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

Article  V. — Being  in  column   by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  or 
left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  on  the  march. 

235.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  column,  right  in  fi-ont, 
and  wishing  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  will  place  himself  at 
platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  face  to  him,  and 
rectify,  if  necessary,  the  position  of  the  guide  beyond ;  which 
being  executed,  he  will  command : 

Left — Dress. 

236.  At  this  command,  which  will  not  be  repeated  by  the  chiefs 
of  platoon,  each  of  them  will  place  himself  briskly  two  paces  out- 
side of  his  guide,  and  direct  the  alignment  of  the  platoon  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  direction  of  the  column. 

237.  Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon,  will  command 
Front,  and  retui'n  quickly  to  his  place  in  column. 

238.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  instructor  will  command  i 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     2.  March. 

239.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
platoon,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  left  of  each  platoon  will  face  to 
the  left,  and  place  his  bi-east  lightly  against  the  arm  of  the  guide 
by  his  side,  who  stands  fast ;  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left  on 
the  principle  of  wheels  from  a  halt,  and  in  conformity  to  what  is 
prescribed  No.  194.  Each  chief  will  turn  to  his  platoon,  to  observe 
its  movement,  and  when  the  marching  flank  has  approached  near 
the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

240.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  when  the  marching  flanlr 
of  the  platoon  is  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle. 

241.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  having  halted  it,  will 
return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer,  passing  around  the  left  of  his 
subdivision. 

242.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  will  move  rap- 
idly to  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  company  will  rest  in 
line  of  battle,  and  command  : 

Bight — Dress. 

243.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress  up  on  the 
alignment ;  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  the  leading  pla- 
toon, who  finds  himself  opposite  the  instructor  established  on  the 
direction  of  the  guides,  will  place  his  breast  lightly  against  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  73 

left  arm  of  this  officer.     Tlie  captain  will  direct  the  alignment 
from  the  right  on  the  man  on  the  opposite  flank  of  the  company. 

244.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  command  : 

Front. 

245.  The  inBtructor,  seeing  the  company  in  line  of  battle,  will 
command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

246.  At  this  command,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  the 
captain,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  tile  closer. 

247.  If  the  column  be  left  in  front,  and  the  instructor  should 
wish  to  form  it  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  he  will  place  him- 
Belf  at  platoon  distance  in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  face  to  him, 
and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  position  of  the  guide  bej'ond  ;  which 
being  executed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  into  line,  wheel.     2.  March. 

248.  At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of 
each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right  and  place  his  breast  lightly 
against  the  left  arm  of  the  guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast;  each 
platoon  will  wheel  to  the  right,  and  wnll  bo  halted  by  its  chief, 
when  the  marching  flank  has  approached  near  the  line  of  battle; 
for  this  purpose,  the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

249.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  when  the  marching  flank 
of  the  platoon  is  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle.  The  chief  of 
the  second  platoon  having  halted  his  platoon,  will  resume  his  place 
in  the  rank  of  file  closers. 

250.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  i:»latoon,  will  move 
briskly  to  the  point  at  whifh  the  left  of  the  company  will  rest,  and 
command  : 

Left — Dress. 

251.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress  up  on  the 
alignment;  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  second  platoon,  opposite  the 
instructor,  will  place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of 
this  officer,  and  the  captain  will  irtirectthe  alignnient  from  the  left 
on  the  man  on  the  opposite  flank  of  the  company. 

252.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captsiin  will  command  : 

Front. 

253.  The  instructor  will  afterwards  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

254.  At  this  w^mniand,  the  captain  will  move  to  the  right  of  his 
company,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover  him  and  the  left  guide 
will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

255.  The  instructor  may  omit  the  com^nand  left  or  right  dress, 
previous  to  commanding  left  or  right  into  line,  wheel,  unless,  after 


74  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

rectifying  the  position  of  the  guides,  it  should  become  necessary  to 
dre.ssthe  platoons,  or  one  of  them,  laterally  to  the  right  or  left. 

256.  The  instructor,  before  the  commaud  left  (or  right)  into  line, 
icheel,  will  assure  himself  that  the  rearmost  platoon  is  at  its  exact 
wheeling  distance  from  the  one  in  front.  This  attention  is  impor- 
tant, in  order  to  detect  negligence  on  the  part  of  guides  in  this  es- 
sential point. 

257.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  fi'ont,  and  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without  halting  the  column,  he  will 
give  the  commands  pi'cscribed  No.  238,  and  move  rapidly  to  pla- 
toon distance  in  front  of  the  leading  guide. 

258.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt  short,  the  instructor,  the  chiefs  of 
platoon,  and  the  platoons,  will  conform  to  what  is  j^rescribed  No. 
239  and  following. 

259.  If  the  column  be  in  march  left  in  front,  this  formation  will 
be  made  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means.- 

260.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without  halting  the  column,  andto 
march  the  company  in  line  to  the  front,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  platoons  left  wheel.     2.  March. 

261.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  Qf 
platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt ;  the  man  next  to  the  left  guide  in 
each  platoon  will  mark  time;  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left, 
conforming  to  the  principles  of  a  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot.  When 
the  right  of  the  platoons  shall  arrive  near  the  line  of  battle,  the  in- 
structor will  command  : 

.  3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.   Guide  right  (or  left). 

262.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant  the  wheel  is 
completed,  all  the  men  of  the  company  will  move  off  together  with 
the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches  ;  the  captain,  the  chief  of  the  sec- 
ond platoon,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  left  guide  will  take  their 
positions  as  in  line  of  battle. 

263.  At  the  fifth  command,  which  will  be  given  immediately 
after  the  fourth,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  if  not  already 
there,  will  move  briskly  to  the  side  on  which  the  guide  is  designa- 
ted. The  non-commissioned  officer  charged  with  the  direction  will 
move  rapidly  in  front  of  the  guide,  and  will  be  assured  in  his  line 
of  march  by  the  insti-uctor,  as  is  prescribed  No.  104.  That  non- 
commissioned officer  will  immediately  take  points  on  the  ground 
as  indicated  in  the  same  number.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of 
elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  conforming  themselves  to  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  line. 

20  {.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  column  left  in  front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


75 


LESSON  SIXTH. 
Article  I. —  To  break  the  company  into  platoon.":,  and  to  reform  the 

company. 


^     j 

ii     MIL    «■& 


□ 

ID 


^ --r 


4 


J    D 


J 


HI 


^  IP 


P" 


D^ 


I  HI 


3  ^ 

J    0 

i 

r 


To  break  the  company  into  platoons. 

265.  The  c-ompany  marching  in  the  eadeneed  step,  and  suppoecd 
td'make  part  of  a  coliunn,  right  in  front,  Avhen  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  break  b}-  platoon,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the 
captain,  who  will  command  :  1.  Break  into  platoons,  and  immedi- 
ately place  himself  before  the  center  of  the  first  platoon. 

266.  At  the  command  break  into  platoons,  the  first  lieutenant  will 
pass  quickly  around  the  left  to  the  center  of  hisplantoou,  and  give 
the  caution  :  Mark  time. 

267.  The  captain  will  then  command:    2.  March. 

268.  The  first  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward ; 
the  covering  sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to  the  left  flank  of  this 
platoon  (pa.ssing  by  the  front  rank)  as  soon  as  the  flank  shall  be 
disengaged. 

269.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain,  the  second 
platoon  will  begin  to  mark  time  ;  its  chief  will  immediately  add  : 
1.  Rigfit  oblique.  2.  March.  The  last  command  will  be  given  so 
that  this  platoon  may  commence  obliquing  the  instant  the  rear  rank 
of  the  first  platoon  shall  have  passed.  The  men  will  shorten  the 
step  in'  obliquing,  so  that  when  the  command  forvard  march  is 
given,  the  platoon  may  have  its  exact  distance. 

270.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  being  near  the  direction  of 
the  guide  of  the  first,  the  chief  of  the  second  will  command  For- 
ward, and  add  March,  the  instant  that  the  guide  of  his  platoon 
shall  cover  the  guide  of  the  first. 

271.  In  a  column,  lefl  in  front,  the  company  will  break  into  pla- 
toons by  inverse  means,  applying  to  the  first  platoon'  all  that  haa 
been  proscribed  for  the  second,  and  reciprocally. 

272.  In  this  case,  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will  shif\  to  the 


76  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


right  flank  of  the  second  phitoon,  and  the  covering  sergeant  will 
remain  on  the  right  of  the  first. 

To  re-fonn  the  company. 

273.  The  cohimn,  by  platoon,  being  in  march,  right  in  fi-ont, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  form  company,  he  will 
give  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  :  Form  company. 

274.  Having  given  this  command,  the  captain  will  immediately 
add:  1.  First  platoon.     2.  Right  oblique. 

275.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  caution  it  to  continue 
to  march  straight  forward. 

276.  The  captain  will  then  command  :  3.  March. 

277.  At  this  command,  repeated  by  the  chief  of  the  second,  the 
first  platoon  will  oblique  to  the  right,  in  order  to  unmask  the  sec- 
ond ;  the  covering  sergeant,  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  will  re- 
turn to  the  right  of  the  company,  passing  by  the  front  rank. 

278.  When  the  first  platoon  shall  have  neai-ly  unmasked  the  sec- 
ond, the  captain  will  command  :  1.  Mark  time,  and  at  the  instant 
the  unmasking  shall  be  complete,  he  will  add :  2.  March.  The 
first  platoon  will  then  cease  to  oblique,  and  mark  time. 

279.  In  the  mean  time  the  second  platoon  will  have  continued  to 
march  straight  forward,  and  when  it  shall  be  nearly  up  with  the 
first,  the  captain  will  command  Forward,  and  at  the  instant  the  two 
platoons  shall  unite,  add  March  ;  the  first  platoon  will  then  cease 
to  mark  time. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  same  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  inverse  means,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  giving  the 
command  Forward,  and  the  captain  adding  4he  command  March, 
when  the  platoons  are  united. 

281.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  its  right,  will  pass  to 
its  left  flank  the  moment  the  platoons  begin  to  oblique ;  the  guide 
of  the  first,  on  its  right,  remaining  on  that  flank  of  the  platoon. 

282.  The  instructor  will  also  sometimes  cause  the  company  to 
break  and  reform,  by  platoon,  by  his  own  direct  commands.  In 
this  case,  he  will  give  the  general  commands  prescribed  for  the 
captain  above:  1.  Break  into  platoons;  2.  March;  and  1.  Form 
company;  2.  March. 

283.  If,  in  breaking  the  company  into  platoons,  the  subdivision 
that  breaks  oft'  should  mark  time  too  long,  it  might,  in  a  column 
of  many  subdivisions,  arrest  the  march  of  the  following  one, 
which  would  cause  a  lengthening  of  the  column,  and  a  loss  of 
distances. 

284.  In  bi-eaking  into  platoons,  it  is  necessary  that  the  platoons 
which  oblique  should  not  shorten  the  step  too  much,  in  order  not 
to  lose  distance  in  column,  and  not  to  arrest  the  march  of  the  fol- 
lowing subdivision. 

285.  If  a  platoon  obliques  too  far  to  a  flank,  it  would  be  obliged 
to  oblique  again  to  the  opposite  flank,  to  regain  the  direction,  and 
by  the  double  movement  arrest,  probably,  the  march  of  the  follow- 
ing subdivision. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPAN'Y. 


77 


286.  Tho  chiefs  of  those  platoons  which  oblique  will  face  to 
their  platoons,  in  order  to  enforce  the  observance  of  the  foregoing 
principles. 

287.  When,  in  a  column  of  several  coinj)anic8,'  they  break  in 
succession,  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance  that  each  company 
should  continue  to  march  in  the  same  step,  without  shorten- 
ing or  slackening,  whilst  that  which  precedes  breaks,  although  the 
following  company  shouUl  close  up  on  the  preceding  one.  This 
attention  is  essential  to  guard  against  an  elongation  of  the  column. 

288.  Faults  of  but  little  moment,  in  a  column  of  a  few  compa- 
nies, would  be  serious  inconveniences  in  a  genei'al  column  of  many 
battalions.  Hence  tho  instructor  will  give  the  greatest  care  in 
causing  all  the  prescribed  principles  to  be  strictly  observed.  To 
this  end,  he  will  hold  himself  on  the  directing  flank,  the  better  to 
observe  all  the  movements. 

Article  II. — Behig  in  cohimn,  to  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause 
them  to  re-enter  into  line. 
beinir 


289.  The  company  ueing  m 
march,  and  supposed  to  consti- 
tute a  subdivision  of  a  column, 
right  (or  left)  in  front,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause 
files  to  break  off  he  will  give 
the  order  to  tho  captain,  who 
will  immediately  turn  to  his 
company,  and  command : 

I.    Two  files  from,  left  {or  right) 
to  rear.     2.  March. 

290.  At  the  command  march, 
the  two  files  on  the  left  (or 
right)  of  the  company,  will 
mark  time,  the  others  will  con- 
tinue to  march  straight  for- 
ward ;  the  two  rear  rank  men 
of  these  files  will,  as  soon  as 
the  roar  rank  of  tho  company 
shall  clear  them,  movo  to  the 
right  by  advancing  tho  outer 
shoulder;  the  odd  number  will 
place  himself  behind  the  thir<l 
file  from  that  flank,  the  even 
number  behind  the  fourth, y)asH- 
ing  for  this  purpose  behind  the 
odd  numbor ;  the  two  front  rank 
men  will,  in  like  manner,  move 
to  the  right  when  tho  roar  rank 
of  the  company  sliall  clear 
them,    the    odd    number    will 


i 


TT 
XX 


n 

TT. 


B    m     on 


TTT 


I... I.  I.I  ;  n 


TT 


"a 


78  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

place  himself  behind  the  first  file,  the  even  number  behind 
the  second  file,  passing  for  this  purpose  behind  the  odd  num- 
ber. If  the  files  are  broken  from  the  right,  the  men  will 
move  to  the  left,-  advancing  the  outer  shoulder,  the  even  number 
of  the  rear  rank  will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file,  the  odd 
number  of  the  same  rank  behind  the  fourth  ;  the  even  number  of 
the  front  rank  behind  the  first  file,  the  odd  number  of  the  same 
rank  behind  the  sec<3nd,  the  odd  numbers  for  this  purpose  passing 
behind  the  even  numbers.  The  men  will  be  careful  not  to  lose 
their  distances  and  to  keep  aligned. 

291.  If  the  instructor  should  still  wish  to  break  two  tiles  from 
the  same  side,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  pro- 
ceed as  above  directed. 

292.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain,  the  files 
already  broken,  advancing  a  little  the  outer  shoulder,  will  gain  the 
space  of  two  files  to  the  right,  if  the  files  are  broken  from  the  left, 
and  to  the  left,  if  the  files  are  broken  from  the  right,  shortening, 
at  the  same  time,  the  step,  in  order  to  make  room  between  them- 
selves and  the  reai*  rank  of  the  company  for  the  files  last  ordered 
to  the  rear;  the  latter  will  break  by  the  same  commands  and  in 
the  same  manner  as  the  first.  The  men  who  double  should 
increase  the  length  of  the  step  in  order  to  prevent  distances  from 
being  lost. 

293.  The  instructor  may  thus  diminish  the  front  of  a  company 
by  breaking  otf  successive  groups  of  two  files,  but  the  new  files 
must  always  be  broken  from  th'e  same  side. 

294.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  files  broken  otf  to  return 
into  line,  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  immediately 
command  : 

1.   Two  files  into  line.     2.  March. 

295.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  files  of  those  marching 
by  the  flank  will  return  briskly  into  line,  and  the  others  will  gain 
the  space  of  two  files  by  advancing  the  inner  shoulder  towards  the 
flank  to  which  they  belong. 

296.  The  captain  will  turn  to  his  company,  to  watch  the  observ- 
ance.of  the  principles  which  have  just  been  2>rascribed. 

297.  The  instructor  having  caused  groups  of  two  files  to  break 
one  after  another,-  and  to  return  again  into  line,  will  afterwards 
cause  two  or  three  groups  to  break  together,  and  for  this  purpose, 
will  command  :  Four  or  six  files  from  left  (or  iight)  to  rear;  March.  •" 
The  files  designated  will  mark  time ;  each  rank  Avill  advance  a 
little  the  outer  shoulder  as  soon  as  the  rear  rank  of  the  company 
shall  cleai"  it,  will  oblique  at  once,  and  each  greirp  will  place  itself 
behind  the  four  neighboring  files,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as  if 
the  movement  had  been  executed  group  by  group,  taking  care  that 
the  distances  are  preserved. 

298.  The  instructor  will  next  order  the  captain  to  cause  two  or 
three  groups  to  be  brought  into  line  at  once,  who  turning  to  the 
company,  will  command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  79 

Four  or  six  file  into  line — March. 

299.  At  the  commiind  march,  the  files  desiifnated  will  advanc-e 
the  inner  slioulder,  move  up  and  form  on  the  flank  ol'  the  com- 
pany by  the  shortest  lines. 

300.  As  often  as  files  nhall  break  oft'  to  the  rear,  the  guide  on 
that  flank  will  gradually  close  on  the  nearest  front  rank  man 
remaining  in  line,  and  ho  will  also  open  out  to  make  room  for  files 
ordered  into  line. 

301.  The  files  which  march  in  the  rear  are  disposed  in  the  fol- 
lowing order  :  the  left  files  as  if  the  company  was  marching  bj'  the 
right  flank,  and  the  right  files  a.s  if  the  com])any  was  marching 
by  the  loft  flank.  Consequently,  whenever  there  is  on  the  right 
or  left  of  a  subdivision,  a  file  wliich  does  not  belong  to  a  group,  it 
will  be  broken  singly. 

I  302.  It  is  necessary  to  the  ]>rcservation  of  distances  in  column 
that  the  men  should  be  habituated  in  the  schools  of  detail  to  exe- 
cute the  movements  of  this  ai'ticle  with  precision. 

303.  If  ntw  files  broken  oft"  do  not  step  well  to  the  left  or  right 
in  obliquing  ;  if,  when  files  are  ordered  into  line,  they  do  not  move 
up  with  promptitude  and  precision,  in  either  case  the  following 
files  will  be  arrested  in  their  march,  and  thereby  cause  the  column 
to  be  lengthened  out. 

304.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  flank  from  which 
the  files  are  broken,  to  assure  himself  of  the  exact  observance  of 
the  principles. 

305.  File^  will  only  be  broken  off  from  the  side  of  direction, 
in  order  that  the  whole  company  may  easily  pasw  from  the  front 
to  the  flank  march. 

Article  III. —  To  nwrch  the  column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the  move- 
ments in/iiJent  thereto. 

30G.  The  swiftness  of  the  route  step  will  be  one  hundred  and 
ten  8t<jp8  in  a  minute ;  this  swiftness  will  bo  habitually  maintained 
in  columns  in  route,  when  the  roads  and  ground  may  permit. 

307.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  constitute  a 
subdivision  of  a  column,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it 
to  march  in  the  route  st<^p  ho  will  command  : 

1.   Column,  fonivjrd.      2.   GMiJc  left  (or  right.)     3.  Route  step. 

4.  March. 

308.  At  the  command  march.,  repeated  by  the  captain,  the  two 
ranks  will  step  off  together;  the  rear  rank  will  take,  in  mai-ching, 
by  shortening  a  few  steps,  a  distance  of  one  pace  (twenty-eight 
inches)  from  the  rank  preceding,  which  distance  will  be  computed 
from  the  brcaHt,s  of  the  men  in  the  rear  i-ank,  to  the  knapsacks  of 
the  men  in  the  fi*ont  lank.  The  men,  without  further  command, 
will  immediately  carry  their  arms  at  uill,  as  indicated  in  the 
School  of  the  Soldier,  No.  219.  They  will  no  longer  bo  required 
to  maCt-ch  in  the  cadenced  pace,  or  with  the  same  foot,  or  to  remain 


80  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

silent.  The  files  will  Biarcli  at  ease ;  but  care  will  be  taken  to 
prevent  the  ranks  from  intermixing,  the  front  rank  from  getting 
in  advance  of  the  guide,  and  the  rear  rank  from  opening  to  too 
great  a  distance. 

309.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  the  instructor 
w^ill  cause  it  to  change  direction,  which  will  be  executed  without 
formal  commands,  on  a  simple  caution  from  the  captain  ;  the  rear 
rank  will  come  up  to  change  direction  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
front  rank.  Each  rank  will  conform  itself,  although  in  the  route 
ste}),  to  the  principles  which  have  been  prescribed  for  the  change 
in  closed  ranks,  with  this  difference  only,  that  the  pivot  man,  in- 
stead of  taking  steps  of  nine,  will  take  ste^js  of  fourteen  inches, 
in  order  to  clear  tlie  wheeling  point. 

310.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  to  cause  it  to 
pass  to  the  cadenced  step,  the  instructor  will  first  order  pieces 
to  be  brought  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  then  command  : 

1.  Quick  time.    2.  March. 

311.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  will  resume  the  cadenced 
step,  and  w^ill  close  so  as  to  leave  a  distance  of  sixteen  inches  be- 
tween each  rank. 

312.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  pace,  the  instruc- 
tor, to  cause  it  to  take  the  route  step  will  command  : 

1.  Route  step.    2.  March. 

313.  At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  will  continue  the 
step  of  twenty-eight  inches;  the  rear  rank  will  take,  by  gradually 
shortening  the  step,  the  distance  of  twenty-eight  inches  from  the 
front  rank  ;  the  men  will  carry  their  arms  at  will. 

314.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  the  route  step,  and  the  in- 
structor should  suppose  the  necessity  of  marching  by  the  flank  in 
the  same  direction,  he  will  command  ; 

1.  Company  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank.     2.   By  file  left  (or  right.) 

3.  March. 

315.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right 
(or  left)  in  marching,  the  captain  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of 
the  guide  who  conducts  the  leading  flank;  this  guide  will  wheel 
immediately  to  the 'left  or  right ;  all  the  files  will  come  in  succes- 
sion to  wheel  on  the  same  spot  as  the  guide  ;  if  there  be  files  bro- 
ken off"  to  the  rear,  they  will,  by  wheeling,  regain  their  respective 
places,  and  follow  the  movement  of  the  company. 

316.  The  instructor  having  caused  the  company  to  be  again 
formed  into  lino,  will  exercise  it  in  increasing  and  diminishing 
front,  by  platoon,  which  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands 
and  the  same  means,  as  if  the  company  were  marching  in  the  ca- 
denced step.  When  the  company  breaks  into  platoons,  the  chief 
of  each  will  move  to  the  flank  of  his  platoon,  and  will  take  the 
place  of  the  guide,  who  will  step  back  into  the  rear  rank. 

317.  The  company  being  in  column  by  platoon,  and  supposed  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  81 

inarch  in  the  route  Btep,  the  instructor  pan  cause  the  front  to  be 
diminished  and  increased,  by  section,  if  the  platoons  have  a.-front 
of  twelve  files  or  more. 

318.  The  movenieuts  of  diminishing  and  increasiug  front,  by 
section,  will  be  executed  according  to  tlie  principles  indicated  for 
the  same  movements  by  platoon.  The  right  sections  of  platoons 
will  be  commanded  by  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant,  respectively; 
the  left  sections  by  the  two  next  su,balterns  in  rank,  or,  in  their 
absence,  by  sergeants. 

319.  The  instructor  wishing  to  diminish  by  section,  will  give  the 
order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.  Break  into  sections.     2.  March. 

320.  As  soon  aa  the  platoons  shall  bo  broken,  each  chief  of  sec- 
tion will  place  himself  on  its  directing  flank  in  the  front  rank  ; 
the  guides  who  will  be  thus  displaced,  will  fall  back  into  the  rear 
rank  ;  the  file  closers  will  close  up  to  within  one  pace  of  this  rank. 

321.  Platoons  will  be  broken  into  sections  only  in  the  column  in 
route  ;  the  movement  will  never  be  executed  in  the  manoeuvres, 
whatever  may  be  the  front  of  the  company. 

322.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  reform  platoons,  he  will 
give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.  Form  2-)lntoons.     2.  March. 

323.  At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  sections  will  place  him- 
self before  its  center,  and  the  guides  will  pass  into  the  front  rank. 
At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  has 
been  prescribed  for  forming  company.  The  moment  the  platoons 
are  formed,  the  chiefs  of  the  left  sections  will  return  to  their  places 
as  file  closers. 

324.  The  instructor  will  also  cauSe  to  be  executed  the  diminish- 
ing and  increasing  front  by  tiles,  as  prescribed  in  the  precedin 
article,  and  in  the  same  manner,  as  if  marching  in  the  cadence 
step.  When  the  company  is  broken  into  sections,  the  subdivisions 
must  not  be  reduced  to  a  front  of  less  than  six  files,  not  counting 
the  chief  of  the  section. 

325.  The  company  being  broken  by  platoon  or  by  section,  the 
instructor  will  cause  it,  marching  in  the  route  step,  to  mai-ch  by 
the  flank  in  the  same  direction,  b}'  the  commands  and  the  means 
indicated,  Nos.  314  and  315.  The  moment  the  subdivisions  shall 
face  to  the  right  (or  left,)  the  first  file  of  each  will  wheel  to  the  left 
(or  right.)  in  marching,  to  prolong  the  direction,  and  to  unite  with 
the  rear  file  of  the  subdivision  immediately  preceding.  The  file 
closers  will  take  their  habitual  'plat^es  in  the  march  by  the  flank, 
before  the  union  of  the  subdivisions. 

32f).  If  the  company  bo  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  the 
instructor  should  wish  to  undouble  the  files,  which  might  some- 
times be  found  necessary,  he  will  inform  the  captain,  who,  aftor 
causing  the  cadenced  step  to  be  resumed,  and  arms  tojbe  shoul- 
derod  or  supported,  will  command  : 
6 


82  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

1.  In  two  rankSyUndouble  files.     2.  March. 

327/ At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers  will  continue  to 
inarch  straight  forward,  the  even  numbers  will  shorten  the  step, 
and  obliquing  to  the  left  will  place  themselves  promptly  behind 
the  odd  numbers ;  the  rear  rank  will  gain  a  step  to  the  left,  so  as 
to  retake  the  touch  of  elbows  on  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 

228.  If  the  company  be  marching  hy  the  left  flank,  it  will  be  the 
even  numbers  who  will  continue  to  march  forward,  and  the  odd 
numbers  who  will  undouble. 

329.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  double  the  files,  he  will 
give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command  : 

1.  In  four  ranks,  double  files.     2.  March. 

330.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  will  double  in  the  manner 
as  explained,  when  the  company  faces  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank. 
The  instructor  will  afterwards  cause  the  route  step  to  be  resumed. 

331.  The  various  movements  prescribed  in  this  lesson  may  be 
executed  in  double  quick  time.  The  men  will  be  brought,  by  de- 
grees, to  pass  over  at  this  gait  about  eleven  hundred  yards  in  seven 
minutes. 

332.  When  the  company  marching  in  the  route  step  shall  halt, 
the  rear  rank  will  close  up  at  the  command  fuilf,  and  the  whole 
will  shoulder  arms. 

333.  Marching  in  the  route  step,  the  men  will  be  permitted  to 
carry  their  pieces  in  the  manner  they  shall  find  most  convenient, 
paying  attention  only  to  holding  the  muzzles  up,  so  as  to  avoid  ac- 
cidents. 

Article  IV. —  Countermarch. 

334.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to  constitute 
part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
fjause  it  to  countermarch,  he  will  command  : 

(- 

1.  Countermarch.     2.  Company,  right — Face.     3.  By  file  left. 
4.  March. 

335.  At  the  second  command  the  company  will  face  to  the  right, 
the  two  guides  to  the  right  about ;  the  captain  will  go  to  the  right 
of  his  company  and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  then 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man,  to  conduct  him. 

336.  At  the  command  m.arch,  both  guides  will  stand  fast;  the 
company  will  step  off"  smartly;  the  first  file  conducted  by  the  cap- 
tain, will  wheel  around  the  right  guide,  and  direct  its  march  along 
the  front  rank  so  as  to  arrive  behind,  and  two  paces  fi'om  the  left 
guide;  each  file  will  come  in  sufccession  to  wheel  on  the  same 
ground  around  the  right  guide  •  the  leading  file  having  arrived  at 
A  point  opposite  to  the  left  guide,  the  captain  will  command: 

1.  Company.    2.  Halt.     3.  Front.    4.  Jiight — Dress. 

337.  The  first  command  will  be  given  at  four  paces  from  the 
joint  where  the  leading  file  is  to  rest. 


SCHOOL  o^  tSe  cOm^a^y". 


83 


338.  At  tho  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 

339.  At  tho  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front.' 

340.  At  the  I'ourth,  the  company  will  dress  by  the  right ;  the 
captain  will  step  two  paces  outRide  of  the  left  .i^uide,  now  on  the 
right,  and  direct  the  alignment,  eo  that  the  front  rank  may  be  en- 
closed between  the  two  guides  ;  the  company  being  aligned,  he 
will  command  Front,  and  place  himself  before  tho  center  of  the 
compaily  as  if  in  column  ;  the  guides,  passing  along  the  front 
rank,  will  shift  to  their  proper  places,  on  the  right  and  left  of  that 
rank. 

341.  In  a  column,  by  platoon,  the  countern\arch  will  bo  executed 
by  the  same  commands,  and  according  to  the  same  principles  ;  the 
guide  of  each  platoon  will  face  about,  and  its  chief  will  place  him- 
self by  the  side  of  the  file  on  the  right,  to  conduct  it. 

342.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  countermarch  Avill  be  exe- 
cuted by  inverse  commands  and  means,  but  according  to  the  same 
principles.  Thus,  the  movement  will  be  made  by  the  right  flank 
of  subdivisions,  if  the  right  be  in  front,  and  by  the  left  flank,  if 
the  left  be  in  front;  in  both  cases  the  subdivisions  will  wheel  by 
file  to  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 

Article  V. — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right  (or 
left)  into  line  of  battle. 


IB 


i 


•9: 


<HD 


d 


D 


C! 


343.  The  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  being  in  march,  the 
instructor,  wishing  to  form  it  on  the  right  into  lino  of  battle,  will 
command  : 

1.   On  the  right  into  line.     2.   Guide  right. 

344.  At  tlio  second  command,  tlic  guide  of  each  platoon  will 
ahifl  quickly  to  its  right  flank,  and  the  men  will  touch  elbows  to 
the  right ;  the  column  will  continuo  to  march  straight  forward. 

345.  The  instructor  having  given  tho  second  command,  will 
move  briskly  to  the  po'nt  at  which  the  right  of  the  company  ought 
to  rest  in  line,  and  place  himself  facing  the  point  of  direction  to 
the  left  which  he  will  chooee. 


84  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

346.  The  line  of  battle  ought  to  be  so  chosen  that  the  guide  of 
each  platoon,  after  having  turned  to  the  right,  may  have,  at  least, 
ten  paces  to  take  before  arriving  upon  that  line. 

347.  The  head  of  the  column  being  nearly  opposite  to  the  in- 
structor, the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  command :  1.  Right 
turn ;  and  when  exactly  opposite  to  that  point,  he  will  add  : 

2.  March. 

348.  At  the  command  anarch,  the  first  platoon  will  turn  to  the 
right,  in  conformity  with  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier,  No.  402.  Its  guide  will  so  direct  his  march  as  to 
bring  the  front  rank  man,  next  on  his  left,  opposite  to  the  instruct- 
or ;  the  chief  of  the  platoon  will  march  before  its  center  ;  and 
Avhen  its  guide  shall  be  near  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

349.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant  the 
right  of  the  platoon  shall  arrive  at  the  distance  of  three  paces  from 
the  line  of  battle,  the  platoon  will  halt;  the  files,  not  jet  in  line, 
will  come  up  promptly.  The  guide  will  throw  himself  on  the  line 
of  battle,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  platoon  ;  he 
will  face  to  the  instructor,  who  Avill  align  him  on  the  point  of  di- 
rection to  the  left.  The  chief  of  platoon  having,  at  the  same  time, 
gone  to  the  point  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  will, 
as  soon  as  he  sees  all  the  files  of  the  platoon  in  line,  command  : 

Right — Dress. 

350.  At  this,  the  first  platoon  will  align  itself;  the  front  rank 
man,  who  finds  himself  opposite  to  the  guide,  will  rest  his  breast 
lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  this  guide,  and  the  chief  of  the 
platoon,  from  the  right,  will  direct  the  alignment  on  this  man. 

351.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  for- 
ward, until  its  guide  shall  arrive  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  the 
fii'st ;  it  will  then  turn  to  the  right  at  the  command  of  its  chief,  and 
march  towards  the  line  of  battle,  its  guide  directing  himself  on  the 
left  file  of  the  first  platoon. 

352.  The  guide  having  arrived  at  the  distance  of  three  paces 
from  the  line  of  battle,  this  platoon  will  be  halted,  as  prescribed 
for  the  first;  at  the  instant  it  halts,  its  guide  will  spring  on  the 
line  of  battle,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  platoon, 
and  will  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  instructor. 

353.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing  all  its  files  in  line, 
and  its  guide  established  on  the  direction,  will  command : 

Right — Dress. 

354.  Having  given  this  command,  he  will  return  to  his  place  as 
a  file  closer,  passing  around  the  left ;  the  second  platoon  will  dress 
up  on  the  alignment  of  the  first,  and,  when  established,  the  cap- 
tain will  command : 

Front. 

355.  The  movement  ended,  the  instructor  will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  S5 

Guides — Posts. 

35G.  At  this  (.'ommand,  the  two  guides  will  return  to  their  j)! aces 
in  lino  of  battle. 

357.  A  column,  hy  platoon,  left  in  front,  will  form  on  the  left  into 
line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and,  by  inverse 
means,  applying  to  the  second  platoon  what  is  prescribed  for  thie 
first,  and  reciprocally.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having 
aligned  it,  from  the  point  of  appui,  (the  left,)  will  retire  to  his 
place  as  a  file  closer.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon 
three  paces  behind  the  lino  of  battle,  will  go  to  the  same  point  to 
align  this  platoon,  and  then  command  :  Front.  At  the  command, 
guides — posts,  given  by  the  instructor,  the  captain  will  shift  to  his 
proper  flank,  and  the  guides  take  their  places  in  the  line  of  battle. 

358.  When  the  companies  of  a  regiment  are  to  be  exercised,  at 
the  same  time,  in  the  school  of  the  company,  the  colonel  will  indi- 
cate the  lesson  or  lessons  they  are  severally  to  execute.  The  whole 
will  commence  by  a  bugle  signal,  and  terminate  in  like  manner. 

Formation  of  a  company  from   two  I'anfis  into  single  rani:,  and  re- 

ciprocaUy. 

359.  The  company  being  formed  into  two  ranks,  in  the  manner 
indicated  No.  8,  school  of  the  soldier,  and  supposed  to  make  jiart 
of  a  column,  right  or  left  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish 
to  form  it  into  single  rank,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  one  rank,  form  company.     2.  March, 

360.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  will  face  to  the 
right. 

361.  At  the  conimand  march,  the  right  guide  will  st<?p  off  and 
march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front  rank. 

362.  The  first  file  will  step  ofi"  at  the  same  time  with  the  guide; 
the  front  rank  man  will  turn  to  the  right  at  the  first  step,  follow 
the  guide,  and  be  himself  followed  by  the  rear  rank  man  of  his 
file,  who  will  come  to  turn  on  the  same  spot  where  he  had  turned. 
The  second  file,  and  successivelj'  all  the  other  files,  will  step  oif  as 
has  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  the  front  rank  man  of  each  file 
following  immediately  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  file  next  on  his 
right.  The  captain  will  superintend  the  movement,  and  when  the 
last  man  shall  have  stepped  off,  he  will  halt  the  company,  and  face 
it  to  the  front. 

363.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  places  in  the  line  of  battle, 
two  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  rank. 

364.  The  company'  being  in  single  rank,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.     2.  Company,  right — Face^ 
3.  March. 

365.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right; 
the  right  guide  and  the  man  on  the  right  will  remain  faced  to 
the  front. 


86  SCHOOL  OF  TH^  COMPANY. 

366.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  who  have  faced  to  the 
right,  will  step  off,  and  form  fileB  in  the  following  manner  :  the 
second  man  in  the  rank  will  place  himself  behind  the  first  to  form 
the  first  file ;  the  third  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  first 
in  the  front  rank  ;  the  fourth  behind  the  third  in  the  rear  rank. 
All  the  others  will,  in  like  manner,  place  themselves,  alternately, 
in  the  front  and  rear  rank,  and  will  thus  form  files  of  two  men,  on 
the  left  of  those  already  formed. 

367.  The  formations  above  described  will  be  habitually  executed 
by  the  right  of  companies ;  but  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to 
have  them  executed  by  the  left,  he  will  face  the  company  about, 
and  jjost  the  guides  in  the  rear  rank. 

368.  The  formation  will  then  be  executed  by  the  same  commands 
and  according  to  the  same  principles  as  by  the  front  rank  ;  the  move- 
ment commencing  with  the  left  file,  now  become  the  right,  and  in 
each  file  by  the  rear  rank  man.  now  become  the  front ;  the  left 
guide  will  confoi'm  to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  right. 

369.  The  formation  ended,  the  instructor  will  face  the  company 
to  its  proper  front. 

370.  When  a  battalion  in  line  has  to  execute  either  of  the  for- 
mations above  described,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  break  to  the 
rear  by  the  right  or  left  of  companies,  and  will  then  give  the  com- 
mands just  prescribed  for  the  instructor.  Bach  company  will  ex- 
ecute the  movement  as  if  acting  singly. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four,  and  reciprocally,  at 
a  halt,  and  in  march. 

371.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  at  a  halt,  and 
supposed  to  form  part  of  a  column  right  in  front,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  form  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will  command  : 


1. 


In  four  ranks,  form  company.     2.  Compayiy  left — Face.     3.  Maech 
(or  double  quick — March). 

372.  At  the  second  command,  the  loft  guide  will  remain  faced  to 
the  front,  the  company  will  face  to  the  left ;  the  rear  rank  will  gain 
the  distance  of  one  pace  from  the  front  rank  by  a  side  step  to  the 
left  and  rear,  and  the  men  will  form  into  four  ranks  as  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

373.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four  men  will  reface 
to  the  front  without  imdoubling.  All  the  other  files  of  four  will 
step  off,  and  closing  successively  to  about  five  inches  of  the  prece- 
ding file,  will  halt,  and  immediately  fiice  to  the  front,  the  men  re- 
maining doubled. 

374.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  new  places  in  line  of  battle, 
at  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  fourth  rank. 

375.  The  captain  will  superintend  the  movement. 

376.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when  the  instructor  shall 
wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command : 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY.  87 

1.  In  tico  ranks,  form  company.   2.  Company  right — Face.    3.  Mabch 
(or  double  quick — March). 

377.  At  the  second  command  the  left  guide  will  stand  fast,  the 
company  will  face  to  the  right. 

378.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will  step  off  and 
march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front  rank.  The  leading  file  of 
four  men  will  step  off  at  the  same  time,  the  other  files  standing 
fast;  the  second  file  will  step  off  when  there  shall  be  between  it 
and  the  first  space  sufficient  to  form  into  two  ranks.  The  follow- 
ing files  will  execute  successively  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the 
second.  As  soon  as  the  last  file  shall  have  its  distance,  the  in- 
structor will  command  : 

1.  Company.     2.  Halt.     3.   Front. 

379.  At  the  command /ron^,  the  company  will  face  to  the  front 
and  the  files  will  undouble. 

380.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  and  marching  to 
the  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  four  ranks 
he  will  command  : 

1.  In  four  ranks,  form  company.   2.  By  the  left  double  files.    3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

381 .  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the  left  file  of  the 
company  will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front;  the  com- 
pany will  make  a  half  face  to  the  left,  the  odd  numbers  placing 
themselves  behind  the  even  numbers.  The  even  numbers  of  the 
rear  rank  will  shorten  their  steps  a  little,  to  permit  the  odd  num- 
bers of  the  front  rank  to  get  between  them  and  the  even  numbers 
of  that  rank.  The  files  thus  formed  of  fours,  except  the  left  file, 
will  continue  to  march  obliquely,  lengthening  their  steps  slightly, 
80  as  to  keep  constantly  abreast  of  the  guide ;  each  file  will  close 
successively  on  the  file  next  on  its  left,  and  when  at  the  proper 
distance  from  that  file,  will  face  to  the  front  by  a  half  face  to  the 
right,  and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 

382.  The  company  being  in  march  to  the  front  in  four  ranks, 
when  the  instructr)r  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.     2.  By  thr  right,  undouble  files.     3. 
March  (or  double  quick  March). 

383.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the  left  file  of  the 
company  will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front;  the  com- 

f)any  will  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  and  march  obliquely, 
engthcning  the  step  a  little,  in  order  to  keep,  as  near  as  possible, 
abreast  of  the  guide.  As  soon  as  the  second  file  from  the  left  shall 
have  gained  to  the  right  the  interval  necessary  for  the  left  file  to 
form  into  two  ranks,  the  second  file  will  face  to  the  front  by  a  half 
face  to  the  left  and  march  straight  forward  ;  the  left  file  will  im- 
mediatelv  form  into  two  ranks,  and  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 


88  SCHOOL  OF  ;?HE  COMPANY. 

the  left.  Bach  file  will  execute  successively,  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  file  next  to  the  left,  and  each  file  will  form  into 
two  ranks  when  the  file  next  on  its  right  has  obliqued  the  required 
distance  and  faced  to  the  front. 

384.  If  the  company  be  supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  left 
in  front,  these  different  movements  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means,  substituting  the  indica- 
tion left  for  right.  \^^ 

END  OF  THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY.  , 


y  ■ 


-ttii  li 


HARDEE'S  TACTICS. 


VOL.   II. 


SCHOOL     OF     THE     BATTALION- 


T')/T  m'imf^ 


.iIOT 


*  '■»'*! 


RIFLE  AND  LIGHT  INFANTRY  TACTICS. 


TITLE  FOUETH. 


SCHOOL      OF      THE      BATTALION. 


Formation  of  the  Battalion. 

*  1.  Every  colonel  will  labor  to  habituate  his  battalion  to  form 
line  of  battle,  by  night  as  Avell  as  by  day,  with  the  greatest  posai- 
ble  proratitude. 

2.  The  color-company  will  generally  be  designated  as  the  di- 
recting company.  That,  as  soon  as  formed,  will  be  placed  on  the 
direction  the  colonel  may  have  determined  for  the  line  of  battle.  The 
other  companies  will  form  on  it,  to  the  right  and  left,  on  the  prin- 
ciples of  successive  formations  which  will  be  herein  prescribed. 

3.  The  color-bearer  may  have  received  the  color  from  the  hands 
of  the  colonel ;  but  if  there  be  daylight,  and  time,  the  color  will 
be  produced  with  due  solemnity.  ' 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color-escort. 

4.  When  the  battalion  turns  out  under  arms,  and  the  color  is 
wanted,  a  company,  other  than  that  of  the  color,  will  ,be  put  in 
march  to  receive  and  escort  it. 

5.  The  march  will  be  in  the  following  order,  in  quick  time,  and 
without  music  :  the  field  music,  followed  by  the  band;  the  escort  in 
column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  with  arms  on  the  right  shoulder 
and  the  color-bearer  between  the  platoons. 

6.  Arrived  in  front  of  the  tent  or  quarters  of  the  colonel,  the  ee- 
oort  will  form  line,  the  field  music  and  band  on  the  right,  and 
armsVill  be  brought  to  a  shoulder. 

7.  The  moment  the  escort  is  in  line,  the  color-bearer,  preceded 
by  the  first  lieutenant,  and  followed  by  a  sergeant  of  the  escort, 
will  go  to  receive  the  color. 

8.  When  the  color-bearer  shall  come  out,  followed  by  tlie  lieu- 
tenant and  sergeant,  he  will  halt  before  the  entrance;  the  t«c*rt 
will  present  arms,  and  the  field  music  will  sound  to  the  color. 

9.  AfLcr  some  twont}-  seconds,  the  captain  will  cause  the  aound 
to  ooasc,  arms  to  be  shouldered,  and  then  break  by  platoon  into 
column  ;  the  color-bearer  will  place  himself  between  the  platoons, 
and  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant  will  resume  their  posts. 

10.  The  escort  will  march  back  to  the  battalion  to  the  sound  of 
music,  in  quick  time,  and  in  the  same  order  as  above,  the  guide  on 
tho  right.     The  march  will  be  so  conducted  that  when   the  escort 


92  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION. 

,  arrives  at  one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  front  of  the  right  of  the 
the  battalion,  the  direction  of  the  march  will  be  parallel  to 
it8  front,  and  when  the  color  arrives  nearly  opposite  its  place  in 
line,  the  column  will  change  direction  to  the  left,  and  the  right 
guide  will  direct  himself  on  the  center  of  the  battalion. 

Honors  paid  to  the  color. 

11.  Arrived  at  the  distance  of  twenty  paces  from  the  battalion, 
the  escort  will  halt,  and  the  music  cease;  the  colonel  will  place 
himself  six  paces  before  the  center  of  the  battalion,  the  color- 
bearer  will  approach  the  colonel,  by  the  front,  in  quick  time ;  when 
at  the  distance  of  ten  paces,  he  will  halt,  the  colonel  will  cause 
arms  to  be  presented,  and  to  the  color  to  be  sounded,  which  being 
executed,  the  color-bearer  will  take  his  place  in  the  front  rank  of 
the  color-guard,  and  the  battalion,  by  command,  shoulder  arms. 

12.  The  escort,  field  music,  and  band,  will  return  in  quick  time 
to  their  several  places  in  line  of  battle,  marching  by  the  rear  of 
the  battalion. 

13.  The  color  will  be  escorted  back  to  the  colonel's  tent  or  quar- 
ters in  the  above  order.  .  ■■>  ,!■)■,  li 

General  Rules  and  Division  of  the  School  of  the  Battalion.''  .  ■ 

14.  This  school  has  for  its  object  the  instruction  of  battalions 
singly,  and  thus  to  prepare  them  for  manoeuvres  in  line.  The 
harmony  so  indispensable  in  the  movements  of  many  battalions, 
can  only  be  attained  by  the  use  of  the  same  commands,  the  same 
principles,  and  the  same  means  of  execution.  Hence,  all  colonels, 
and  actual  commanders  of  battalions  will  conform  themselves, 
without  addition  or  curtailment,  to  what  will  herein  be  prescribed. 

15.  When  a  battalion  instructed  in  this  drill  shall  manoeuvre  in 
line,  the  colonel  will  regulate  its  movements,  as  prescribed  in  the 
third  volume  of  the  Tactics  for  heavy  infantry.  '  '^^ 

16.  The  school  of  the  battalion  will  be  divided  into  five  parts.'  " 

17.  The  first  will  comprehend  opening  and  closing  ranks,  and 
the  execution  of  the  different  fires. 

18.  The  second,  the  different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order 
in  battle,  to  the  order  in  column. 

19.  The  third,  the  march  in  column,  and  the  other  movements 
incident  thereto. 

20.  The  fourth,  the  different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order  in 
column  to  the  order  in  battle. 

21.  The  fifth  will  comprehend  the  march  in  line  of  battle,  in 
advance  and  in  retreat;  the  passage  of  defiles  in  retreat;  the 
march  by  the  flank ;  the  formation  by  file  into  line  of  battle  ;  the 
change  of  front ;  the  column  doubled  on  the  center ;  dispositions 
against  cavaby ;  the  rally,  and  rules  for  manoeuvring  by  thp  i:ear 
rank,  ':y' ^*" 


ri 


tn 


.•>•;,  '^rf/* 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION.  93 


PAET     FIRST. 

Opening  and  dosing  ranks,  and  the  execution  of  the  different  fires. 
Article  I. — To  open  and  close  ra7iks. 

22.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  ranks  to  bo  opened,  will  comraandr 

1.  Prepare  to  open  ranks. 

23.  At  this  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  7najor  will  place 
thempclves  on  the  right  of  the  battalion,  the  first  on  the  flank  of 
the  file  closers,  and  the  second  four  paces  from  the  front  rank  of 
the  battalion. 

24.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command : 

2.   To  the  rear,  open  order.     3.  ]\Iarcu. 

25.  At  the  second  command,  the  covering  sergeants,  and  the 
sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion,  will  place  themselves  four 
paces  in  the  rear  of  the  front  rank,  and  opposite  their  places  in 
lino  of  battle,  in  order  to  mark  the  new  alignment  of  the  rear 
rank  ;  they  will  be  aligned  by  the  major  on  the  left  sergeant  of  the 
battalion,  who  Avill  be  careful  to  place  himself  exactly  four  paces 
in  rear  of  the  front  rank,  and  to  hold  his  piece  between  the  eyefl, 
erect  and  inverted,  the  better  to  indicate  to  the  major  the  direction 
tQ  be  given  to  the  covering  sergeants. 

26.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  rear  rank  and  the  file  closers 
will  btep  to  the  rear  without  counting  steps ;  the  men  will  pass  a 
little  in  rear  of  the  line  traced  for  this  rank,  halt,  and  dress  for- 
ward on  the  covering  sergeants,  who  will  align  correctly  the  men 
of  their  respective  companies. 

27.  The  file  closers  will  fall  back  and  preserve  the  distance  of 
two  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  glancing  eyes  to  the  right;  the 
lieutenant-colonel  will  from  the  right,  align  them  on  the  file  closer 
of  the  left,  who.  having  placed  himself  accurately  two  paces  from 
the  rear  rank,  will  invert  his  piece,  and  hold  it  up  erect  between 
his  eyes,  the  better  to  be  seen  b3-  the  lieutenant-colonel. 

28.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  command: 

4.  Front. 
At  this  command,  the   lieutenant  -colonel,   major,  and   the  left 
serjreant,  will  retake  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

29.  The  colonel  will  can-*e  the  ranks  to  bo  closed  by  the  com- 
mands prescribed  for  the  instructor  in  the  School  of  the  Company, 
Jfo.  2P. 

Article  II. — Manual  of  Anns. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  following 
timo-j  .md  pauses  to  be  executed  : 

Present  arnvi.      (tlien)  Shoulder  arms. 

Order  arms.  Shoulder  arm-f. 

Support  arm3.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fir  bayonet.  .  Shoulder  arms. 

Charge  bayonet.      .  Shoulder  arms. 

th.fis.  bavond.  Shoulder  arms. 


94  SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION. 


Article  III. — Loading  at  xoill  and  the  Firings. 

31.  The  colonel  will  next  cause  to  be  executed  loading  at  will, 
by  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Company  No. 
45;  the  officers  and  sergeants  in  the  ranks  will  half  face  to  the 
right  with  the  men  at  the  eighth  time  of  loading,  and  will  face  to 
the  front  when  the  men  next  to  them  come  to  a  shoulder. 

32.  The  colonel  will  cause  to  be  executed  the  fire  by  company, 
the  fire  by  wing,  the  fire  by  battalion,  the  fire  by  file,  and  the  fire 
by  rank,  by  the  commands  to  be  herein  indicated. 

33.  The  fire  by  company  and  the  fire  by  file  will  always  be 
direct ;  the  fire  by  battalion,  the  fire  by  wing,  and  the  fire  by  rank, 
may  be  either  direct  or  oblique. 

34.  When  the  fire  ought  to  be  oblique,  the  colonel  will  give,  at 
every  round,  the  caution  right  (or  left)  oblique,  between  the  oom- 
raands  ready  and  aim. 

35.  The  fire  by  company  will  be  executed  alternately  by  th« 
right  and  left  companies  of  each  division,  as  if  the  division  were- 
alone.  The  right  company  will  fire  fii'st ;  the  ca])tain  of  the  left 
will  not  give  his  first  command  till  he  shall  see  one  or  two  pieces 
at  a  ready  in  the  right  company ;  the  captain  of  the  latter,  after 
the  first  discharge,  will  obsei've  the  same  rule  in  respect  to  the  left 
company ;  and  the  fire  will  thus  be  continued  alternately. 

36.  The  colonel  will  obsei've  the  same  rule  in  the  firing  by  wingv 

37.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  in  all  the  companies  at  once, 
and  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the 
Company  No.  55  and  following.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed 
by  each  rank  alternately,  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the  School  of 
the  Company  No.  58  and  following. 

38.  The  color-guard  will  not  fire,  but  reserve  itself  for  th«- 
defense  of  the  color. 

The  fire  by  company. 

39.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  fire  by  company  to  be  executed, 
will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  company.     2.   Com.mence  firing. 

40.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants 
will  take  the  positions  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company, 
No.  49. 

41.  The  color  and  its  guard  will  step  back  at  the  same  time',  so 
as  to  bring  the  front  rank  of  the  guard  in  a  line  with  the  rear  rank 
of  the  battalion.     This  ride  is  general  for  all  the  different  firings. 

42.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbered  companies  will 
commence  to  fire  ;  their  captains  will  each  give  the  commands 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  50,  observing  to  pre- 
cede the  command  company  by  that  of  first,  third,  fifth,  or  seventh, 
according  to  the  number  of  each. 

43.  The  captains  of  the  even  numbered  companies  will  give,  in 
their  turn,  the  same  commands,  observing  to  precede  them  by  the 
number  of  their  respective  companies. 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION.  95- 

44.  In  order  that  tho  odd  numbered  companies  may  not  all  firo 
at  once,  their  captains  will  observe,  but  only  for  the  first  discharge, 
to  give  the  command  fire  one  after  another  ;  thus,  the  captain  of 
the  third  company  will  not  give  the  command  fire  until  ho  has 
heai'd  the  fire  of  the  first  company;  the  captain  of  the  fifth  will 
observe  the  same  rule  Avith  respect  to  the  third,  and  the  captain  of 
the  seventh  the  same  rule  with  respect  to  the  fifth. 

45.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  fii-e  to  cease  by  the  sound  to  cease- 
firing ;  at  this  sound,  the  men  will  execute  what  is  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  company',  No.  G3 ;  at  the  sound,  for  officere  to 
take  their  places  after  firing,  the  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and 
color-guard,  will  promptly  resume  their  places  in  line  of  battle : 
this  rule  is  general/or  all  the  firings. 

The  fire  by  wing. 

46.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  this  fire  to  be  executed,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Fire  by  iving.     2.  Right  wing.      8.  Ready.      4.  Aim.      5.  Fire. 

6.  Load. 

47.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  wings  to  fire  alternately,  and  he 
will  recommence  the  fire  by  the  commands:  1.  Eight  wing ;  2.  Aim; 
3.  Fire;  4.  Load.  L  Left  wing ;  2.  Aim;  3.  Fire;  4.  Load;  in 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  35. 

The  fire  by  battalion. 

48.  The  colonel  will  cause  this  fire  lo  be  executed  by  the  com- 
mands last  prescribed,  substituting  for  the  first  two,  1.  Fire  by  bat- 
talion.    2.  Battalion. 

The  fire  by  file. 

49.  To  cause  this  to  be  executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 
1.  Fire  by  file.     2.  Battalion.     3.  Ready.      4.  Commence  firing. 

50.  At  the  fonrth  command,  the  fire  will  commence  on  the  right 
of  each  company,  as  proscribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No. 
57.  The  colonel  may,  if  he  thinks  proper,  cause  the  tiro  to  com- 
mence on  the  right  of  each  platoon. 

The  fire  by  rank. 

51.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Fire  by  rank.     2.  Battalion.     3.  Ready.     4.  Rear  rank.     5.  Aiif. 
6.  Fire.     7.  Load. 

52.  This  fire  will  bo  executed  as  has  boon  explained  in  the  school 
of  the  company,  No.  59,  in  following  the  progression  proscribed 
for  the  two  ranks  which  shou'd  fire  alternately. 

To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 
63.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  tho  battalion  to  firo  to  the  rem-, 
he  will  command  : 


96  SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION. 

f>-it\V.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.     2.  Battalion.     3.  About — Face.  '  i 

54.  At  the  fii'st  command,  the  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and 
file  closers  will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  company,  No.  69  ;  the  color-bearer  will  pass  into  the  rear 
rank,  and  for  this  purpose,  the  corporal  of  his  file  will  step  before 
the  corporal  next  on  his  right  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass,  and  will 
then  take  his  place  in  the  front  rank ;  the  lieutenant  colonel,  ad- 
jutant, major,  sergeant  major,  and  the  music  will  place  themselves 
before  the  front  rank,  and  face  to  the  rear,  each  opposite  his  place" 
in  the  line  of  battle — the  first  two  passing  around  the  right,  and 
the  others  around  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

55.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face  about ;  the 
captains  and  covering  sergeants  observing  what  is  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  company,  No.  70. 

.  56.  The  battalion  facing  thus  by  the  rear  rank,  the  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  execute  the  diff'erent  fires  by  the  same  commands  as  if 
it  were  faced  by  the  front  rank. 

57.  The  right  and  left  wings  will  retain  the  same  designations, 
although  faced  about ;  the  companies  also  will  preserve  their 
former  designations,  as  first,  second,  third,  etc. 

58.  The  tire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of  each  company, 
now  become  the  right. 

59.  The  fire  by  rank  will  commence  by  the  front  rank,  now  be- 
come the  rear  Sank.     This  rank  will  preserve  its  denomination. 

60.  The  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  color-guard  will,  at 
the  first  command  given  by  the  colonel,  take  the  places  prescribed 
for  them  in  the  fires,  with  the  front  rank  leading. 

61.  The  colonel,  after  firing  to  the  rear,  wishing  to  face  the  bat- 
talion to  its  i^roper  front,  will  command  : 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.     2.  Battalion.     3.  About — Face, 

62.  At  these  commands,  the  battalion  will  return  to  its  proper 
front  by  the  means  prescribed  Nos.  54  and  55. 

63.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  most  used  in  war,  the  colonel  will 
give  it  the  preference  in  the  preparatory  exercises,  in  order  that 
the  battalion  may  be  brought  to  execute  it  with  the  greatest  possi- 
ble regularity. 

64.  When  the  colonel  may  wish  to  give  some  relaxation  to  the 
battalion,  without  breaking  the  ranks,  he  will  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  Nos.  37  and  38,  or 
Nosv  39  and  40. 

65.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  arms  to  be  stacked,  he 
will  bring  the  battalion  to  ordered  arms,  and  then  command  : 

1.  Stack — Arms.     2.  Break  ranks.     3,  MaSch. 

66.  The  colonel  wishing  the  men  to  return  to  the  ranks,  will 
cause  attention  to  be  sounded,  at  which  the  battalion  will  re-form 
behind  the  stacks  of  arms.  The  sound  being  finished,  the  colonel,, 
after  causing  the  stacks  to  be  broken,  will  command  :  '  ^^ 


SCHOOL   oy   THE   BATTALION.  97 


Battalion. 

67.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  fix  their  attontion,  and  re- 
main immovable. 

PART  SECOND. 

Different  modes  of  passijig  from  the  order  in  battle  to  the  order  in 

column. 
Article  I. —  To  break  to  the  right  or  the  left  into  column. 

68.  Linos  of  hattlo  will  habitually  break  into  column  by  com- 
pany;  tho}^  may  also  break  by  division  or  by  i)latoon. 

61).  It  is  hero  supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes  to  break  by  com- 
pany to  the  riglit ;  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  company,  right  tcheel.      2.  Marcu  (or  double  quick — March). 

70.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  himself  rapid-^*': 
ly  before  the  ccntor  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  that  it  has  to'  '' 
wheel  to  the  right ;  each  covering'  sergeant  will  replace  his  cap- 
tain in  the  front  rank. 

71.  At  the  command  march,  each  captaiR  will  break  to  the  right, 
according  to  the  prinw]iles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company 
No.  173;  each  captain  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed"  ' 
for  the  chiefs  of  platoon  ;  the  left  guide,   as  soon  as  he  can  pass,"  ' 
will  place  himself  on   the   left  of  the   front  rank,^to  cenduct  the 
marching  flank,  and  when  ho  shall   have   approached   near  to  the^   ' 
])erpcndicular,  the  captain  Avill  command:      1.   Such  company.      2.'  " 
Halt. 

72.  At  the  second  command.  whi<'h  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
the  left  guide  shall  be  at  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  per- 
pendicular, the  company  will  halt;  the  guide  will  advance  and 
place  his  left  arm  lightly  against  the  l)reast  of  the  captain,  who 
will  establish  him  wi  the  alignment  of  the  man  M'ho  has  fiiced  to 
the  right ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  correctly  on  the 
alignment  on  the  right t)f  that  man;  which  being  executed,  the 
captain  will  align  his  company  by  the  loft,  command  F'ront,  and 
place  himself  two  paces  before  its  center. 

73.  The  captains  having  conimandod  Front,  the  guides,  althougk 
some  of  them  may  not  be  in  the  direction  of  the  preceding  guides, 
will  stan<l  fast,  in  order  that  the  error  of  a  company  that  has 
wheeled  too  much  or  too  little  may  not  be  projiagatcd  ;  the  guides 
not  in  tlie  direction  will  readily  come  into  it  when  the  column  is 
put  in  march. 

74.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  intd  column  by  com- 
pany to  the  loft,  according  tt)  the  same  principles,  and  by  invorso 
means;  the  covering  sergeant  of  each  company  will  conduct  the 
marching  flank,  and  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of 
the  front  rank  at  the  moment  tlx-  company  halts. 

75.  "When  the  battalion  break.-:,  by  division,  the  indication  divi- 
•non  will  be  substituted  in  the  commands  for  thiit  of  company ;  th« 
chief  of  each  division  (the  senior  captain)  will  conform  himself  to 


98  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION. 

what  is  prescribed  for  the  chief  of  company,  and  will  place  himself 
two  paces  before  the  center  of  his  division  ;  the  junior  captain,  if 
not  already  there,  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the 
two  ccmpanies  in  the  front  rank,  and  be  covered  by  the  covering 
sergeant  of  the  left  company  in  the  rear  rank.  The  right  guide  of 
the  right  company  will  be  the  right  guide,  and  the  left  guide  of 
the  left  company,  the  left  guide  of  the  division. 

76.  When  the  battalion  shall  break  by  platoon  to  the  right  or  to 
the  left,  each  first  lieutenant  will  pass  around  to  the  left  of  his 
company  to  place  himself  in  front  of  the  second  platoon,  and  for 
this  purpose,  each  covering  sergeant,  except  the  one  of  the  right 
company,  will  step,  for  the  moment,  in  rear  of  the  right  file  of  his 
company. 

77.  When  the  battalion  breaks  by  division  to  the  right,  and 
there  is  an  odd  company,  the  captain  of  this  company,  (the  left), 
after  wheeling  into  column,  will  cause  it  to  oblique  to  the  left,  halt 
it  at  company  distance  from  the  preceding  division,  place  his  left 
guide  on  the  direction  of  the  column,  and  then  align  his  company 
by  the  left.  AVhen  the  line  breaks  by  division  to  the  left,  the  odd 
company  will  be  in  front;  its  captain,  having  wheeled  it  into  col- 
umn, will  cause  it  to  oblique  to  the  right,  halt  it  at  division  distance 
from  the  division  next  in  the  rear,  place  his  right  guide  on  the 
direction  of  the  other  guides,  and  align  the  company  by  the  right. 

78.  The  battalion  being  in  column,  the  lieutenant  colonel  and 
major  will  place  themselves  on  the  directing  flank,  the  first  abre«st 
with  the  leading  subdivision,  and  the  other  abreast  with  the  last, 
and  both  six  paces  from  the  flank.  The  adjutant  will  be  near  the 
lieutenant-colonel,  and  the  sergeant-major  near  the  major. 

79.  The  colonel  will  have  no  fixed  place  as  the  instructor  of  his 
battalion  ;  but  in  columns  composed  of  many  battalions,  he  will 
place  himself  habitually  on  the  directing  flank  fifteen  or  twenty 
paces  from  the  guides,  and  abreast  with  the  center  of  his  battalion. 

80.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  move  the  column  forward 
without  halting  it,  he  will  caution  the  battalion  to  that  eftect,  and 
command  : 

1.  By  company^  right  wheel.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

81.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  companies  will  exe- 
cute what  is  prescribed  for  breaking  into  a  column  from  a  halt. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  they  will  remain  in  tront  of  their 
comlfcinies  to  superintend  the  movement;  the  companies  will  wheel 
to  the  right  on  fixed  pivots  as  indicated  in  the  School  of  the  Com- 
pany No.  185 ;  the  lett  guides  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
above  ;  when  they  shall  arrive  near  the  perpendicular,  the  colonel 
will  command  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.   Q-uide  left. 

83.  At  the  third  command,  each  covering  sergeant  will  place 
himself  by  the  right  side  of  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank 
of  his  company.     At  the  fourth  command,  which  will  be  given  at 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION. 


99 


the  instant  the  wheel  is  coinplctod,  the  companies  will  cease  to 
wheel  and  march  Ptraight  forward.  At  the  fitlli,  the  men  will  take 
the  toiich  of  elbows  to  the  left.  The  leadiiiiu;;  guide  will  march  in 
the  direction  indicated  to  him  by  the  lieutenant-colonel.  Th* 
guides  will  immediately  conform  themselves  to  the  principles  of 
the  march  in  column,  School  of  the  Company  No.  200,  and  fol- 
lowing. 

84.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  line  of  battle,  the  colonel 
will  cause  it  to  wheel  to  the  right  or  left,  by  the  same  commands 
and  the  same  means;  but  he  should  previous]}'  caution  the  battal- 
ion that  it  is  to  continue  the  march. 

85.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  into  column  by 
company  to  the  left,  according  to  the  same  principles,  by  inverse 
means;  the  covering  sergeant  of  each  company  will  conduct  the 
marching  flank,  and  the  left  guides  will  ])lace  themselves  on  the 
left  of  their  respective  companies  at  the  command  forward. 

86.  When  a  battalion  has  to  prolong  itself  in  column  towards 
the  right  or  left,  or  has  to  direct  its  march  in  column  perpendicu- 
larly or  diagonally  in  front,  or  in  rear  of  either  flank,  the  colonel 
will  cause  it  to  break  by  company  to  the  right  or  left,  as  has  just 
been  prescribed  ;  but  when  the  line  breaks  to  the  rij^ht.  in  6rder 
to  march  towards  the  left,  or  the  reverse,  the  colontd  will  com- 
mand :  Break  to  the  right  to  march  to  the  left,  or  break  to  the  left  to 
march  4o  the  right,  before  giving  the  command,  hy  company,  right  (or 
left)  xihecl.  As  soon  as  the  battalion  is  broken,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  will  place  a  marker  abreast  with  the  right  guide  of  the 
leading  company.  The  instant  the  column  is  put  in  motion,  ^his 
company  will  wheel  to  the  left  (or  right)  march  ten  paces  to  the 
front  without  changing  the  guide,  and  wheel  again  to  the  left  (or 
right).  The  second  wheel  being  completed,  the  captain  will  imme- 
diately command  guide  left  (or  right.)  The  guide  of  this  company 
will  march  in  a  dire<;tion  parallel  to  the  guides  of  the  column. 
The  licutcnant-colonid  will  be  careful  to  place  a  second  marker  at 
tUo  point  where  the  first  company  is  to  change  direction  the 
second  time. 

Arttclk  ir. —  To  break  to  the  rear,  hy  the  right  or  left,  into  column, 
and  to  advance  or  retire  by  t/ie  rigfU  or  Left  of  companies. 


i 


100  SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION. 

87.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  the  battalion  to  break 
to  the  rear,  bj  the  right,  into  coluinn.  by  company,  he  will 
command:  '  •,:\'''"''^'^^  ^'^  ""■"■' ^  ' 

1.   JBy  the  right  of  companies  to  the' rear  inio' column.     2.  Battalion 
right — Face.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

88.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  himself  before 
the  center  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right;  the 
covering  sergeants  will  step  into  the  front  rank. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  right; 
each  captain  will  hasten  to  the  right  of  the  company,  and  break 
two  files  to  the  rear ;  the  first  file  will  break  the  whole  depth  of 
the  two  ranks;  the  second  file  less;  which  being  executed,  the 
captain  will  place  himself  so  that  his  breast  ma}'  touch  lightly  the 
left  arm  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  last  file  in  the  company  next 
on  the  right  of  his  own.  The  captain  of  the  right  company  will 
place  himself  as  if  there  were  a  company  on  his  right,  and  will 
align  himself  on  the  other  captains.  The  covering  sergeant  of 
each  company  will  break  to  the  rear  with  the  right  files,  and  place 
himself  before  the  front  rank  of  the  first  file,  to  conduct  him. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  each  company  will 
wheel  to  the  right ;  the  covering  sergeant,  placed  before  this  file, 
will  conduct  it  perpendicularly  to  the  rear.  The  other  files  will 
come  successively  to  wheel  on  the  same  spot.  The  captains  will 
stand  fast,  sec  their  companies  file  past,  and  at  the  instant  thelkst 
file  shall  have  wheeled,  each  captain  will  command : 

'^X^  Such  company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.     4.  Xe/f— Dress. 

91.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front,  its  left  guide 
Avill  place  himself  so  that  his  left  arm  may  touch  lightly  the  breast 
of  his  captain. 

92.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  company  will  align  itself  on  its 
left  guide,  .the  captain  so  directing  it,  that  the  new  alignment  may 
be  perpendicular  to  that  which  the  company  had  occupied  in  line 
of  battle,  and,  the  better  to  judge  this,  he  will  step  back  two  paces  )• 
from  the  flank. 

93.  The   company  being  aligned,  the   captain    will  command :,j;^ 
Front,  and  take  his  place  before  its  center. 

94.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  break  into  column  by  company,  to  the  rear,  by  the 
right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  rear  into  column.     2.  Battalion,  by 
the  right  flank.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

95.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  step  briskly  in  front 
of  the  center  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  to  face  by  the  right 
flank. 

96.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  right ; 
each  captain  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  his  company,  and 
cause  it  to  break  to  the  right ;  the  first  file  of  each  company  will 

\ 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION.  101 

wheel  to  the  right,  and  the  cov^eriug  sergeant,  placed  in  front  of 
thin  file,  will  conduct  it  jicrpcndicularly  to  the  roar;  the  other  files- 
will  wheel  successively  ut  the  same  place  as  the  first.  The  cap- 
tains will  sec  their  companies  file  past  them;  when  the  last  files 
have  wheeled,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  Battalion,  by  the.  left  flank — March.      4.   Guide  left. 

97.  At  the  command  march,  the  companies  will  face  to  the  left, 
and  march  in  column  in  the  new  direction.  The  captains  will 
place  themselves  in  front  of  the  centers  of  their  respective  com- 
panies. At  the  fourth  command,  the  guides  will  conform  to  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  column;  the  leading  one  will  move  in 
the  direction  indicated  to  him  by  the  lieutenant-colonel.  The  men 
will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 

98.  To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  left,  the  colonel  will  give  the 
same  commands  as  in  the  case  of  breaking  to  the  rear  by  the 
^ight,  substituting  the  indication  icft  for  that  of  right. 

99.  The  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. Each  captain  will  hasten  to  the  left  of  his  company,  cause 
the  first  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  then  place  his  breast 
against  the  right  file  of  the  company  next  to  the  left  of  his  own, 
in  the  manner  prescnbed  above. 

100.  As  soon  as  the  two  files  break  to  the  rear,  the  left  guide  of 
each  company  will  place  himself  before  the  front  rank  man  of  the 
headmost  file,  to  conduct  him. 

101.  The  instant  the  companies  face  to  the  front,  the  right  guide 
of  each  will  place  himself  so  that  hip  right  arm  may  lightly  touch 
the  breast  of  his  captain.  '. 

102.  The  battalion  ma^'^  be  broken  fcy  divisions  to  the  rear,  by 
the  right  or  left,  in  like  manner  ;  in  this  case  the  indication  divi- 
sions will  be  substituted,  in  the  first  command,  for  that  of  cojnpanics; 
the  chiefs  of  division  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed 
for  the  chiefs  of  company.  The  junior  captain  in  each  division  will 
place  himself,  when  t4ic  division  faces  to  a  flank,  by  the  side  of  a 
covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company,  who  steps  into  the  front 
rank. 

103.  If  there  bo  an  odd  number  c»f  companies,  and  the  battalion 
breaks  by  division  to  the  rear,  whether  b^'  the  right  or  left,  the  cap- 
tain of  the  left  company  will^onform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  77. 

104.  This  manner  of  breaking  into  column  being  at  once  the 
most  prompt  and  regular,  will  be  preferred  on  actual  service,  un- 
less there  be  some  particular  reason  for  breaking  to  the  front. 

10,5.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line  and  at  a  halt,   and  the  colonel 
shoultl  wish  to  a<lvancc  or  retire  by  the  right  of  companies,  he  will 
command  : 
1.  By  the  right  of  companie.^  to  the  front  (or  rear),     2.  Battalion,  right 

Face.     3.  March  (or  double  quick— ^i Av^rn) .     4.   Guide  right, 

(left)  or  (center). 

IOC.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move  rapidly  two 


102  SCHOOL    OF   THE    BATTALION. 

paces  in  front  of  the  center  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  to  face  to 
the  right ;  the  covering  sergeants  will  replace  the  captains  in  the 
front  rank. 

107.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  right, 
and  each  captain  moving  quickly  to  the  right  of  his  company  will 
cause  files  to  break  to  the  front,  according  to  the  principles  indica- 
ted No.  89. 

108.  At  the  command  inarch,  each  captain,  placing  himself  on 
the  left  of  his  leading  guide,  will  conduct  his  companj'^  perpendicu- 
larly to  the  original  line.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  guide  of 
each  company  will  dress  to  the  right,  left,  or  center,  according  to 
the  indication  given,  taking  care  to  preserve  accurately  his  distance. 

109.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  to  the  front,  or  rear,  by 
the  left  of  companies,  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same 
means  and  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  for  7ight. 

110.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to 
advance  or  retire  by  the  right  of  companies,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  right  of  coynpanies  to  the  front  (or  j'ear).  2.  Battalion,  by 
the  right  flank.  3.  Ma-rch  (or  double  quick — March).  4.  Guide 
right  (left)  or  (center); 

111.  "Which  will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  and 
means  prescribed  Kos.  95  and  following,  and  106  and  following. 
At  the  first  command,  the  color  and  general  guides  will  take  their 
places  as  in  column. 

112.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  left 
of  companies,  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same  means 
and  the  same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right. 

113.  If  the  battalion  be  advancing  by  the  right  or  left  of  com- 
panies, and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  line  to  the  front,  he 
will  comniand  : 

1.  By  companies  into   line.      2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

3.   Guide  center. 

114.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  rejieated  by  the  captains, 
each  company  will  bo  formed  into  ling,  as  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  company,  No.  154. 

115.  At  the  third  command,  the  color  and  geoieral  guides  will 
move  rapidly  to  their  places  in  line,  as  will  be  hereinafter  pre- 
scribed No.  405.  * 

116.  If  the  battalion  be  retiring  by  the  right  or  left  of  compa- 
nies, and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  line  facing  the  enemy,  he 
will  first  cause  the  companies  to  face  about  Avhile  marching,  and  im- 
mediately form  in  line  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed 
No.  113,  and  following. 


iijuq^^ 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION.  103 

Article  III. — To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column. 


3: 


"'«:::=3 


ll!lllMllfWWl!iiMi)liy 


iilifiHiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiF 
lllillliir 


'^lilli)lllI]Ii)lllllDlfflllM'lll■!!'le' 


Iig.2 


fg;mmmf;MMBM^j}' 


%3 


S 


%,. 


::^^ -  ■    :!'e=:Trr=j^ 


Ml 


117.  This  movement  may  be  executed  by  company  or  by  divi- 
sion, on  the  right  or  left  subdivision,  rifjbt  or  left  in  front. 

118.  The  examples  in  this  school  will  suppose  the  presence  of 
four  divisions,  with  directions  for  an  odd  company  ;  but  what  will 
be  prescribed  for  four  will  serve  equally  for  two,  three  or  five  di- 
visions. 

lin.  To  plo3'  the  battalion  into  close  column  by  division  in  rear 
of  the  first,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   Clo.<^e  column,  by  dii'ision.     2.   On    the  first  division,  jight  in  front. 
3.  Batfolion,  right — Fack.    4.  Kauch  (or  double  quick — March). 

120.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  chiefnof  divisif>n  will  place 
themselves  before  the  centers  of  their  divisicms;  the  chief  of  the 
first  will  cnution  it  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefs  of  the  three  others  will 
remind  thcjn  that  they  wiil  have  to  face  t^o  the  right,  and  the  cov- 
ering sergeant  of  the  right  cf^mipany  of  each  division  will  replace 
his  captjiin  in  the  front  rank,  as  soon  as  the  latter  steps  out. 

121.  At  the  third  command,  the  last  three  divinions  will  face  to 
the  right ;  the  chief*of  each  division  will  hasten   to  its  right,  and 


104  SCHOOL   OF  THE    BATTALION. 

cause  files  to  be  broken  to  the  rear,  as  indicated  No.  89 ;  the  right 
guide  will  break  at  the  same  time,  and  place  himself  before  the 
front  rank  man  of  the  first  file,  to  conduct  him,  and  each  chief 
of  division  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  this  guide. 

122.  The  moment  these  divisions  face  to  the  right,  the  junior 
captain  in  each  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company,  who  will  place  himself  in  the  front  rank. 
This  rule  is  cjeneralfor  all  the  ployments  by  division. 

123.  At  the  command  mart'A,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
a.dd,  guide  left ;  at  this,  its  left  guide  will  place  himself  on  its  left, 
as  soon  as  the  movement  of  the  second  division  may  permit,  and 
the  file  closers  will  advance  one  pacdupon  the  rear  rank. 

124.  All  the  other  divisions,  each  conducted  by  its  chief,  will 
step  off  together,  to  take  their  places  in  the  column  ;  the  second 
will  gain,  in  wheeling  by  file  to  the  rear,  the  space  of  six  paces, 
which  ought  to  separate  its  guide  from  the  guide  of  the  first  divi- 
sion, and  so  direct  its  march  as  to  enter  the  column  on  a  line  par- 
allel to  this  division  ;  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  direct 
themselves  diagonally  towards,  but  a  little  in  rear  of,  the  points  at 
which  they  ought,  respectively,  to  enter  the  column  ;  at  six  paces 
from  the  left  flank  of  the  column,  the  head  of  each  of  these  divi- 
sions will  incline  a  little  to  the  left,  in  order  to  enter  the  column 
as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  taking  care  also  to  leave 
the  distance  of  six  paces  between  its  guide  and  the  guide  of  the 
preceding  division.  At  the  moment  the  divisions  put  themselves 
in  march  to  enter  the  column,  the  file  closersof  each  will  incline  to 
the  left,  so  as  to  bring  themselves  to  the  distance  of  a  pace  from 
the  rear  rank. 

125.  Each  chief  of  these  three  divisions  will  conduct  hisdivision 
till  he' shall  be  up  with  the  guide  of  the  directing  one  ;  the  chief 
will  then  himself  halt,  see  his  division  file  pass,  and  halt  it  the  in- 
stant the  last  file  shall  have  passed,  commanding  :  1.  Such  division; 
2.  Halt  ;  3.  Front  ;  4.  ie/!:— Dress. 

126.  At  the  second  command,  the  division  will  halt;  the  left 
guide  will  place  himself  promptly  on  the  direction,  six  paces  from 
the  guide  which  precedes  him,-  in  order  that,  the  column  being 
formed,  the  divisions  may  be  separated  the  distance  of  four  paces. 

127.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  face  to  the  front ; 
at  the  fourth,  it  will  be  aligned  by  its  chief,,  who  will  pl^ee himself 
two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  direct  the  alignment  bo  that 
his  division  may  be  parallel  to  that  which  precedes — which  being 
done,  he  will  coiiimaiid.  Front,  and  place  himself  before  the  cen- 
ter of  his  division. 

128.  If  any  division,  after  the  command  front,  be  not  at  its  pro- 
per distance,  and  this  can  only  happen  through  the  negligence  of 
its  chief,  such  division  will  remain  in  its  place,  in  order  that  the 
fault  may  not  be  propagated. 

129.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  execution  of  the  move- 
ment, and  cause  the  prescribed  principles  to  be  observed. 


.    SCHOOL  OF   THE   BATTALION.  106 

180.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placing  himself  in  succession  in  rear 
of  the  left  guides,  will  assure  tlicra  on  the  direction  as  they  arrive, 
and  then  move  to  his  place  outside  of  the  left  flank  of  the  column 
eix  paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  the  first  division.  In  assuring 
the  guides  on  the  direction,  ho  will  be  a  mere  observer,  unless  one 
or  more  should  fail  to  cover  exactly  the  guide  or  guides  already 
established.     This  rule  is  general. 

131.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  Avith  the  left 
of  the  fourth  division,  and  afterwards  take  his  position  outside 
of  the  left  flank  of  the  column,  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with, 
this  division. 

132.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  front  of  the  first  division,  the  colo- 
nel will  give  the  "same  commands,  substituting  the  indication  left 
for  that  of  right  in  front. 

133.  At  the  second  and  third  commands,  the  chiefs  of  division 
and  the  junior  captains  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, Xos.  120,  121,  122  ;  but  the  chiefs  of  the  last  three  divi- 
sions, instead  of  causing  the  first  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear, 
will  cause  them  to  break  to  the  front. 

134.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  Avill 
add  :  Guide  right. 

135.  The  three  other  divisions  will  step  oflf  together  to  take  their 
places  in  the  column  in  front  of  the  directing  division  ;  each  will 
direct  itself  as  prescribed,  ISTo.  124,  and  will  enter  in  such  manner 
that,  when  halted,  its  guide  may  find  himself  six  paces  from  the 
guide  of  the  division  next  previously  oetablishcd  in  the  column. 

136.  Each  chief  of  these  divisions  will  conduct  his  division,  till 
his  right  guide  shall  be  nearly  up  with  the  guide  of  the  directing 
one;  he  will  then  halt  his  division,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front ; 
at  the  instant  it  halts,  its  right  guide  will  face  to  the  rear,  place 
himself  six  paces  from  the  preceding  guide,  and  cover  him  exact- 
ly— which  being  done,  the  chief  will  align  his  division  by  the 
right. 

137.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  in  front  of  the  right  guide 
of  the  first  division,  Avill  assure  the  guides  on  the  direction  as  they 
Buccessivoly  arrive,  and  then  move  outside  of  the  right  flank  of  the 
column,  to  a  point  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  the  fourth  divi- 
sion, now  in  front. 

138.  The  major  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed,  No. 
131,  and  then  move  outside  of  the  right  flank  of  the  column,  six 
paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  the  first  division,  now  in  the  rear. 

139.  The  movement  being  ended,  tho  colonel  will  command  : 

Chiides,  about — Face. 

140.  At  tiu^.  ihu  guides,  who  arc  faced  to  tiie  rcaj-.  will  face  to 
the  front. 

141.  To  jtloy  the  battalion  in  rear,  or  in  front  of  Uic  fourth  divi- 
sion,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


106  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

1.  Close  column  by  division.  2.  On  the  fourth  division^  left  (or  right) 
in  front.  3.  Battalion,  left — Pace.  4.  March,  (ov  double  quick — 
March). 

142.  These  movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples of  those  which  precede,  but  by  inverse  means  :  the  fourth 
division  on  which  the  battalion  ploys  will  stand  fast  ;  the  instant 
the  movement  commences,  its  chief  will  command,  guide  right  (or 
left). 

143.  The  foregoing  examples  embrace  all  the  principles  :  thus, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  ploy  the  battalion  on  an  interior  di- 
vision, he  will  command  : 

1.  Close  column  by  division.  2.  On  such  division,  right  (or  left)  in 
front.  3.  Battalion  inwards. — Face.  4.  March  {or  double  quick — 
March). 

144.  The  instant  the  movement  commences,  the  chief  of  the  di- 
recting division  will  command,  guide  left  (or  right). 

145.  The  divisions  which,  in  the  order  in  battle,  are  to  the  right 
of  the  directing  division,  will  face  to  the  left ;  those  which  are  to 
the  left,  will  face  to  the  right. 

146.  If  the  right  is  to  bo  in  front,  the  right  divisions  will  ploy 
in  front  of  the  directing  division,  and  the  left  in  its  rear;  the  re- 
verse, if  the  left  is  to  be  in  front.  And  in  all  the  foregoing  suppo- 
sitions, the  division  or  divisions  contiguous  to  the  directing  one, 
in  wheeling  by  frlo  to  the  front  or  rear,  will  gain  the  space  of  six 
paces,  which  ought  to  separate  their  guides  from  the  guide  of  the 
directing  division.  * 

147.  In  all  the  ployments  on  an  interior  division,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides  in  front,  and  the  ma- 
jor those  in  rear  of  the  directing  division. 

148.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a  halt,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  by  combining  the  two  gaits  of  quick 
and  double  quick  time,  and  always  in  rear  of  one  of  the  flank  di- 
visions. 

149.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  in  rear  of  the  first 
division,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   Close  column  by  division.     2.    On  the  first  division.     3.  Battalion — 
by  the  right  flank.      4.  Double  quick — March. 

150.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division  will  move 
rapidly  before  the  center  of  his  division  and  caution  it  to  face  to 
the  right. 

151.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  it  to  continue  to 
march  to  the  front,  and  he  will  command  :   Quick  march. 

152.  At  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
command  :  Guide  left.  At  this,  the  left  guide  will  move  to  the  left 
flank  of  the  division  and  direct  himself  on  the  point  indicated. 

153.  The  three  other  divisions  will  face  to  the  right  and  move  ofi" 
in  double  quick  time,  breaking  to  the  right  to  take  their  places  in 


SCHOOL   OF  THE  BATTALION.  107 

<x)himn  ;  each  chief  of  division  will  move  rapidly  to  tho  right  of 
his  division  in  order  to  conduct  it.  The  files  will  be  careful  to  pro- 
serve  their  distances,  and  to  march  with  a  uniform  and  decideii 
step.  The  cc»lor-bearer  and  general  guides  will  retake  their  places 
in  the  ranks. 

154.  The  second  division  will  immediately  enter  the  column, 
marching  parallel  to  the  first  division;  its  chief  will  allow  it  to  file 
past  him.  and  when  the  last  file  is  abreast  of  him,  will  command  : 
1.  Second  division,  hy  the  left /ianii — March.  2.  (rwuf^ /c/^,  and  place 
himself  in  front  of  the  center  of  his  division. 

155.  At  the  command  march,  the  division  will  face  to  the  left; 
at  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will  march  in  the  trace  of 
of  the  left  guiue  oTthe  first  division  ;  the  men  will  take  the  touch 
of  elbows  to  the  left.  When  the  second  division  has  closed  to  its 
proper  distance,  its  chief  will  command  :  Quick  time — March.  This 
division  will  then  change  its  step  to  quick  time. 

156.  The  chiefs  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  execute 
their  movements  according  to  the  same  principles,  taking  care  to 
gain  as  much  ground  as  possible  toward  the  head  of  the  column. 

157.  If  the  battalion  has  been  previously  marching  in  line  at 
double  quick  time,  when  the  fourth  division  shall  have  gained  \is 
distance,  the  colonel  will  command  :  Double  quick — March. 

15S.  In  this  movement,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  move  rapidly 
to  the  side  of  the  leading  guide,  give  him  a  point  of  direction,  and 
then  follow  the  movements  of  the  first  division.  The  major  will 
follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the   left  of  tho  fourth  division. 

Bemarks  on  ploying,  the  Battalion  into  column. 

L50.  The  battalion  may  be  ployed  into  column  at  full,  or  half 
distance,  on  the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same  commands,  sub- 
stituting for  the  first  command:  Column  at  full  (or  half)  distance, 
by  division. 

160.  In  the  ployments  and  movements  in  column,  when  the  sub- 
divisions execute  the  movements  successively,  such  as — to  take  or 
close  distances  ;  tp  change  direction  by  the  flank  of  subdivisions, 
each  chief  of  subdivision  will  cause  his  men  to  support  arms  after 
having  aligned  it  and  commanded,  Front. 


108 


SCHOOL  OF   THE  BATTALION. 


PART  THIRD. 

Article  I. —  To  march  in  column  at  full  distance. 


Bg2 


zn 


■qr« 


M  P 

M  H 

.M_  r 


•-d  T3 


1^3. 


161.  When  the  colonel  shall  Avisli  to  put  the  colnmn  in  march, 
he  will  indicate  to  the  leadini^  guide  two  distinct  objects  in  front 
on  the  line  which  the  guide  ought  to  follow.  This  guide  will  im- 
mediately put  his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  that  line,  take  the 
more  distant  object  as  the  point  of  direction,  and  the  nearer  one 
as  the  intermediate  point. ' 

162.  If  only  a  single  prominent  object  present  itself  in  the  direc- 
tion the  guide  has  to  follow,  he  will  face  to  it  as  before,  and  imme- 
diately endeavor  to  catch  on  the  ground  some  intermediate  point, 
by  which  to  give  steadiness  to  his  march  on  the  point  of  direction. 

163.  There  being  no  prominent  object  to  serve  as  the  point  of 
direction,  the  colonel  will  dispatch  the  lieutenant-colonel  or  adju- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  109 

tant  to  place  himself  forty  paces  in  advance,  facing  the  column, 
and  by  a  sign  of  the  Hword  establish  him  on  the  direction  ho  may 
wish  to  give  to  the  leading  guide ;  that  officer  being  thu8  placed, 
thia  guide  Avill  take  him  as  the  point  of  direction,  conforming  him- 
self fo  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  compan}-,  No.  87. 

164.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Colwnn  forward.     2.  Guide  left  (or  right.)     3.  March,  (or  double 
quick — March.) 

165.  At  the  command  anarch,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
subdivision,  the  column  will  put  itself  in  march,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  200  and  fol- 
lowing. 

16G.  The  leading  guide  may  always  maintain  himself  correctly 
on  the  direction  by  keo])ing  steadily  in  view  the  two  pointa  indi- 
cated to  him,  or  chosen  by  himself;  if  these  points  have  a  certain 
olovation,  he  may  be  assured  he  is  on  the  true  direction,  when 
the  nearer  masks  the  more  distant  point. 

107.  The  following  guides  will  preserve  with  exactness  both  step 
and  distance;  each  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  guide  who  im- 
mediately precedes  him,  without  occupying  himsell'  with  the  gen- 
eral dii-ection. 

168.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  hold  himself,  habitually,  abreast 
with  the  leading  guide,  to  see  that  he  does  not  deviate  from  the 
direction,  and  will  observe,  also,  that  the  next  guide  marched  ex- 
actly in  the  trace  of  the  first. 

1G9.  The  major  will  generally  be  abreast  with  the  lust  subdivis- 
ion ;  he  will  see  that  each  guide  marches  exactly  in  the  trace  of 
the  one  immediately  preceding ;  if  either  deviate  from  the  direc- 
tion, the  major  will  promptly  rectify  the  error,  and  prevent  itfl 
being  ]-)ropagated  ;  but  he  need  not  interfere,  in  this  way,  imless 
the  deviation  has  become  sensible,  or  material. 

170.  The  column  being  in  march,  the  colonel  will  frequently 
cause  the  a^ou/ to  be  executed  while  marching;  to  this  eft'ect,  he 
will  command  : 

1.  Batf(dioH,  right  about.     2.  March.     3.   Guide  right. 

171.  At  the  second  command,  the  companies  will  face  to  the  right 
abou't,  and  the  column  will  then  nvnrch  forward  in  an  opposite  di- 
rection ;  the  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  remain  behind  the  front  rank, 
the  file  closers  in  front  of  the  rear  rank,  and  the  guides  will  ])lace 
themselves  in  the  same  rank.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  remain 
abreast  of  the  first  division,  now  in  rear;  the  major  will  give  a 
point  of  direction  to  the  leading  guide,  and  march  abreast  of  him. 

172.  The  colonel  avIII  hold  liimself  habitually  on  the  directing 
flank  ;  he  will  look  to  the  step  and  to  the  distances,  ami  seo  that 
all  the  principlca  prescribed  for  the  mardi  in  column,  school  of  the 
company,  arc  observed. 

17;^.  These  means,  which  the  practice  in  that  school  ought  tX) 
liavo  rendered  familiar,  will  give  sufficient  exactness  to  the  dircc- 


110  SCHOOL  OF  THE    BATTALION. 


tion  of  the  column,  and  also  enable  it  to  fovra.  forward  or  faced  to 
the  rear,  on  the  right,  or  07i  the  left,  into  line  of  battle,  and  to  dose  iii 
ma^s. 

174.  But  when  a  column,  arriving  in  front,  or  in  rear  of  the  line 
of  battle,  or,  rather,  on  one  of  the  extremities  of  that  line,  has  to 
prolong  itself  on  it,  in  order  to  form  to  the  left  or  to  the  right  into 
line  of  battle,  then,  as  it  is  essential,  to  prevent  the  columns  from 
cutting  the  line,  or  sensibly  deviating  from  it,  other  means,  as  fol- 
lows, will  be  employed: 

The  column  arriving  in  froi^t  of  the  line  of  battle,  to  'prolong  it  on  this 

line. 

175.  If  the  column  right  in  front  arrive  in  front  of  the  line  of 
battle,  as  it  should  cross  it  and  find  itself  four  paces  beyond  it 
after  having  changed  direction,  the  colonel  will  cause  to  be  placed, 
in  advance,  a  marker  on  the  Hue  to  indicate  the  point  at  which 
the  column  ought  to  cross  it,  and  another  marker  to  indicate  the 
poifit  where  the  first  subdivision  should  commence  to  wheel ;  he 
will  be  so  placed  that  when  the  wheel  is  executed,  the  left  guide 
will  find  himself  four  paces  witliin  the  line  of  battle.  The  chief 
of  the  leading  subdivision,  when  the  head  of  the  column  shall 
have  arrived  near  the  lino,  will  take  the  guide  to  the  right,  and 
this  guide  will  immediately  direct  himself  on  the  second  marker. 
On  arriving  abreast  of  him,  this  subdivision  will  be  wheeled  to  the 
left,  and  when  the  Avheel  is  completed,  the  guide  will  be  changed 
again  to  the  left ;  this  guide  will  then  march  parallel  to  the  line 
of  battle  by  the  means  to  be  hereinafter  indicated. 

176.  The  instant  the  first  subdivision  wheels,  the  right  general 
guide,  who,  by  a  caution  from  the  lieutenant-colonel,  will  before 
have  placed  himself  on  the  line  of  battle  at  the  point  where  the 
column  crosses  it,  and  who  will  have  faced  to  the  two  points  of  di- 
rection in  his  front,  indicated  by  the  colonel,  will  march  forward 
correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  those  points. 

177.  The  color-bearer  will  j^lace  himself  in  like  manner  on  the 
line  of  battle,  and,  at  the  instant  the  color  subdivision  wheels,  he 
will  prolong  his  march  on  that  line,  abreast  with  this  subdivision, 
taking  care  to  carry  the  color  lance  beforj  the  center  of  his  per- 
son, and  to  maintain  himself  exacfly  in  the  direction  of  the  gene- 
ral guide  who  precedes  him,  and  the  point  of  direction  in  front 
Avhich  will  have  been  indicated  to  him. 

178.  Finally,  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  in  the  same  man- 
ner on  the  line  of  battle ;  and,  at  the  instant  the  last  subdivision 
of  the  battalion  wheels,  he  will  march  correctly  in  the  direction  of 
the  color-bearer  and  the  other  general  guide. 

179.  The   guide   of  the  first  subdivision  will    march   steadily  \\f^ 
abreast  with  the  right  general  guide,  and  about  four  paces  to  his.^.j 
right;  each  of  the  guides  of  the  following  subdivisions  will  marchf 
in  the  trace  of  the  guide  who  immediately  precedes  him,  as  pre-v«jl 
scribed, No. "107. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   BATTALION.    '  111 

180.  The  colonel,  placed  outside  of  the  general  guides,  Avill  see 
that  the  column  marches  nearly  parallel  to,  ami  about  lour  paces 
within  these  guides. 

181.  The  lie\itenanc-colonel  and  major  will  look  to  the  direction 
of  the  general  guides,  and  to  this  end,  place  themselves  sometimes 
in  rear  of  the  color-hearer,  or  the  left  general  guide. 

182.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battalions,  the  gene- 
ral guides  of  each  will  successively  place  themselves  on  the  line  of 
battle  to  prolong  their  march  on  this  line,  as  the  leading  subdivi- 
Bion,  that  of  the  color,  and  the  one  in  the  rear  of  their  battalion, 
shall  wheel  into  the  new  direction  ;  these  guides  Avill  confoi-m 
themselves  respccth-ely,  as  will  also  the  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel 
and  major,  to  what  is  prescribed  above  for  those  of  the  leading 
battalion. 

183.  In  the  case  of  several  battalions,  tlie  lieutenant-colonel  of 
each  will  maintain  steadily  the  guide  of  his  leading  subdivision 
about  four  paces  within  the  line  of  general  guides,  even  should  the 
last  subdivisions  of  the  battalion  immediately  preceding  deviate 
from  the  parallelism,  in  order  that  the  false  direction  of  one  batta- 
lion may  not  influence  that  of  the  battalions  which  follow. 

The  column  arriving  behind  the  line  of  battle^  to  prolong  it  on  this  line. 

184.  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  arrive  behind  the  line  of  bat- 
tle, as  it  ought  to  tind  itself  four  paces  within  this  line,  after  having 
changed  direction,  the  colonel  will  cause  a  marker  to  be  ])Iaccd  at 
the  point  where,  according  to  that  condition,  the  first  subdivision 
ought  to  commence  wheeling.  Another  marker  will  be  established 
on  the  line  of  battle,  t-o  indicate  the  point  at  which  the  general 
guides  ought,  in  succession,  to  begin  to  prolong  themselves  on  that 
line;  he  will  be  so  placed  that  each  subdivision,  having  finished  it« 
wheel,  may  find  itself  nearly  in  a  line  with  this  marker. 

185.  At  the  instant  the  first  subdivision,  after  having  wheeled  to 
the  right,  begins  to  prolong  itself  parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle, 
the  leading  general  guide,  placed  in  advance  on  that  line,  will 
direct  himself  on  the  two  points  taken  in  his  front;  the  color- 
bearer  and  the  other  general  guide  will  successively  place  them- 
selves on  the  same  line  the  instant  that  their  renpective  subdiviBionii 
fihall  have  finished  their  wheel. 

186.  If  the  column  bo  composed  <jf  several  battalions,  the  gen- 
eral guides  of  the  following  battalions  will  euccesKivcly  execute 
what  has  been  just  prescribed  for  those  of  the  leading  battalion, 
and  the  whole  will  conform  themselves,  as  well  as  the  guides  of 
8ubdivisionf»,  and  the  field  officers  of  the  several  battalions,  to  what 
i"  'ndicaled  above  for  a  column  arriving  in  front  of  the  line  of 
battle. 

1«7.  In  a  column,  left  in  tVoiit.  arriving  in  iVoiit  or  in  rear  of 
the  lino  of  battle,  theeio  movenKut<j  will  bo  executed  on  the  sjime 
principloe,  and  by  ioTcrse  means. 


112 


SCHOOL  or  THE    BATTALION. 


The  column  arriving  on  the  right  or  the  left  of  the  line  of  battle,  to 
prolong  it  on  this  line. 
188.  If  the  column,  instead  of  arriving  in  front  or  in  rear  of  the 
line  of  battle,  arrive  on  its  right  or  left,  and  if  it  have  to  prolong 
itself  on  that  line,  in  order  afterwards  to  form  to  the  left  or  right 
into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  bring  the  color  and  general 
o-uides  on  the  flank  of  the  column  by  the  command  color  and  general 
guides  on  the  line;  and  these  guides  will  proiong  themselves  on 
the  line  of  battle,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  abovb. 

Article  III. —  To  change  direction  in  column  at  full  distance. 


1 

■■s^lHijjjgiiiijiiiiJ 


-ff- 


231.  The  column  being  in  march  in  the  cadenced  step,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction,  he  will  go  to  the  -j 
point  at  which  the  change  ought  to  be  commenced,  and  establish  a:.iJO 
marker  there,  presenting  the  breast  to  the  flank  of  the  column  ;  no 
this  marker,  no  matter  to  which  side  the  change  of  direction  is  to  ""2, 
be  made,  will  be  posted  on  the  opposite  side,  and  he  will  remain  in 
position  till  the  last  subdivision  of  the  battalion  shall  have  passed. 
The  leading  subdivision  being  within  a  few  paces  of  the  marker,^ 
the  colonel  will  command  :  ,Ai 

i.  Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  right).  "^ 

232.  At  this,  the  chief  of  the  leading  subdivision,  will  immedi- 
ately take  the  guide  on  the  side  opposite  the  change  of  direction, 
if  not  already  there.  This  guide  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  graze 
the  breast  of  the  marker ;  arrived  at  this  point,  the  chief  will 
cause  his  subdivision  to  change  direction  by  the  commands  and..,^ 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Com-  ' 
pany.  When  the  Avheel  is  completed,  the  chief  of  this  subdivision 
■will  retake  the  guide,  if  changed,  on  the  side  of  the  primitive 
■direction. 

233.  The  chief  of  each  succeeding  subdivision,  as  well  as  theA  j 
guides,  will  conform  to  what  has  just  been  explained  for  the  lead- 
ing subdivision. 


235.  The  colonel  will  carefully  see  that  the  guide  of  each  subdi 


od3 


vision,  in  wheeling,  does  not  throw  himself  without  or  within,  but''*^' 


SCHOOL.  OF   THE    BATTALION.  113 

paescH  over  all  the  points  of  the  are  of  the  circle,  wliieh  he  ought 
to  describe. 

233.  As  often  as  no  distinct  object  jjresents  itself  in  the  new 
direction,  the  lieutenant -colonel  will  place  himself  upon  it  in 
advance,  at  the  distance  of  thirty  or  forty  paces  fi-oni  the  marker, 
and  be  assured  in  this  direction  by  the  colonel ;  the  leading  guide 
will  take,  the  moment  he  shall  have  changed  direction,  two  points 
on  the  ground  in  the  straight  line  which,  drawn  from  himself, 
would  pass  between  the  heels  of  the  lieutenant-colonel,  taking, 
afterwards,  new  points  as  he  advances. 

23().  The  major  will  see  that  the  guides  direct  themselves  on  the 
marker,  posted  at  the  ])oint  of  change,  so  as  to  graze  his  breast. 

237.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  battalions,  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel of  the  second,  will  cause  the  n\arker  of  the  first 
battalion,  to  be'  replaced  as  soon  as  the  last  subdivision  of  this  bat- 
talion shall  have  passed  ;  this  disposition  will  be  observed  fey  bat- 
talion after  battalion,  to  the  reiu"  of  the  column. 

AuTicLE  IV. —  To  halt  the  column. 

239.  The  cohimn  being  in  marr-h.  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
halt  it.  he  will  command  : 

1.   Columv.     2.   Halt. 

240.  At  the  second  command,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains, 
the  column  will  halt;  no  guide  will  stir,  though  he  may  have  lost 
his  distance,  or  be  out  of  the.  direction  of  the  preceding  guides. 

241.  The  column  being  in  march,  in  double  quick  time,  will  bo 
kalted  by  the  same  commands.  At  the  command  halt^  the  men 
will  halt  in  their  places,  and  will  themselves  rectify  their  positions 
in  the  ranks. 

242.  The  column  being  halted,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
form  it  into  line  of  battle,  he  will  move  a  little  in  front  of  the 
leading  guide,  and  face  to  him  ;  this  guide  and  the  following  one 
will  fix  their  eyes  on  the  colonel,  in  order  promptly  to  conform 
themselves  to  his  directions. 

243.  If  the  colonel  judge  it  not  necessary  to  give  a  general 
direction  to  the  guides,  he  will  limit  himself  to  rectifying  the  posi- 
tion of  such  as  may  be  without,  or  witliin  the  direction,  by  tiie 
command  guiik  of  (such)  company,  or  yuiJcs  of  (such)  companies^  to 
thcrirjht,  {or  to  the  left;)  at  this  command,  the  guides  designated 
will  place  themselves  on  the  direction  ;  the  others  will  stand  fast. 

244.  If  on  the  contrary,  the  colonel  judge  it  necessary  to  give  a 
general  direct i<jn  to  the  guides  of  the  column,  he  will  place  the 
fii>t  t\v(i  (III  ilic  (lir.'ctiun  he  shall  have  chosen,  and  fimmand  : 

Guides.,  cover. 
24.J.  At  tlii>,  tlic  lulhjwiiig  gui<les  will  ]»romptly  j)lace  themselves 
on  the  direction  covering  the  first  two  in  tile,  and  each  precisely  at 
a  distance  e<jual  t<»  the  front  ot'  his  company,  from  the  guide  im- 
rae<l lately  preceding ;  the  lieutenant -colonel  will  asHun.'  them  in 
ll>e  direction,  and  the  colom-l  will  command  : 


114  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

248.  At  this  command,  the  f^uide  of  each  comimu}-  of  the  di- 
recting flank  will  step  promjjtly  into  the  direction  of  the  general 
guides,  and  face  to  the  front.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  in 
front  of,  and  facing  to,  the  leading  general  guide,  and  the  major, 
placed  in  rear  of  the  rearmost  one,  will  promptly  align  the  com- 
pany guides. 

249.  The  colonel,  having  verified  the  direction  of  the  guides,  Avill 
command :        • 

Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

250.  This  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  246. 
Article  V. —  To  close  the  column  to  half  distance,  or  in  mass. 

252.  A  column  by  company  being  at  full  distance  right  in  front, 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  close  to 
half  distance,  on  the  leading  company,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To  half  distance,  close   column.      2.  March    (or   double   quick — 
',  March"). 

253.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  tlie  leading  company 
will  caution  it  to  stand  fast. 

254.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  repeated  by  all  the 
captains,  except  the  captain  of  the  leading  company,  this  company 
will  stand  fast,  and  its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left;  the  file  clo- 
sers will  close  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

255.  All  the  other  companies  will  continue  to  march,  and  as  each 
in  succession  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  one  which  pre- 
cedes, its  captain  will  halt  it. 

256.  At  the  instant  that  each  company  halts,  its  guide  will  place 
himself  on  the  direction  of  the  guides  who  precede,  and  the  cap- 
tain will  align  the  company  by  the  left ;  the  file  closers  will  close 
one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

257.  No  particular  attention  need  be  given  to  the  general  direc- 
tion of  the  guides  before  they  respectively  halt ;  it  will  suffice  if 
each  follow  in  the  trace  of  the  one  who  precedes  him. 

258.  The  colonel,  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  will  superintend  the 
execution  of  the  movement,  observing  that  the  captains  halt  their 
companies  exactly  at  platoon  distance  the  one  from  the  other. 

259.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  a  few  paces  in  front,  will  fiice  to  the 
leading  guide  and  assure  the  positions  of  the  following  guides  as 
they  successively  place  themselves  on  the  direction. 

260.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the  last 
guide. 

261.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  close 
by  the  same  commands. 

262.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  at  the 
first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  command 
qxdck  time;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  companies  will  caution  them  to 
continue  their  march. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALOIN. 


115 


:"  r 


263.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  company  will  march  in 
quick,  and  the  other  companies  in  double  quick  time ;  and  as  each 
arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  preceding  one,  its  chief  will 
cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 

264.  Wlien  the  rearmost  company  shall  have  gained  its  distance, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

Bonhlc  quick — March. 
To  close  the  column  on  the  eighth,  or  rearmost  company. 


Pi 


L 

L                            p 

L 

- 

i 

n  r  ^ 

^ 

-^ 

-> 

-V 

-> 



ri E 

r b 

r 

H 

r... 

LLu.. 

^ 


I  ■ 


267.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  instead  of  causing  it  to  close 
to  half  distance  on  the  iirst  company,  the  colonel  should  wish  to 
ciuse  it  to  close  on  the  eighth,  he  will  command  : 

Battalion^ 
5.  31arcu 


1.   On  the  eighth  company,  to  half  distance  close  column.     2 
about — Face.     3.  Column  fonrar'l.     4.   Ouide  right. 
(or  double  quick — March). 

268.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies,  except  the 
♦•ighth,  will  face  about,  and  their  guides  will  remain  in  the  front 
rank,  now  the  rear. 

2r>n.  At  the  fourth  command,  all  the  captains  will  jtlace  them- 
selves two  ]ia(cs  outside  of  their  companies  on  the  directing  flank. 

270.  At  the  command  march,  the  eighth  company  will  stand  fast, 
:ind  its  captain  will  align  it  by  the  Icll,  the  other  companies  will 
put  themselves  in  march,  and,  as  each  arrives  at  j)latoon  distance 
from  the  one  established  before  it,  it-j  captain  will  halt  it  and  face 
it  to  the  front.  At  the  moment  that  each  company  halts,  the  left 
guide,  remaining  faced  to  the  rear,  will  place  himself  promptly  on 
the  direction  of  the  guides  already  established.  Immediately  after 
the  captain  will  align  his  compaify'  by  the  left,  and  the  file  closers 
will  close  one  j)ace  on  the  rear  rank.  If  this  movement  be  execu- 
ted in  double  quick  time,  each  captain,  in  turn,  will  halt,  and  com- 


116  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


mand  :  Such  company,  right  ahoui — Halt.     At  this  command,  the, 
company  designated  will  face  to  the  right  about  and  halt. 

271.  All  the  ciompanies  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will  cause  the 
guides,  who  stand  faced  to  the  rear,  to  face  about. 

272.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placing  himself  behind  the  rear- 
most guide,  will  assiire  successively  the  positions  of  the  other  guide* 
as  prescribed  No.  259  ;  the  major  will  remain  abreast  with  the 
rearmost  company. 

273.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel  shall  wi&h  to 
close  it  on  the  eighth  company,  he  Will  command : 

1.  On  the  eighth  company,  to  half  distance,  close  column.  2.  Battalion 
right  about.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — March).  4.  Chiide 
right. 

274.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company 
will  caution  his  company  that  it  will  remain  faced  to  the  front ; 
the  captains  of  the  other  companies  will  caution  their  companies' 
that  they  will  have  to  foce  about. 

275.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company 
will  halt  his  company  and  align  it  by  the  left;  the  file  closers  will 
close  one  pace  upon  the  rear  i-ank. 

276.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies,  at  the  same  command, 
will  place  themselves  on  the  flank  of  the  column;  the  subdivisions 
will  face  about,  and  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the 
company  immediately  preceding  it,  its  chief  will  face  it  to  the  front 
and  halt  it  as  prescribed  No.  270.  The  instant  each  company  halts, 
the  guide  on  the  directing  flank,  remaining  faced  to  the  rear,  will 
quickly  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  guides  already  estab- 
lished. After  which,  the  captain  will  align  the  company  by  the 
left,  and  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

277.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  of 
the  first  company.  The  major  will  place  himself  a  few  paces  in 
rear  of  the  guide  of  the  eighth  company,  and  will  assure  succes- 
sively the  position  of  the  other  guides. 

Article  VI. —  To  march  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass.. 

281.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being  at  a  halt,  the 
colonel  will  put  it  in  march  by  the  commands  prescribed  for  a  col- 
umn at  full  distance. 

282.  The  means  of  direction  will  also  be  the  same  for  a  column 
at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  as  for  a  column  at  full  distance,  except 
that  the  general  guides  will  not  step  out. 

283.  Acolumn,  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being  in  march,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  give  the  commands  pre- 
scribed for  halting  a  column  at  full  distance,  and  if,  afterwards,  he 
judge  it  necessary  to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of  the 
column,  he  will  emplo}^  to  this  end,  ^he  commands  and  means  in- 
dicated No.  244,  and  following. 

284.  In  columns  at  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass,  ciliiefs  of  sub- 


SCHOOL   dF  T^Hft   BATTALION.  117 

divisions^  will  repeat  the  commands  warch  and  halt,  as  in  columns 
at  full  distance. 

285.  The  colonel  will  often  march  the  column  to  the  rear,  by  the 
means  and  the  commands  prescribed  Nos.  170  and  171. 

286.  A  column,  by  division  or  company,  whether  at  full  or  half 
distance  or  closed  in  mass,  at  a  halt  or  marching,  can  be  faced  to 
the  right  or  left,  and  marched  off  in  the  new  direction. 

Article  VII. —  To  change  direction  in  cohimn  ot  half  distance. 

287.  A  column  at  half  distance,  being  in  march,  will  change  di- 
rection by  the  same  eommands  and  according  to  thfe  same  princi- 
ples as  a  column  at  full  distance  ;  but  as  the  distance  between  the 
subdivisions  is  less,  the  pivot  man  in  each  subdivision  ■still  take 
steps  of  fourteen  inches  instead  of  nine,  and  of  seventeen  inches 
instead  of  eleven  according  to  the  gait,  in  order  to  clear,  in  time, 
the  wheeling  point,  and  the  marching  flank  will  describe  the  arc  of 
a  larger  circle,  the  better  to  facilitate  the  movement. 

Article  YIII. —  To  change  direction  in  cohimn  closed  in  mass. 

1st.    To  change  direction  in  marching. 

288.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  being  in  march,  will 
change  direction  by  the  fi'ont  of  subdivisions. 

289.  Whether  the  change  be  made  to  the  reverse,  or  to  the  pivot 
flank,  it  will  always  be  executed  on  the  principle  of  wheeling  in 
marching;  to  this  end,  the  colonel  will  firscause  the  battalion  to 
take  the  guide  on  the  flank  opposite  to  the  intended  change  of  direc- 
tion, if  it  be  not  already  on  that  flank. 

290.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  right  in  front,  having 
to  change  direction  to  the  right,  the  colonel,  after  having  caused  a 
marker  to  be  placed  at  the  point  where  the  change  ought  to  com- 
mence, will  command  : 


118 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION. 


1.  Battalion,  right  wheel.     2.  March. 


\    \    \ 

\      V       V 

^      \       \ 


s       \       V      ^      \       \      I 
^       ^       \     \      ^      1     I 


T= 


291.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  division  will  wheel  as 
if  it  were  part  of  a  column  at  half  distance. 

292.  The  instant  that  this  division  commences  the  wheel,  all  the 
others  will,  at  once,  conform  themselves  to  its  movement ;  to  this 
end,  the  left  gnide  of  each,  advancing  slightly  the  left  shoulder, 
and  lengthening  a  little  the  step,  w411  incline  to  the  left,  and  will 
observe,  at  the  same  time,  to  gain  so  much  ground  to  the  front  that 
there  may  constantly  be  an  interval  of  four  paces  between  his  di- 
vision and  that  which  precedes  it ;  and  as  soon  as  he  shall  cover 
the  preceding  guide,  he  will  cease  to  incline  and  then  march  ex- 
actly in  his  trace. 

293.  Each  division  wuU  conform  itself  to  the  movement  of  its 
guide ;  the  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  toward  him  and  advance 
a  little  the  left  shoulder  the  ingtant  the  movement  commences ; 
each  file,  in  inclining,  will  gain  so  much  the  less  ground  to  the  front, 
as  the  file  shall  be  nearer  to  the  pivot,  and  the  right  guide  will 
gain  only  so  much  as  may  be  necessary  to  maintain  between  his 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  119 

own  and  tlio  prccedin£j  division  the  same  distance  which  separates 
their  marching  flanks. 

294.  Each  chief  of  division,  turning  to  it,  will  regulate  its  raarcli, 
and  see  that  it  remains  constantly  included  between  its  guides, 
that  its  alignment  continues  nearly  parallel  to  that  of  the  prece- 
ding division,  and  that  the  center  bends  only  a  little  to  the  rear. 

295.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  movement,  and  cause  the 
pivot  of  the  leading  division  to  lengthen  or  to  shorten  the  step, 
conforming  to  the  principle  established,  school  of  the  company, 
No.  227 — if  cither  be  necessary  to  facilitate  the  movement  of  the 
other  divisions. 

296.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  near  the  left  guide  of  the 
leading  division,  will  regulate  his  march,  and  take  care,  above  all, 
that  he  docs  not  throw  liimself  xcithin  the  arc  he  ought  to  describe. 

297.  The  major,  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  guides,  will  see  that 
the  last  three  conform  themselves,  each  by  slight  degrees,  to  the 
movement  of  the  guide  immediately  preceding,  and  that  neither 
inclines  too  much  in  the  endeavor  to  cover  too  ]>romptly  the  guide 
in  liis  front :  he  will  rectify  any  serious  fault  that  may  be  com- 
mitted in  cither  of  those  particulars. 

298.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  wheel  nearly  ended,  will  command 

1.  Forward.      2.  March. 

299.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
the  leading  division  completes  its  wheel,  it  will  resume  the  direct 
march  ;  the  other  divisions  will  conform  themselves  to  this  move- 
ment;  and  if  any  guide  find  himself  not  covering  his  immediate 
leader,  he  will,  b}- slight  degrees,  bring  himself  on  the  trace  of  that 
guide,  by  advancing  the  right  shoulder. 

300.  If  the  colunin.  right  in  front,  has  to  change  direction  to  the 
left,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  it  to  take  the  guide  to  the  right, 
and  then  command  : 

1.  Battalion Jcft  wheel.     2.  March. 

301.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  change  direction 
to  the  left,  according  to  the  principles  just  prescribed,  and  by  in- 
verse means. 

302.  When  the  l)attalion  shall  have  rcflumed  the  dii'cct  march, 
the  colonel  will  change  the  guide  to  the  left,  on  seeing  the  last 
three  guides  nearly  in  the  dircctif)n  of  the  one  in  front. 

303.  The  foregoing  changes  in  direction  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles  in  a  column,  left  in  front. 

304.  A  column  by  company,  dosed  in  mass,  will  change  direc- 
tion in  marching,  by  the  commands  and  means  indicated  for  a  col- 
umn by  division. 

305.  The  guide  who  is  the  pivot  of  the  particular  wheel,  ought 
to  maintain  himself  at  his  usual  distance  of  six  pace«  from  the 
guide  who  ])rccedes  him  ;  if  this  distance  be  not  exactly  preserved 
tlfo  divisions  would  r.o<*.wv.<,rily  become  confounded,  which  must  be 
carefully  avoided. 


120 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    BATTALION. 


2d.    To  change  direction  from  a  halt. 

306.  A  column  by  company,  or  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  being 
at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  it  a  now  direction, 
and  in  which  it  is  to  remain,  ho  will  cause  it  to  execute  this  move- 
ment by  the  flanks  of  subdivisions,  in  the  following  manner  : 

307.  The  battalion  having  the  right  in  front,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  by  the  right  flank,  he 
will  indicate  to  the  lieutenant-colonel  the  point  of  direction  to  the 
right ;  this  officer  will  immediately  establish  on  the  new  direction 
two  markers,  distant  from  each  other  a  little  less  than  the  front  of 
the  riffht  file  of  this  subdivision  ;  which  being  executed,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Change  direction  by  the  right  fiank.     2.  Battalion,  right — Face. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

308.  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  face  to  the  right, 
and  each  chief  of  subdivision  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  his 
right  guide. 

309.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  subdivisions  will  step  off  to- 
gether ;  the  right  guide  of  the  leading  one  will  direct  himself  from 
the  first  step,  parallelly  to  the  markers  placed  ■  in  advance  on  the 
new  direction  ;  the  chief  of  the  subdivision  will  not  follow  the 
movement,  but  see  it  file  past,  and  as  soon  as  the  left  guide  shall 
have  passed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  First  company  (ov  first  division.^     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.     4:.  Left — 

DrEvSs. 


^^  M 


310.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  subdivision   will  place  itself 
against  the  two  markers,  and  be  promptly  aligned  by  its  chief. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  121 


311.  Tlie  riffht  guide  of  each  of  tho  following  subdivisions  will 
conform  himself  to  the  direction  of  the  right  guide  of  the  stibdivi- 
Hion  preceding  his  own  in  the  column,  so  as  to  enter  on  the  new 
direction  parallelly  to  that  suhdivision.  and  nt  the  distance  of  four 
paces  from  its  rear  rank. 

312.  Each  chief  of  suhdivision  will  halt  in  his  own  person,  on 
arriving  opposite  to  the  left  guides  already  placed  on  the  new  di- 
rection, see  his  subdivision  tile  past,  and  conform  himself,  in  halt- 
irjg  and  aligning  it.  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  300. 

313.  If  the  change  of  direction  be  by  the  left  flank,  the  colonel 
will  cause  markers  to  be  established  as  before,  tho  first  in  front  of 
the  left  file  of  the  leading  subdivision,  and  then  give  the  samcconi- 

''mands.  substituting  the  indication  left  for  right. 

314.  At  the  second  command  all  the  subdivisions  will  face  to  the 
left,  and  each  chief  Avill  place  himself  by  the  side  of  his  left  guide. 

315.  At  the  command  march^aW  the  subdivisions  will  step  off  to- 
gether, each  conducted  by  its  chief 

316.  The  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  will  direct  himself, 
from  the  first  stejt,  parallelly  to  the  markers;  the  subdivision  will 
be  conducted  by  its  chief;  and  as  soon  as  its  left  guide  shall  have 
passed  the  second  marker,  it  will  be  halted  and  aligned  as  pre- 
scribed above;  and  so  of  each  of  the  following  subdivisions. 

317.  The  colonel  "will  hold  himself  on  the  designated  flank,  to 
see  that  each  subdivision  enters  the  new  direction  parallelly  to  the 
leading  one.  and  at  the  prescribed  distance  from  that  Avhich  pre- 
cedes. 

318.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  in  front  of  and 
facing  to.  the  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision,  and  will  assure  the 
positions  of  the  following?  guides,  as  thoy  successively  arrive  on 
the  new  direction. 

310.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with  the  last 
subdivision. 

320.  In  order  that  this  niovt-ment  may  l)c  executed  with  facility 
anfl  precision,  it  is  necessary  that  the  leading  subdivision  should 
entirely  unmask  the  column  ;  for  example,  the  movement  being 
made  h\  the  right  flank,  it  is  necessary,  before  halting  the  leading 
subdivision,  that  its  left  guide,  shall,  at  least,  have  arrived  at  the 
place  previously  occupied  by  its  right  gui<le,  in  order  that  each 
follc»wing  subdivisi(m  which  has  to  pass  over  a  space  at  least  equal 
to  its  front  to  ])ut  itself  in  the  new  direction,  and  whose  left  ought 
to  pass  the  point  at  which  the  right  had  rested,  may,  at  the  com- 
mand halt,  find  itself,  in  its  whole  front,  parallel  to  the  leading  sub- 
division. 

321.  By  this  method  then'  is  no  direction  that  may  not  be  given 
to  a  column  in  mass. 

Article  TX. — Bring  in  rolumn  cf  half  di/itanrr.  or  rjoxed  in  ?nnss,  to 

takr  dvitnncea. 
S22.  A  column  at    half  distance   will  take  full   distances  by  the 
head  of  the  column  when  it  has  to  prolong  it«elf  on  the  line  of  bat  - 


122  SCHOOL   OF  THE    BATTALION. 

tie.  If,  on  the  contrary,  it  has  to  form  itself  in  line  of  battle  on 
the  ground  it  occupies,  it  will  take  distances  on  the  leading  or  on 
the  rearmost  subdivision,  according  as  the  one  or  other  may  find 
itself  at  the  point  where  the  right  or  left  of  the  battalion  ought  to 
rest  in  line  of  battle. 

1st.   To  take  distances  by  the  head  of  the  column. 

323.  The  column  being  by  company  at  half  distance  and  at  a 
halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  take  full  distances 
by  the  head,  he  will  command : 

By  the  head  of  cohmin,  take  wlieeUng  distance. 

324.  At  this  command  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  i 
put  it  on  march  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command  : 

1.  First  company,  forward.     2.  Guide  left.     3.  March  (or  double 

fjuick—MARCU.) 

325.  When  the  second  shall  have  nearly  its  wheeling  distance, 
its  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Second  company,  forward.     2.   Guide  left.     3.  March  (or  double 

quick — March.) 

326.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  pronounced  at  the 
instant  that  this  company  shall  have  its  wheeling  distance,  it  will 
step  oft'  smartly,  taking  the  step  from  the  preceding  company. 
Each  of  the  other  companies  will  successively  execute  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

327.  The  colonel  will  see  that  each  company  puts  itself  in  march 
at  the  instant  it  has  its  distance. 

328.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  h*ld  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  and  direct  the  march  of  the  leading  guide. 

329.  The  major  will  hold  himself  abreast  with  the  rearmost 
guide. 

330.  If  the  column,  instead  of  being  at  a  halt,  be  in  march,  the 
colonel  will  give  the  same  commands,  and  add  : 

March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

331.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  l^me,  at  the  command 
march,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  cause  double  quick 
time  to  be  taken ;  which  will  also  be  done  by  the  other  captains  as 
the  companies  successively  attain  their  proper  wheeling  distance. 

232.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  the  leading 
company  will  continue  to  march  at  the  same  gait.  The  captains 
of  the  other  companies  will  cause  quick  time  to  be  taken,  and  as 
each  company  gains  its  jiroper  distance,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to 
retake  the  double  quick  step. 

2d.   To  take  distances  on  the  rear  of  the  column. 

333.  If  the  colonel  wish  to  take  distances  on  the  rearmost  com- 
pany, he  Avill  establish  two  markers  on  the  direction  he  shall  wish 
to  give  to  the  line  of  battle,  the  first  opposite  to  the  rearmost  com- 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    I5ATTALI0N, 


123 


pany,  the  second  marker  towards  the  head  of  the  column,  at  com- 
pany distance  from  the  lir.st,  and  both  facing  to  the  rear ;  at  the 
8ame  time,  the  right  general  guide,  on  an  intimation  from  the 
lieutenant-colonel,  will  move  rapidly  a  little  bej-ond  the  point  to 
which  the  head  of  the  column  will  extend,  and  place  himself  cor- 
rectly on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  markers.  These  dispositions 
being  made,  the  colonel  M'ill  command  : 

1.   On  the  eighth  company^  take  wheeling  distance.     2.  Column  forward. 
3.  Guide  left.     4.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 


ihj- 


"1  f1  rl  f 

y  kj  y   "x 

-D 

J3       J3      .Xj      J 

y  y  y  4 

rl 


334.  At  the  t^lird  command,  the  captains  will  place  themselves 
two  paces  outside  of  the  directing  flank  ;  the  captain  of  the  eighth 
company  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast. 

335.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  all  the  captains,  except 
the  captain  of  the  eighth  company,  this  latter  company  will  stand 
fast;  its  chief  will  align  it  on  the  left  by  the  first  marker,  who  is 
opposite  to  this  company,  and  place  himself  before  its  center,  after 
commanding  Front.  At  this  command  the  marker  will  retire,  and 
the  lefl  guide  will  take  his  place. 

33G.  All  the  other  companies  will  put  themselves  in  march,  the 
guide  of  the  leading  one  directing  himself  a  little  within  the  right 
general  guide  ;  when  the  seventh  company  has  arrived  opposite 
the  second  marker,  its  captain  will  jialt,  and  align  it  on  this  marker, 
in  the  manner  prescribed  for  the  eighth  company. 

337.  When  the  captain  of  the  sixth  company  shall  see  that  there 
is,  between  his  comj)any  and  the  seventh,  the  necessary  space  for 
wheeling  into  line,  ho  will  halt  his  company;  the  guide  facing  to 
the  rear  will  place  himself  j)rojnjitly  on  the  direction,  and  the  mo- 
ment he  shall  bo  assured  in  his  position,  the  captain  will  align 
the  company  by  the  lefl,  and  then  place  himself  two  paces  before 


124  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

its  center;  the  other  companies  will  successively  conform  them- 
selves to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  sixth  company, 

338.  The  colonel  Avill  follow  the  movement,  and  see  that  each 
company  halts  at  the  prescribed  distance ;  he  will  promptlj^^ 
remedy  any  fault  that  may  bo  committed,  and,  as  soon  as  all  the 
companies  shall  be  aligned,  he  will  cause  the  guides,  who  are  faced 
to  the  rear,  to  face  about. 

339.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  successivelj'  assure  the  left 
guides  on  the  direction,  placing  himself  in  their  rear,  as  they 
arrive. 

340.  The  major  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of  the  column,  and 
Avill  direct  the  march  of  the  leading  guide. 

3d.     To  take  distances  on  the  head  of  the  column. 

341.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  take  distanpces  on  the  leading  com- 
pany, will  establish  two  markers  in  the  manner  just  prescribed, 
one  abreast  with  this  company,  and  the  other  at  company  distance 
in  rear  of  the  first,  biit  both  facing  to  the  front ;  the  left  general 
guide,  on  an  intimation  from  the  lieutenant-colonel,  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  rear,  and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  two  markers,  a  little  beyond  the  point  to  which  the 
rear  of  the  column  will  extend  ;  these  dispositions  being  made,  the 
colonel  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  first  company,  take  wheeling  distance.  2.  Battalion,  about — 
Face.  3.  Column,  forward.  4.  Gtiide  right.  5.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

342.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies,  except  the  one 
designated,  will  face  about,  the  guides  remaining  in  the  front  rank 
now  become  the  rear. 

343.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  eajitains  will  place  themselves 
outside  of  their  guides. 

344.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  designated  com- 
pany will  align  it,  as  prescribed.  No.  335,  on  the  marker  placed  by 
its  side. 

345.  The  remaining  companies  will  put  themselves  in  march,  the 
guide  of  the  rearmost  one  will  direct  himself  a  little  within  the 
left  general  guide ;  when  the  second  company  shall  have  arrived 
opposite  the  second  max-ker,  its  captain  will  face  it  about,  conform- 
ing to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  270,  and  align  it,  as  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  first  company. 

346.  The  instant  that  the  third  company  shall  have  its  wheeling- 
distance,  its  captain  will  halt  it,  facing  it  about,  as  prescribed,  No. 
270,  and, align  it  by  the  left;  the  captains  of  the  remaining  com- 
panies will  each,  in  succession,  conform  himself  to  what  has  just 
loeen  prescribed  for  the  captain  of  the  third. 

347.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  as  indicated  No. 
338 ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  Avill  conform  themselves  to 
what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  339  and  340. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   JtATTALION. 


125 


348.  These  variouH  moveiueiitH  will  he  executed  according  to  the 
flame  principles  in  a  culumn  with  the  left  in  front. 

349.  They  will  be  executed  in  like  manner  in  a  column  closed  in 
mass;  but,  if  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  open  out  the  column 
to  half,  instead  of  full  distance,  he  will  substitute,  in  the  com- 
mands, the  indication  half,  for  that  of  icheeling  distance. 

350.  In  a  column  by  division,  distances  will  be  taken  accordiiii; 
to  the  same  princijjle.s. 

Arttct.k  X. —  foujifrrmarrh  of  a  rohnnn  >tf  full  or  half  distaufie. 


h 


^   /> 


y 


351.  In  a  column  ai  full  or  half  distance,  the  countermarch  will 
be  executed  by  the  moans  indicated,  School  of  the  Company;  to 
this  end,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.   Countermarch.     2.  Battalion  right  (ov  left) — Fack.     3.  By  file  left 
(or  right).     4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

To  countermarch  a  column  closed  in  mass. 

352.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  the  countermarch  will  be 
executed  by  the  commands  and  means  su1)ioined. 

353.  The  column  bein^  supposed  formed  by  division,  right  in 
front,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   Countermarch.     2.   Battalion,  right  and  left — Fack.     3.   By  file  left 
and  right.     4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

354.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd  numbere<l 
divisions  will  caution  them  to  face  the  right,  and  the  chiefs  of  the 
others  to  face  to  the  lef\. 

355.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  divisions  will  face  to  the 
right,  and  the  even  to  the  left  ;  the  right  and  left  guides  of  all  the 
divisions  will  face  about  ;  the  chiefs  of  odd  divisions  will  Inisten 
to  their  right  and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  each 
chief  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  lea<ling  front  rank  man  of 
his  division;  the  eliiefs  of  even  divisions  will  hasten  to  their  left, 
and  cause  two  fihs  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  each  chief  place  him- 
self on  the  right  oi'  his  leading  front  lank  man. 

35G.  At  the  command  rtuirch,  all  the  divisions,  each  conducted 
by  its  chief,  will  step  off  nmartly,  the  guiijes  standing  fast;  each 
odd  division  will  wheul  by  file  to  IJio  lefl  around  its  right  i^uide  , 
each  even  divitiion  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  right  around  its  left 
guide,  each  divisioirso  Uiiiecting  its  march  as  to  arrive  behind  iti^ 


126 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    BATTALION. 


opposite  guide,  and  when  its  head  shall  be  up  with  this  guide,  the 
chief  will  halt  the  division,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front. 

357.  Each  division,  on  facing  to  the  front,  will  be  aligned  by  its 
chief  by  the  right ;  to  this  end,  the  chiefs  of  the  even  divisions 
will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  their  respective  divisions. 

358.  The  divisions  being  aligned,  each  chief  will  command, 
Front  ;  at  this,  the  guides  will  shift  to  their  proper  flanks. 

359.  In  a  column  with  the  left  in  front,  the  countermarch  will 
be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and  means ;  but  all  the  divi- 
sions will  be  aligned  by  the  left ;  to  this  end,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd 
divisions  will  hasten  to  the  left  of  their  respective  divisions  as  soon 
as  the  latter  shall  have  been  faced  to  the  front.  . 

360.  The  colonel,  placed  on  the  directing  flank,  will  supcrintendJ 
the  general  movement.  '        •  i 

361.  The  countermarch  being  ended,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will- 
always  place  himself  abreast  with  the  leading,  and  the  major^ 
abreast  with  the  rearmost  division. 

362.  In  a  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  the  countermarch 
will  be  executed  by  the  same  means  and  commands,  applying  to 
companies  what  is  prescribed  for  divisions. 

363.  The  countermarch  will  always  take  place  fi'om  a  halt, 
whether  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  or  at  full,  or  half  distance. 

Article  XI. — Being  in  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  to  forin 

divisions. 


i  i 


s 


■  I 


y  4py  4Pti4py  hf 


1-^3 


r^ 


364.  The  column  being  closed  in  mass,  right  in  front,  and  at  a 
halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  divisions,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Form  divisions.     2.  Left  companies,  left — Face.     3.  March  (or 
double  quick — March.) 

365.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  left  companies 
will  caution  them  to  face  to  the  left. 

366.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  companies  will  face  to  the 
left,  and  their  captains  will  place  themselves  by  the  side  of  their 
respective  left  guides. 

367.  The  right  companies,  and  their  captains,  will  stand  fast ; 
but  the  right  and  left  guides  of  each  of  these  companies  will  place 
themselves  respectively  before  the  right  and  left  ^les  of  the  com- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  127 

pauy,  both  guides  facing  to  the  right,  and  eac-li  resting  his  right 
arm  gently  against  tl\e  breast  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  tile,  in 
order  to  mark  the  direction. 

368.  At  the  command  7?uta7(,  tlie  left  eonipanies  onl}-  will  put 
themselves  in  march,  their  captains  standing  fast ;  as  each  shall 
see  that  his  company,  filing  ])as1,  has  nearly  fleared  the  column, 
he  will  command  : 

1.  Such  company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

369.  The  firist  command  will  be  given  when  the  company  shall 
yet  have  four  pa(;es  to  march  ;  the  second  at  the  instant  it  shall 
have  cleared  its  right  company :  and  the  third  immediately  after 
tbo  second. 

370.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  front,  the  files,. if  there  be 
intervals  between  them,  Avill  promptly  incline  to  the  right;  the 
captain  will  place  himself  on  the  loft  of  the  right  company  of  the 

^division,  and    align    himself  con-ectly  on  the  fronk   rank  of  that 
company. 

371.  The  left  gui<U'  will  ))lace  himself  at  the  same  time  before 
one  of  the  three  left  file.'?  of  his  cojiipany,  face  to  the  right,  and 
cover  correctly  the  guides  of  the  right  company  ;  the  moment  his 
oaptain  sees  him  established  on  the  direction,  he  Avill  command  : 

liight — Dre.ss. 

372.  At  this,  the  left  company  will  dress  forward  on  the  alignment 
of  the  right  company  ;  the  front  rank  man.  who  may  find  himself 
opposite  the  left  guide,  will,  without  preceding  his  rank,  rest  light- 
ly his  breast  against  the  right  arm  of  this  guide  ;  the  captain  of 
the  left  company  will  direct  its  alignment  on  this  man,  and  the 
alignment  being  a^^surcd.  he  will  command.  Front  ;  but  not  quit 
his  position. 

373.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  divisions  formed.  Avill  command  : 

Guides — PosT.s. 

374.  At  this,  the  guides  who  have  marked  the  fronts  of  divi- 
sions will  return  to  their  places  in  column,  the  left  guide  of  each 
right  company  jiassing  through  the  interval  in  the  center  of  the 
.division,  and  tlie  captains  will  jilacc  themselves  as  prescribed, 
No.  75. 

375.  The  colonel,  from  the  directing  flank  of  the  column,  will 
superintend  the  general  execution  of  the  movement. 

376.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  in.stead  of  at  a  halt,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  divisions,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Form  div won s.      2.  Left  companies^  by  the  left  flank.      3.  March 
(or  double  quick — Mahcu). 

377.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  right  companies 
will  command,  ^f^lrl:  time,  the  eajitains  of  the  left  companies  will 
OAiUion  their  companies  \.o  fare  by  the  left  flank. 

378.  At  the  third  command,  the  right  companies  will  mark 
time,  the  loft    e^mpanios   will    {nco  to  the  U-ft  ;   Uie  captainn  of  the 


128 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   BATTALION. 


left  companies  will  each  see  his  company  tile  past  him,  and  wher> 
it  has  cleared  the  column,  will  command : 

Such  company  by  the  rujht  flank — March. 

As  soon  as  the  divisions  are  formed,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

4.  Forxcard.     5.  March. 

379.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  column  will  resume  the  gait  ;*« 
which  it  was  marching  previeus  to  the  commencement  of  the 
movement.  The  guides  of  each  division  will  remain  on  the  right 
and  left  of  their  respective  companies  ;  the  left  guide  of  the  right 
company  will  pass  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  before  the  two  com- 
panies are  united  ;  the  right  guide  of  the  left  company  will  step 
into  the  rear  rank.  The  captains  will  place  themselves  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  75. 

Being  in  column  at  full  or  half  distance  to  form  dicisions. 


h  y 


h 


=n 


o  y 


g 


.380.  If  the  column  be  at  a  halt,  and,  instead  of  being  closed  in 
mass,  is  at  full  or  half  distance,  divisions  will  be  formed  in  the 
same  manner  ;  but  the  captains  of  the  left  companies,  if  the  move- 
ment be  made  in  quick  time,  after  commanding  Front,  will  each 
place  himself  before  the  center  of  his  company,  and  command:  1. 
Such  company,  forward.  2.  Guide  right.  3.  March.  If  the  move- 
ment be  made  in  double  quick  time,  each  will  command  as  soon  as 
his  company  has  cleared  the  column  : 

1.  Such  company  by  the  right  Jlank.     2.  March. 

381.  The  right  guide  of  each  left  company  will  so  direct  his 
march  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  right 
company.     The  left  company  being  neai'ly  up  with  the  rear  rank 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION.  12^ 


of  the  right  company,  its  captain  will  halt  it,  and  the  movenaent 
will  be  finished  as  prescribed,  No.  371,  and  follovving. 

382.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  movement  will  be  executed  by 
inverse  means :  the  right  companies  will  conform  themselves  to 
what  is  proscribed  above  for  the  lett  companies  :  and  the  two  guides, 
placed  respectively,  before  the  right  and  left  files  of  each  left  com- 
pany, will  face  to  the  left.  At  the  command,  Guides^  posts,  given 
by  the  colonel,  the  guides,  who  have  marked  the  front  of  divisions, 
and  the  captains,  will  quickly  retake  their  places  in  the  col- 
umn. 

383.  If  the  column  be  marching  at  full  distance,  the  divisions 
will  be  formed  as  prescribed,  No.  196.  If  it  be  marching  at  half 
distance,  the  formation  will  take  place  by  the  commands  and  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  indicated  No.  376;  if  the  column  be 
marching  in  double  quick  time,  the  companies  which  should  mark 
time  will  march  in  quick  time  by  the  command  of  their  captains. 

TART  FOURTH. 

Article  II. — Different  modes  of  passing  from    column   at  full  dis- 
tance into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)  ^ 

2.  On  the  ri<j:ht  (or  left)         t   *    r         ^  i    ♦*.! 

„    -K,  J  *'      ^  (■    Into  line  of  battle. 

3.  Forward,  | 

4.  Faced  to  the  rear,         J 

1.  Column    at   full  distance.,  right   in  front,  to   the  left  into  line  of 

battle. 
300.  A  column,  right  in  front,  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  form  it  to  the   left  into  line,  he  will  assure  the  posi- 
tions of  the  gufdes  by  the  means  previously   indicated,  and  then 
command  : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

391.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  of  the  leading  com- 
pany will  hasten  to  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  left 
guides  of  the  column,  face  to  them,  and  place  himself  so  as  to  be 
opposite  to  one  of  the  three  right  files  of  his  company,  when  they 
shall  be  in  line  :  he  will  be  assured  in  this  position  by  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel. 

392.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains, 
the  left  front  rank  man  of  each  company  will  face  to  the  left,  and 
rest  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  his  guide  ;  the  com- 
panies will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principle  of  wheeling  from  a 
halt,  conforming  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  school  of  the 
company.  No.  239:  each  captain  will  turn  to  his  company,  to  ob- 
serve the  execution  of  the  movement,  and.  when  the  right  of  the 
company  shall  arrive  at  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Such  company.      2.  ITait. 

393.  The  company  being  halted,  the   captain  will  place  himself 
9 


)^'«a7>^i^.  ...,,       wr<r*.'7r* 


130  SCHOOL   OF    THE   BATTALION. 


on  the  line  by  the  side  of  the  left  front  rank  man  of  the  company 
next  on  the  right,  align  himself  correctly,  and  command  : 

3.  Right — Dress. 

394.  At  this  command,  the  company  Avill  dress  np  between  the 
captain  and  the  front  rank  man  on  its  left,  the  captain  directing 
the  alignment  on  that  man  ;  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  the 
right  company,  who  finds  himself  opposite  to  its  right  guide, 
will  lightly  rest  his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of  this  guide. 

395.  Each  captain,  having  aligned  his  company,  will  command. 
Front,  and  the  colonel  will  add  : 

Guides — Posts. 

396.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  return  to  their  places  in 
line  of  battle,  each  passing  through  the  nearest  captain's  interval ; 
to  permit  him  to  pass,  the  captain  will  momentarily  step  before 
the  first  file  of  his  company,  and  the  covering  sergeant  behind  the 
same  file.  Tliis  rule  is  general  for  all  the  formations  into  line  of  bat- 
tle. 

397.  When  comj^anies  form  line  of  battle,  file  closers  will  always 
place  themselves  exactly  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  which  will 
sufficiently  assure  their  alligumont, 

398.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  the  colonel,  lieuten- 
ant-colonel, and  major,  as  well  as  the  adjutant  and  sergeant-ma- 
jor, will  return  to  their  respective  places  in  line  of  battle.  This 
rule  is  general  for  all  the  formations  into  line  of  battle ;  nevertheless, 
the  battalion  being  in  the  school  of  elementary  instruction,  the 
colonel  will  go  to  any  point  he  may  deem  necessary. 

399.  A  column,  with  the  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  to  the  right 
into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same  principles ;  the  left  guide 
of  the  left  company  will  ])lace  himself,  at  the  first  command,  on 
the  direction  of  the  right  guides,  in  a  manner  corresponding  to 
what  is  prescribed.  No.  371,  for  the  right  guide  of  the  right  com- 
pany. 

400.  At  the  command  guides,  posts,  the  captains  will  take  their 
places  in  line  of  battle  as  well  as  the  guides.  This  rule  is  general 
for  all  formations  into  line  of  battle  in  xcldch  the  companies  are  aligned 
by  the  left. 

401.  A  column  by  division  may  form  itself  into  line  of  battle  by 
the  same  commands,  and  means,  but  observing  what  follows  :  if 
the  right  be  in  front,  at  the  command  lialt,  given  by  the  chiefs  of 
division,  the  left  guide  of  each  right  company  will  place  himself 
on  the  alignment  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  files  on  the  left  of 
his  company;  the  left  guide  of  the  first  company  will  be  assured 
on  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant-colonel ;  the  left  guides  of  the 
other  right  companies  will  align  themselves  correctly  on  the  divi- 
sion guides ;  to  this  end,  the  division  guides  (on  the  alignment) 
will  invert,  and  hold  their  pieces  up  perpendicularly  before  the 
center  of  their  bodies,  at  the  command  left  into  line,  wheel.  If  the 
column  by  division  be   with   the  left  in  front,  the  right  guides  of 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION.  131 

left  companies  will  conform  themselves  to  what  has  just  been  pro- 
scribed for  the  left  guides  of  right  companies,  and  place  them- 
selves on  the  line  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  right  files  of  their 
respective  companies. 

402.  A  column  in  march  will  be  formed  into  line,  without  halt- 
ing, by  the  same  commands  and  means.  At  the  command  march, 
the  guides  will  halt  in  their  places,  and  the  licutcnant-colonol  will 
promptly  rectify  their  positions. 

403.  If,  in  forming  the  column  into  line,  tiie  colonel  should  wish 
to  move  forward,  without  halting,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  companies^  left  xcliecl.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

404.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains, 
©ach  company  will  Avhcel  to  the  left  on  a  fixed  pivot,  as  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  2(51  ;  the  left  guides  Avill  step 
back  into  the  rank  of  file  closers  before  the  wheel  is  completed, 
and  when  the  right  of  the  companies  shall  arrive  near  the  line, 
the  colonel  will  con\mand  : 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.  Guide  center. 

405.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant  the  wheel  is 
completed,  the  companies  will  march  directly  to  tlie  front.  At 
the  fifth  command,  the  color  and  the  general  guides  will  move  ra- 
pidly six  paces  to  the  front.  The  colonel  will  assure  the  direction 
of  the  color ;  the  captains  of  companies  and  the  men  will,  at  once, 
conform  themselves  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line  of  bat- 
Mo,  to  be  hereinafter  indicated.  No.  587,  and  following. 

406.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  column  Ictl  in 
front. 

Column  at  full  distance,  on  the  right  (or  on  the  left),  into  line  of 

battle. 

414.  A  column  by  company,  at  full  distance  and  right  in  front, 
having  to  form  itself  on  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel 
will  indicate  to  the  lieutenant-colonel  a  little  in  advance,  the  point 
of  oppiii,  or  rest,  for  the  right,  as  well  as  the  point  of  direction  to 
tlie  left;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  hasten  with  two  markers,  and 
establish  them  in  the  following  manner  on  the  direction  indi- 
cated. 

415.  The  first  marker  will  be  phu-ed  at  the  point  ofappui  for  the 
right  front  rank  man  of  the  lea^ling  company  ;  the  second  will  in- 
dicate the  point  where  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  same  corn- 
pan}'  will  rest  when  in  line  ;  they  will  be  placed  so  as  to  present 
the  right  shoulder  to  the  btttalion  when  formed. 

41  n.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  eolonel   will  command  : 


132 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION. 


1.  On  the  right,  into  line.     2.  Battalion,  guide  right. 


^miMJiiii/jiiiHiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiij 


417.  At  the  second  command,  the  right  will  becomo  the  direct- 
ing flank,  and  the  touch  of  the  elbow  will  be  to  that  side ;  the 
right  guide  of  the  leading  company  will  march  straight  forward 
until  up  with  the  turning  point,  and  each  following  guide  will 
march  in  the  trace  of  the  one  immediately  preceding. 

418.  The  leading  company  being  nearly  up  with  the  first  mark- 
er, its  captain  will  command  :  1.  Right  turn,  and  when  the  compan}^ 
is  precisely  up  with  this  marker,  he  will  add  :  2.  March. 

419.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  tui-n  to  the  right; 
the  right  guide  will  so  direct  himself  as  to  bring  the  man  next  to 
him  opposite  to  the  right  marker,  and  when  at  three  paces  from 
him,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  First  company.      2.  Halt. 

420.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt ;  the  files, 
not  yet  in  line,  will  form  promptly;  the  left  guide  will  retire  as  a 
file  closer  ;  and  the  captain  will  then  command  : 

3.  Right — Dress. 

421.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  align  itself;  the  two 
men  who  find  themselves  opposite  to  the  two  markers,  will  each 
lightly  rest  his  breast  against  the  right  arm  of  his  marker  ;  the 
captain,  passing  to  the  right  of  the  front  rank,  will  direct  the 
alignment  on  these  two  men.  These  rules  are  general  for  all  succes- 
sive formations. 

422.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march  straight  for- 
ward ;  when  arrived  opposite  to  the  left  flank  of  the  preceding 
company,  it  will  turn  to  the  right,  and  bo  formed  on  the  line  of 
battle,  as  has  just  been  prescribed ;  the  right  guide  will  direct 
himself  so  as  to  come  upon  that  line  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the 
left  of  the  first  company. 

423.  At  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  b'ne  of  battle,  the 
company  will  be  halted  by  its  captain,  who  will  place  himself 
briskly  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  preceding  com- 
pany, and  align  himself  correctly  on  its  front  rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  133 

424.  The  left  guide  will,  at  the  same  time,  place  himself  before 
one  of  the  three  left  files  of  hie  company,  and,  facing  to  the  right, 
he  will  place  himself  accurately  on  the  direction  of  the  two  mark- 
ers of  the  preceding  compan}''. 

425.  The  captain  will  then  command  : 

Right — Dress. 

426.  At  this  command,  the  second  company  will  dress  forward 
on  the  line  :  the  captain  will  direct  its  alignment  on  the  front  rank 
man  who  has  rested  his  breast  against  the  left  guide  of  the  com- 
pany. 

427.  The  following  companies  will  thus  come  successively  to 
form  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle,  each  conforming  itself  to 
what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  one  next  to  the  right  ;  and 
when  they  shall  all  be  established,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

428.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  take  their  places  in  line 
of  battle,  and  the  markers  placed  before  the  right  company  will 
retire. 

429.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  cause  the  movement  to  be  executed  in  double  quick 
time,  he  will  add  the  command  :  Double  quick — March.  At  the 
command  march,  all  the  companies  will  take  the  double  quickstep, 
and  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  417,  and 
following. 

430.  The  colonel  Avill  follow  up  the  formation,  passing  along  the 
front,  and  being  always  opposite  to  the  company  about  to  turn  :  it 
is  thus  that  he  will  be  the  better  able  to  sec  and  to  correct  the  er- 
ror that  would  result  from  a  conimand  given  too  soon  or  too  late  to 
the  preceding  company. 

431.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will,  with  the  greatest  care,  assure 
the  direction  of  the  guides;  to  this  end,  the  instant  that  the  mark- 
ers arc  estal)lished  for  the  leading  company,  he  will  move  a  little 
beyond  the  point  at  which  the  left  of  the  next  company  will  rest, 
establish  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  mark- 
ers, and  asssure  the  guide  of  the  second  company  on  this  direction  ; 
this  guide  being  assured,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself 
farther  to  the  rear,  in  order  to  assiire,  in  like  manner,  the  guide  of 
the  third  company,  and  so  on  successively,  to  the  left  of  the  bat- 
talion. In  assuring  the  guides  in  their  positions  on  the  line  of 
battle,  he  will  take  care  to  let  them  tirst  place  themselves,  and  con- 
fine himself  to  rectifying  their  ))OHitionH  if  (hey  do  not  cover  accu- 
rately, and  at  the  proper  distance,  the  preceding  guides  or  mark- 
ers.    This  rule  is  general  for  all  surressive  format iotis. 

432.  A  column,  left  in  fronl,  will  form  itself  on  the  left  into  line 
of  battle  according  to  the  same  principles  ;  the  captains  will  go  to 
the  left  of  their  respective  companies  to  align  them,  and  shift  af- 
terwards to  their  proper  flanks,  as  proscribed  No.  40(>. 


134  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION, 


Colmnn  at  full  distance,  forward  into  line  of  battle. 


\        \  \        \       yy 


440.  A  coluinn  being  by  company,  at  fall  distance,  right  in  front, 
and  at  a  halt,  M^hen  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  forward  into 
line,  he  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415,  and 
then  command  : 

1.  Forward  into  line.      2.    By  company,  left  half  wheel.      3.    March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

441.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company 
will  add — guide  right,  put  the  company  in  march,  halt  it  three  paces 
from  the  markers,  and  align  it  against  the  latter  by  the  right. 

442.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  other  companies  will  wheel 
to  the  left  on  fixed  pivots ;  and,  at  the  instant  the  colonel  shall 
judge,  according  to  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle,  that  the  com- 
i^anies  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will  command  : 

4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 

443.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies,  ceasing  to  wheel,  will 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  135 

march  strai£ijlit  forward ;  and  at  the  sixth,  the  men  will  touch  el- 
bows toward  the  rij^ht.  The  ri<:;ht  guide  of  the  second  company, 
who  is  nearest  to  tlie  line  of  battle,  Avill  march  straight  forward ; 
each  succeeding  right  guide  will  follow  the  file  inimediately  before 
him  at  the  cessation  of  the  wheel. 

444.  The  second  comj^aii}-  having  arrived  opposite  to  the  left 
file  of  the  first,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  or- 
der to  approach  the  line  of  battle  ;  and  when  its  right  guide  shall 
be  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt. 

455.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt;  the  files 
not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide  ^y\\\  como  into  it  promptly,  the  left 
guide  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  so  as  to  be  opposite 
to  one  of  the  three  files  on  the  left  of  the  company;  and,  as  soon 
as  he  is  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant-colonel,  the  cap- 
tain, having  placed  himself  accurately  on  the  line  of  battle,  will 
command  : 

3.    Eight — Dress. 

446.  At  the  instant  that  the  guide  of  the  second  company  begins 
to  turn  to  the  right,  the  guide  of  the  third,  ceasing  to  follow  the 
file  inimcdiatoly  before  him,  will  march  straight  forward  ;  and, 
when  he  shall  arrive  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  second,  his  captain 
will  cause  the  company  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach 
the  line  of  battle,  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  and  align  it 
by  the  right,  as  prescribed  for  the  second  company. 

447.  Each  following  company  will  execute  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  third,  as  the  preceding  company  shall  turn  to  the 
right,  in  order  to  approach  the  line  of  battle. 

448.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

449.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  Avill  observe,  in  this  for- 
mation, what  is  prescribed  for  them  on  the  right  into  line. 

450.  A  column  left  in  front,  Avill  fi)rm  itself  forward  into  line  of 
battle,  according  to  the  same  jjrinoiples,  and  by  inverse  means. 

451.  "When  a  column  by  company  at  full  distance,  right  in  front, 
and  in  march,  shall  arrive  behind  the  right  of  the  line  on  which  it 
is  to  form  into  battle,  the  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will  con- 
form themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415. 

452.  The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  at  company  dis- 
tance from  the  two  markers  csta1>lishe<l  on  the  line,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.   Forward  vii<>  Imr.      2.    Ihj  rowpdny^  left  half  irhtrl.      3.      Makch 
(or  double  quick — March). 

453.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first  company  will 
command.  Guide  right,  and  caution  it  to  march  directly  to  the 
front;  the  captains  of  the  other  companies  will  caution  them  to 
wheel  to  the  left. 


136  SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION. 

454.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains, 
the  first  company  will  continue  to  march  to  the  front,  taking  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  right.  Its  chief  will  halt  it  at  three  paces 
from  the  markers,  and  align  it  by  the  right.  The  other  compan- 
ies will  wheel  to  the  left  on  fixed  pivots,  and  at  the  instant  the  col- 
onel shall  judge  that  they  have  wheeled  sufficiently,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 

455.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  will  cease  to  wheel 
and  move  forward.  At  the  sixth,  they  will  take  the  touch  of  el- 
bows to  the  right.  The  movement  will  be  executed  as  jJreviously 
explained. 

456.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  the  column  forward  into 
line,  and  to  continue  to  march  in  this  order,  he  will  not  cause 
markers  to  be  established ;  the  movement  will  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time,  by  the  same  commands  and  means,  but  with  the 
following  modifications. 

457.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first  company 
yviU.  add  quick  time  after  the  command  guide  right.  At  the  second 
command,  the  first  company  will  continue  to  march  in  quick  time, 
and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right ;  its  chief  will  im- 
mediately place  himself  on  its  right,  and  to  assure  the  march,  will 
take  points  of  direction  to  the  front.  The  captain  of  the  second 
company  will  cause  his  company  to  take  the  same  gait  as  soon  as 
it  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with  the  first,  and  will  also  move  to  the 
right  of  his  company ;  the  captains  of  the  third  and  fourth  com- 
panies will  execute  successively  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  second.  The  companies  will  preserve  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  right,  until  the  command,  guide  center. 

458.  When  the  color  company  shall  have  entered  the  line,  the 
colonel  will  command,  guide  center.  At  this  command,  the  color- 
bearer  and  the  right  general  guide  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in 
advance  of  the  line.  The  colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of  the 
color-bearer.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  the  right  companies  will 
immediately  conform  themselves  to  the  princijjles  of  the  march  in 
line  of  battle.  The  left  companies  and  the  left  general  guide,  as 
they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  also  conform  to  the  same  principles. 
If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  when  the  last 
company  shall  have  arrived  on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  cause  the 
double  quick  to  be  resumed. 

459.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  movement  be  entirely  comple- 
ted, before  halting  the  battalion.  As  soon  as  the  part  of  the  bat- 
talion already  formed  shall  have  arrived  on  the  line  of  battle,  the 
colonel  will  halt  the  battalion  ;  the  companies  not  in  line  will  each 
complete  the  movement. 


SCHOOL  OF    THE    BATTALION.  137 

Column  at  full  distance^  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle. 


«1 — 

--P      / 

/ 
/ 

/     . 

■?      ! 

M 

/          / 

1 

¥       /         /          / 

/■I-    ■/.  -'■/ 


t: 


466.  A  column  bein^  by  company,  at  full  distance,  right  in  front, 
and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  line  faced 
to  the  rear,  he  anrl  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  conform  themselves 
to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  414  and  41.5.  and  the  colonel  will  then 
command  : 

1.  Jnio  line,  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  right — Face.     3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

467.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company 
will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and  put  it  in  march,  catising  it  to 
"wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and  direct  its  march  towards  the  line  of 
battle  which  it  will  pass  in  rear  of  the  left  marker;  the  first  file 
having  passed  three  paces  lnyond  the  line,  the  company  wmII  wheel 
again  by  file  to  the  left,  in  order  to  place  itself  in  rear  of  the  two 
markers  ;  being  in  this  position,  its  captain  will  halt  it,  face  it  to 
the  front,  and  align  it  by  the  right  against  the  markers. 

468.  At  the  second   command,  all   the  other  conip.Tnies  will   face 


138  SCHOOL   OF  THE  BATTALION. 

to  the  right,  each  captain  placing  himself  by  the  side  of  his  right 
guide. 

469.  At  the  command  march,  the  companies  will  put  themselves 
in  movement ;  the  left  guide  of  the  second,  who  is  nearest  to  the 
line  of  battle,  will  hasten  in  advance  to  mark  that  line  ;  he  will 
place  himself  on  it  as  prescribed  above  for  successive  formations, 
and  thus  indicate  to  his  captain  the  point  at  which  he  ought  to 
pass  the  lino  of  battle,  by  three  paces,  in  order  to  wheel  by  file  to 
the  left,  and  then  to  direct  his  company  parallelly  to  that  line. 

470.  As  soon  as  the  first  file  of  this  company  shall  have  arrived 
near  the  left  file  of  the  preceding  one  already  on  the  line  of  battle, 
its  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Second  company .     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.     4.  Right — Dress. 

471.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  company  shall 
yet  have  four  paces  to  take  to  reach  the  halting  point. 

472.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt. 

473.  At  the  third,  the  comj)any  will  face  to  the  front,  and  if 
there  be  openings  between  the  files,  the  latter  will  promptly  close 
to  the  right;  the  captain  will  immediatel}^  place  himself  by  the 
side  of  the  man  on  the  loft  of  the  preceding  company,  and  align 
himself  on  its  front  rank. 

474.  The  fourth  command  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No. 
426. 

475.  The  following  companies  will  be  conducted  and  established 
on  the  line  of  battle  as  just  prescribed  for  the  second,  each  regu- 
lating itself  by  the  one  that  precedes  it ;  the  left  guides  will  detach 
themselves  in  time  to  precede  their  respective  companies  on  the 
line  by  twelve  or  fifteen  paces,  and  each  place  himself  so  as  to  be 
opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company,  when  in  line. 
If  the  movement  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  the  moment  it 
is  commenced,  all  the  left  guides  will  detach  themselves  at  the 
same  time  from  the  column,  and  will  move  at  a  run,  to  establish 
themselves  on  the  line  of  battle. 

476.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

477.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel,  in  this  formation,  will 
each  observe  what  is  prescribed  for  him  in  that  of  on  the  right,  into 
line  of  battle. 

478.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  faced  to  the  rear 
into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  jjrinciples  and  by  inverse 
means. 

479.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  should  arrive  in  front  of 
the  right  of  the  line  on  w^hich  it  is  to  form  into  battle,  the  colonel 
and  lieutenant-colonel  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos. 
414  and  415. 

480.  When  the  head  of  the  column  shall  be  nearly  at  company 
distance  from  the  two  markers  established  on  the  line,  the  colonel 
will  command  : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  139 

1.  Into  \ine^  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  Battalion,  by  the  riqht  flanh.     3. 
Maucu  (or  donhle  quick — ]\[ARcn). 

481.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  \\\\\  caution  tlicir  com- 
panies to  face  hy  tlie  riglit  flank. 

482.  At  the  command  march.  I>riskly  repeated  by  the  captainR  of 
companief=i,  all  the  companies  will  face  to  the  right;  the  first  com- 
pany ^vill  then  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and  be  directed  by  its 
captain  a  little  to  the  rear  of  the  left  marker;  then  pass  three 
paces  beyond  the  line,  and  wheel  again  by  file  to  the  left;  having 
arrived  on  the  line,  the  captain  will  halt  the  company,  and  align 
it  by  the  right.  The  remaining  part  of  the  movement  will  be 
executed  as  heretofore  explained. 

483.  The  foregoing  j-^rinciples  are  applicable  to  a  column,  left  in 
fi'ont. 

484.  As  the  companies  approach  the  line  of  battle,  it  is  neces- 
sary that  their  captains  should  so  direct  the  march  as  to  cross  that 
line  a  little  in  rear  of  their  respective  guides,  who  are  faced  to  the 
basis  of  the  formation  ;  hence  each  guide  ought  to  detach  himself 
in  time  to  find  himself  correctly  established  on  the  direction 
before  his  company  shall  come  up  with  him. 

Article  III. — Formation  in  line  of  battle  by  tmo  movements. 

485.  If  a  column  by  company,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  find 
itself  in  part  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  the  colonel  should  think 
proper  to  form  line  of  battle  before  all  the  companies  enter  the 
new  direction,  the  formation  will  be  executed  in  the  following 
manner : 

486.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  column  has  arrived  behind  the 
line  of  l)attle,  and  that  five  companies  have  entered  the  new  direc- 
tion. The  colonel  having  assured  the  guides  of  the  first  five  com- 
panies on  the  direction,  will  command  : 

1.  Left  into  line,  icliccl.     2.   Jliree  rear  companies,  foruard  into  line. 

487.  At  the  .second  command,  the  chief  of  each  of  the  rear 
companies  will  command  :  By  company,  left  half  wheel ;  and  the 
colonel  will  add  : 

3.  31  ARCH  (or  double  quick — March.) 

488.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  five  companies 
will  form  themselves  to  the  left,  into  line  of  battk,  and  the  three  la«t 
forxcard,  into  line  of  battle,  by  the  means  prescriln-d  for  these 
respective  formations ;  each  captain  of  the  three  rear  companies 
will,  when  his  company  shall  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  command: 

1.  Foruard.     2.  March.     3.  Guide  right. 

489.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   To  the  left,  and  forward  into  line.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 

March.) 

490.  At  the  first  command,  the  captAins  of  those  companies 
which  have  not  entered  on  the  new  direction,  will  cf>mmand  :  By 


140  SCHOOL  OF   THE  BATTALION. 

company,  left  half  ivheel.  At  the  command  inarch,  briskly  repeated, 
the  first  five  companies  will  form  left  into  line,  and  the  last  three 
forward  into  line,  as  prescribed  for  these  respective  formations. 
Those  captains  who  form  their  companies  forward  into  line  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  488.  ^ 

491.  If  the  colonel  should  wish,  in  forming  the  battalion  into  s!!^ 
line,  to  march  it  immediately  forward,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  company  to  the  left,  and  forward  into  line.     2.  March. 

^,   492.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain,  Avhose  company  is  not 
yet  in  the  new  direction,  will  command:     1.  By  company,  left  half  ^  -^ 
wheel;  2.  Double  quick.     At  the  command  jnarcA,  briskly  repeated ^ - 
by  the  captains,  the  companies  not  in  the  new  direction  will  exe-  't^^ 
cute  what  is  prescribed  above  for  forming  forward  into  line  while 
marching;  each  of  the  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  < 
a  fixed  pivot,  and  when  the  right  of  these  companies  shall  arrive  \-^ 
on  the  line,  the  colonel  Avill  command :  ""^ 

3.  Forward.     4.  March.     5.  Guide  center.  '" "' 

493.  The  fifth  command  will  be  given  when  the  color-bearer 
arrives  on  the  line,  if  not  already  there.  v 

494.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  the  -^ 
colonel  will  cause  quick  time  to  bo  taken  before  commencing  the  S 
movement.  -r\ 

495.  If,  instead  of  arriving  behind,  the  column  should  arrive 
before  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Left  into  line,  ivheel.     2.   Three  rear  companies  into  line,  faced  to^^ 

the  rear.  a 

496.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  the  three  ^ 
rear  companies  will  command  :     1.  Such  company ;  2.  Bight — Face. 
The  colonel  will  then  add  : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.)  ■     ^ 

497.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  five  companies 
will  form  themselves  to  the  left,  into  line  of  battle,  and  the  three  last 
faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle,  by  the  means  prescribed  for 
these  respective  formations. 

498.  If  the  column  bo  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.   To  the  left,  and  into  line  faced  to  the  rear.     2.  March  (or  double 

quick — March.) 

499.  The  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  Nos.  391,  480, 
and  following. 

500.  These  several  movements  in  a  column,  left  in  front,  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means 


■^\ 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   BATTALION.  l^k ' 

_/ .. : „— r-^ ■ *-,  ■ 

Article  IV. — Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  hfllf  distance, 
into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  riirht)  '] 

2  On  the  right  (or  loft)  [.^^^^  jj,,^  of  battle. 

3,  Porwurd,  by  deployment. 

4.  Faced  to  the  rear,  J 

Ist.   Column  at  half  distance,  to  the  left  (or  right)  into  line  of  battle.        ^ 

501.  A  column  at  half  distance  having  to  form  itself  to  the  lefl 
(or  right)  into  lijic  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  take  dis- 
tances by  one  of  the  means  prescribed.  Article  IX,  Part  Third,  of 
this  school;  which  being  executed,  he  will  form  the  column  into 
line  of  battle,  as  has  been  indicated,  No.  390,  and  following. 

502.  If  a  column  by  company,  at  half  distance,  be  in  march,  and 
it  be  necessary  to  form  rapidly  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  By  the  rear  of  column  left  (or  rigfit)  into  line,  icheel.  2.  March 
(or  double  quick — March.) 

50o.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  general  guide  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  front,  and  place  himself  a  little  bej-ond  the  point 
where  the  head  of  the  column  will  rest,  and  on  the  prolongation  of 
the  guides.  The  captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  command  : 
Left  info  line,  udiecl ;  the  other  captains  will  caution  their  compa- 
nies to  continue  to  march  to  the  front. 

504.  At  the  command  inarch,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captain  of 
the  eighth  company,  the  guide  of  this  company-  will  halt  short,  and 
the  company  will  wheel  to  the  left,  conforming  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  wheeling  from  a  halt;  when  its  right  shall  arrive 
near  the  line,  the  captain  will  halt  the  comjiany  and  align  it  by  the 
left.  The  other  captains  will  place  themselves  briskly  on  the  flank 
of  the  column  ;  when  the  captain  of  the  seventh  sees  there  is  suf- 
ficient distance  bctAveen  his  company  and  the  eighth  to  form  the 
latter  into  line,  he  will  command:  Left  into  line,  ivhecl — March; 
the  left  guide  will  halt  short,  and  facing  to  the  rear,  will  place 
himself  on  the  line  ;  the  company  will  wheel  to  the  left,  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  will  face  to  the  left,  and  place  his 
breast  against  the  left  arm  of  the  guide  ;  the  captain  will  halt  the 
company  when  it<  right  shall  arrive  near  the  line,  and  will  align  it 
by  tne  loA.  The  other  companies  will  conform  successively  to 
what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  seventh. 

505.  Each  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  of  his  company  on 
the  left  man  in  the  front  rank  of  the  company  next  on   his  right. 

506.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  be  watchful  that  the  leading 
guide  marches  accurately  on  the  prolongation  of  the  line  of  battle, 
and  directs  himself  on  the  right  general  guide.  The  major,  placed 
in  the  rear  of  the  left  guide  of  the  eighth  company,  will,  as  soon 
as  the  guide  of  the  seventh  company  is  established  on  the  direc- 
tion, hasten  in  rear  of  the  guides  of  the  other  companies,  ho  as  to 
a'isure  each  of  them  in  succession  on  the  line. 


142  SCHOOL  OF  THE   BATTALION. 


2d.   Coluiiiti  at  half  distance,  on  the  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  battle. 

507.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  form  itself  on  the  right  (or 
left)  into  line  of  battle,  as  prescribed  for  a  column  at  full  distance. 

3d.   Column  at  half  distance,  forward,  into  line  of  battle. 

508.  If  it  be  wished  to  form  a  column  at  half  distance,  forward 
into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  first  c;iasc  it  to  close  in  mass 
and  then  deploy  it  on  the  leading  company. 

4th.   Column  at  half  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle. 

509.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  be  formed  into  line  of  battle, 
faced  to  the  rear,  as  prescribeil  for  a  column  at  full  distance. 

Article  T. — Deployment  of  columns  closed  in  mass. 

510.  A  column  in  mass  may  be  formed  into  liric  of  battle; 

1.  Faced  to  the  front  by  the  deplo3'ment. 

2.  Faced  to  the  rear,  by  the  countermarch  and  the  deploy- 

ment. 

3.  Faced  to  the  right  and  faced  to  the  left,  by  a  change  of 

direction  by  the  flank,  and  the  deployment. 

511.  When  a  column  in  mass,  by  division,  arrives  behind  the 
line  on  which  it  is  intended  to  deplo}'  it,  the  colonel  will  indicate, 
in  advance,  to  the  lieutenant-colonel,  the  direction  of  the  line  of 
battle,  as  well  as  the  point  on  which  he  may  wish  to  direct  the 
column.  The  lieutenant-colonel  wiU  immediately  detatch  himself, 
with  two  markers,  and  establish  them  on  that  line,  the  first  at  the 
point  indicated,  the  second  a  littio  less  than  the  front  of  a  division 
from  the  first. 

512.  Deployments  will  always  be  made  upon  lines'  parallel,  and 
lines  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle;  consequently,  if  the  head 
of  the  column  be  near  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  commence 
by  establishing  the  direction  of  the  column  perpendicularly  to  that 
line,  if  it  be  not  already  so,  by  one  of  the  means  indicated,  No. 
244  and  following,  or  No.  307  and  following.  If  the  column  be  in 
march,  he  will  so  direct  it  that  it  may  arrive  exactly  behind  the 
markers,  perpendicularly  to  the  line  of  battle,  and  halt  it  at  three 
paces  from  that  line. 

513.  The  column,  right  in  front,  being  halted,  it  is  supposed  that 
the  colonel  wishes  to  deploy  it  on  the  first  division  ;  he  will  ordei* 
the  left  general  guide  to  go  to  a  j)oint  on  the  line  of  battle  a  littio 
beyond  tliat  at  which  the  left  of  the  battalion  will  rest  when  de- 
ployed, and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
markers  established  before  the  first  divisioji. 

514.  These  dispositions  being   made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   On  the  first  direction,  deploy  column.      2.  Battalion,  left — Face. 

515.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  oau- 
sion  it  to  standfast:  tfce  chiefs  of  the  three  other  divisions  will  re- 
mind them  that  they  will  have  to  face  to  the  left. 

51G.  At  the  second  command,  the  three  last  divisions  Avill  face 
to  the  left;  the  chief  of  each  division  will  place  himself  by  the  side 


SCHOOL  OF  THE    BATTALION. 


143 


-H  V 


yis-.e 


riyj. 


Tl 


^h: 


144  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

of  its  left  guide,  and  the  junior  captain  by  the  side  of  the  covering 
sergeant  of  the  left  companj-,  who  wilt  have  stepped  into  the  front 
rank. 

517.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  a 
third  marker  on  the  alignment  of  the  two  first,  opposite  to  one  of 
the  three  left  files  of  the  right  company,  first  division,  and  then 
place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle  a  few  paces  beyond  the  point  at 
which  the  left  of  the  second  division  will  rest. 

518.  The  colonel  will  then  command : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

510.  At  this  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  go  to 
its  right,  and  command  : 

Right — Dress. 

520.  At  this,  the  division  will  dress  up  against  the  markers;  the 
chief  of  the  division,  and  its  junior  captain,  will  each  align  the 
company  on  his  left,  and  then  command: 

Front. 

521.  The  three  divisions,  faced  to  the  left,  will  put  themselves  in 
march  ;  the  left  guide  of  the  second  will  direct  himself  parailelly  to 
the  line  of  battle  ;  the  left  guides  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions 
will  march  abreast  with  the  guide  of  the  second  ;  the  guides  of  the 
third  and  fourth,  each  preserving  the  prescribed  distance  between 
himself  and  the  guide  of  the  division  which  preceded  his- own  in 
the  column. 

522.  The  chief  of  the  second  division  will  not  follow  its  move- 
ment; he  will  see  it  file  by  him,  and  when  its  right  guide  shall  be 
abreast  with  him,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Second  division.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

523.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  division  shall 
yet  have  seven  or  eight  paces  to  march  ;  the  second,  when  the 
right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  the 
third  immediately  after  the  second. 

524.  At  the  second  command,  the  division  will  halt;  at  the  third, 
it  will  face  to  the  front,  and  if  there  be  openings  between  the  files, 
the  chief  of  the  division  will  cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed  to 
the  right ;  the  left  guides  of  both  companies  will  step  upon  the 
line  of  battle,  face  to  the  right,  and  place  themselves  on  the  direc- 
tion of  the  markers  established  before  the  first  division,  each  guide 
opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company. 

525.  The  division  having  faced  to  the  front,  its  chief  will  place 
himself  accurately  on  the  line  of  battle,  on  the  left  of  the  first  di- 
vision ;  and  when  he  shall  see  the  guides  assured  on  the  direction, 
he  will  command,  Right — Dress.  At  this,  the  division  will  be 
aligned  by  the  right  in  the  manner  indicated  in  the  first. 

526.  The  third  and  fom-th  divisions  will  continue  to  march :  at 
the  command  halt,  given  to  the  second,  the  chief  of  the  third  will  halt 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIOX.  146 

in  his  own  person,  place  himself  exactly'  o])po8ito  to  the  guide  of 
the  second,  after  this  division  shall  have  faced  to  the  front  and 
closed  its  files  ;  he  will  see  his  division  file  past,  and  when  his  right 
guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him,  he  will  command  : 

1.   Third  division.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

527.  As  soon  as  the  division  faces  to  the  front,  its  chief  will  place 
himself  two  paces  before  its  center,  andcdmmand  : 

1.   Third  division,  fonoard.     2.  Guide  right.     3.  March. 

528.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  march  toward  the 
line  of  battle;  the  right  guide  will  so  direct  himself  as  to  arrive 
by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  second  division,  and  when 
the  division  is  at  thi*ee  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  its  chief  will 
halt  it  and  align  it  by  the  right. 

529.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  conform  himself  (and 
the  chief  of  the  fifth,  if  there  be  a  fifth)  to  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  third. 

530.  The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

531.  At  this  coinmuud,  the  guides  will  resume  tiicir  pluees  in  line 
of  battle,  and  the  markers  will  retire. 

532.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
de})Joy  it  on  the  first  division  without  hailing  the  column,  ho  will 
make  the  di.spositions  indicated  Nus.  512  and  513,  and  when  the 
first  division  shall  arrive  at  three  paces  fi'om  the  line,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  On  the  first  division,  deploy  column.     2.  Battalion  by  the  left  flank. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — M.\rch). 

533.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
caution  it  to  halt,  and  will  command,  Pirst  division ;  the  other  chiefs 
will  caution  their  divisions  to  face  by  the  let\  flank. 

534.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
the  rear  divisions,  the  chief  ol"  the  first  divison  will  command, 
Halt,  and  will  align  his  division  by  the  right  against  the  markers  ; 
the  other  divisions  will  face  to  the  left,  their  chiefs  hastening  to  the 
left  of  their  divisions.  Tiie  seconcl  division  will  conform  its  move- 
ments to  wliat  is  prescribed  Xos.  522,  and  following.  Tiie  third 
and  fourth  divisions  will  execute  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  52G,  and 
following;  but  tlie  cliief  of  each  division  will  halt  in  his  own  person 
at  the  command  march,  given  by  the  chief  of  the  division  which 
precedes  him,  and  when  the  right  ol  his  division  arrives  abreast 
of  liim,  he  will  command: 

Such  division,  by  the  right  flank — March. 

535.  The  litutonant-colnncl  will  assure  the  position  of  the  guides, 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  431.  The  major  will  follow 
tlie  movement  abreast  with  the  fourth  division. 

10 


146  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

536.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  the  column  Avithout  halt- 
ing it,  and  to  continue  the  march,  the  markers  will  not  be  posted ; 
the  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and  the 
same  means  as  the  foregoing,  but  with  the  following  modifications : 

537.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
command,  1.  Guide  right.  2.  Quick  time.  At  the  command,  jDowi^e 
quick — March,  given  by  the  colonel,  the  first  division  will  march 
in  quick  time  and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right ;  the 
captains  will  jjlace  themselves  on  the  right  of  their  respective  com- 
panies ;  the  captain  on  the  right  of  the  battalion  will  take  points 
on  the  ground  to  assure  the  direction  of  the  march.  The  chief  of 
the  second  division  will  allow  his  division  to  file  past  him,  and  when 
he  sees  its  right  abreast  of  him,  he  will  command,  1.  Second  divi- 
sion, by  the  right  flank.  2.  March.  3.  Guide  right,  ni\d  when  this 
division  shall  arrive  on  the  alignment  of  the  first,  he  will  cause  it 
to  march  in  quick  time.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  de- 
ploy according  to  the  same  principles  as  the  second. 

538.  The  colonel,  lieutenant-colenel,  major  and  color-bearer  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  458. 

539.  The  colonel  will  see,  pending  the  movement,  that  the  prin- 
ciples just  prescribed  are  duly  observed,  and  particularly  that  the 
divisions,  in  deploying,  be  not  halted  too  soon  nor  too  late.  He 
will  correct  promptly  and  quickly  the  faults  that  may  be  commit- 
ted, and  prevent  their  propagation.  This  rule  is  general  for  all  de- 
ployments. 

540.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if,  instead  of  deploying  it  on 
the  first,  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  rearmost  divi- 
sion, he  will  cause  the  dispositions  to  made  indicated  No.  511,  and 
following  ;  but  it  will  be  the  right  general  guide  whom  he  will  send 
to  place  himself  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the  battal- 
ion will  rest  when  deployed. 

541.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

1.   On  the  fourth  (or  such)  division,  deploy  column.     2,  Battalion,  right 

— Face. 

542.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will 
caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  cau- 
tion them  that  they  will  have  to  face  to  the  right. 

543.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  three  divisions  will  face 
to  the  right ;  and  the  chief  of  each  will  place  himself  b}'  the  side 
of  its  right  guide. 

544.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  j)lace 
a  third  marker  between  the  first  two,  so  that  this  marker  may  be 
opposite  to  one  of  the  three  right  files  of  the  left  company  of  the 
division  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  then  place  himself  on  the  line 
of  battle  a  few  paces  beyond  the  point  at  which  the  right  of  the 
third  division  will  rest  when  deployed. 

545.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  147 

546.  At  this  command,  the  three  right  divisions  will  put  them- 
selves in  march,  the  guide  of  the  first  so  directing  himself  as  to  pass 
three  paces  within  the  line  marked  by  the  right  general  guide. 
The  chief  of  the  third  division  will  not  follow  its  movement;  he 
will  see  it  file  past,  halt  it  when  its  left  guide  shall  be  abreast  with 
him,  and  cause  it  to  fiicc  to  the  front;  and,  if  there  be  openings 
between  the  files,  he  will  cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the 
left. 

547.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he  sees  it  nearly  un- 
masked by  the  three  others  will  command  : 

1.     Fourth  division^  forward.     2.  Chiide  left.     3.  March. 

548.  At  the  command  anarch,  which  will  be  given  the  instant  the 
fourth  is  unmasked,  this  division  will  approach  the  lino  of  battle, 
and  when  at  three  paces  from  the  markers  on  that  line,  its  chief 
will  halt  it,  and  command  : 

Left — Dress. 

549.  At  this  command,  the  division  will  dress  forward  against 
the  markers;  the  chief  of  the  division  and  the  junior  captain  will 
each  align  the  company  on  his  right,  and  then  command  : 

Front. 

550.  The  instant  that  the  third  division  is  unmasked,  its  chief 
will  cause  it  to  approach  the  line  of  battle,  and  halt  it  in  the  man- 
ner just  prescribed  for  the  fourth. 

551.  The  moment  the  division  halts,  its  right  guide  and  the  cov- 
ering sergeant  of  its  left  company  will  step  on  the  line  of  battle, 
placing  themselves  on  the  prolongation  of  the  markers  established 
in  front  of  the  fourth  division  ;  as  soon  as  they  shall  be  assured  in 
their  positions,  the  division  will  be  aligned  as  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  fourth. 

552.  The  second  and  first  divisions  which  will  have  continued  to 
march,  will,  in  succession,  be  halted  and  aligned  by  the  left,  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  third  ;  the  chiefs  of  these  divisions  will  con- 
form themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  526.  The  second  being 
near  the  line  of  battle,  the  command  will  not  be  given  for  it  to 
move  on  this  line  but  it  will  be  dressed  up  to  it. 

553.  The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

554.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  division  and  the  guides  will 
resume  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  will  retire. 

555.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the  positions  of  the 
guides  by  the  means  indicated,  No.  431,  and  the  major  will  follow 
the  movement  abreast  with  the  fourth  division. 

556.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
deploy  it  on  the  fourth  division,  he  will  make  the  dispositions 
indicated.  No.  511  and  following;  and  when  the  head  of  the  col- 
umn shall  arrive  within  three  paces  of  the  line,  he  will  cproni|nd: 


148  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

1.  On  the  fourth  division,  deploy  column.     2.  Battalion,  by  the  right 

flank.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

557.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will 
caution  it  to  halt,  and  will  command,  Fourth  division ;  the  chiefs  of 
the  other  divisions  will  caution  their  divisions  to  face  to  the  right. 

558.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
the  first  three  divisions,  the  chief  of  the  fourth  will  command  : 
Halt.  The  first  three  divisions  will  face  to  the  right,  and  be 
directed  parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  each  of 
these  divisions  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  right  guide. 
The  chief  of  the  third  division  will  see  his  division  file  past  him, 
and  when  his  left  guide  is  abreast  of  him,  ho  will  halt  it,  and  face 
it  to  the  front.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he  shall  see 
it  nearly  unmasked,  will  command:    1.  Fourth  division,  forward; 

2.  Guide  left ;  3.  March  (or  double  quick — March).  The  division 
will  move  towards  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at  three  paces  from 
this  line,  it  will  be  halted  by  its  chief,  and  aligned  by  the  left. 

559.  The  chief  of  the  third  division  will  move  his  division  for- 
ward, conforming  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  fourth. 

560.  The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  first  divisions,  after  halting 
their  divisions,  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  552. 

561.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  dej^loy  on  the  fourth  division 
without  halting  the  column,  and  to  continue  to  march  forward,  he 
will  not  have  markers  posted,  and  the  movement  will  be  executed 
by  the  same  commands  and  the  same  means,  with  the  following 
modifications  :  the  fourth  division,  when  unmasked,  will  be  moved 
forward  in  quick  time,  and  will  continue  to  march,  instead  of  being 
halted,  and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  The  third 
division,  ©n  being  unmasked,  will  bo  moved  to  the  front  in  double 
quick  time,  but  when  it  arrives  on  the  alignment  of  the  fourth  it 
will  take  the  quick  step,  and  dress  to  the  left  until  the  command 
Guide  center,  is  given  by  the  colonel.  The  chiefs  of  the  second 
and  first  divisions  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  for 
the  third.  When  the  first  division  shall  arrive  on  the  line,  the 
colonel  may  cause  the  battalion  to  take  the  double  quick  step. 

562.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will  conform  to  what  has 
been  prescribed,  Nos.  458  and  459. 

563.  To  deploy  the  column  on  an  interior  division,  the  colonel 
will  cause  the  line  to  be  traced  b}^  the  means  above  indicated,  and 
the  general  guides  will  move  briskly  on  the  line,  as  2Drescribed, 
Nos.  513  and  540.  This  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  command : 
1.   On  such  division,  deploy  column.     2.    Battalion  outwards — Face. 

3.  March  (or  double  qxdck — March). 

564.  Whether  the  column  be  with  the  right  or  left  in  front,  the 
divisions  which,  in  the  order  in  battle,  belong  to  the  right  of  the 
directing  one,  will  face  to  the  right;  the  others,  except  the  direct- 
ing division,  will  face  to  the  left ;  the  divisions  in  front  of  the 
latter  will  deploy  by  the  means  indicated.  No.  542,  and  following; 
those  in  its  rear  will  deploy  as  is  jirescribed,  No.  513,  and  following. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  149 

565.  The  directing  division,  the  instant  it  finds  itself  unmasked, 
will  approach  the  lino  of  battle,  taking  the  guide  left  or  right, 
according  as  the  right  or  left  of  the  column  may  be  in  front. 
The  chief  of  this  division  will  align  it  by  the  directing  flank,  and 
then  step  back  into  the  rear,  in  order  momentarily  to  give  place  to 
the  chief  of  the  next  for  aligning  the  next  division. 

566.  The  lieutcnont  -  colonel  will  assure  the  positions  of  the 
guides  of  divisions,  which,  in  the  line  of  battle,  take  the  right  of 
fhe  directing  division,  and  the  major  will  assure  the  positions  of 
the  other  guides. 

567.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.   On  such  dunsion,  deploy  column.     2.  Battalion,  by  the  riqht  and 
left  flanks.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

568.  The  divisions  which  are  in  front  of  the  directing  one  will 
deplo}'  by  the  means  indicated,  Nos.  557,  and  following  ;  those  in 
rear,  as  prescribed.  No.  533,  and  following. 

569.  The  directing  division,  when  unmasked,  will  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed  for  the  fourth  division,  No.  558. 

570.  The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will  conform  to 
what  has  been  prescribed,  Nos.  458  and  459. 

571.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  deployments  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

PART     FIFTH. 
Article  II. —  Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

623.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  oblique,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

624.  At  the  first  command,  the  major  will  place  himself  in  front 
of,  and  faced  to  the  color-bearer. 

625.  At  the  command  march,  the  whole  battalion  will  take  the 
oblique  step.  The  companies  and  captains  will  strictly  observe 
the  principles  established  in  the  School  of  the  Company. 

626.  The  major  in  front  of  the  color-bearer  ought  to  maintain 
the  latter  in  a  line  with  the  center  corporal,  so  that  the  color- 
bearer  may  oblique  neither  more  nor  less  than  that  corporal.  He 
will  carefully  observe  also  that  they  follow  parallel  directions  and 
preserve  the  same  length  of  step. 

627.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  take  care  that  the  captainB  and 
the  three  corporals  in  the  center  keep  exactly  on  a  line  and  follow 
parallel  directions. 

628.  The  colonel  will  see  that  the  battalion  ])reserves  its  paral- 
lelism ;  he  will  exert  himself  to  prevent  the  files  from  opening  or 
crowding.  If  ho  perceive  the  lattvr  fault,  he  will  cause  the  files 
on  the  flank,  to  which  the  battalion  obliques,  to  open  out. 

629.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  direct  march  to  be  resume«i,  will 
ooramand  : 


150  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

630.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  resume  the  direct 
inarch.  The  major  will  place  himself  thirty  paces  in  front  of  the 
color-bearer,  and  face  to  the  colonel,  who  will  establish  him,  by  a 
signal  of  the  sword,  on  the  direction  which  the  color -bearer  ought 
to  pursue.  The  latter  will  immediately  take  two  points  on  the 
ground  between  himself  and  the  major. 

631.  In  resuming  the  direct  march,  care  will  be  taken  that  the 
men  do  not  close  the  intervals  which  may  exist  between  the  files  at 
once;,  it  should  be  done  almost  insensibly. 

Article  III. —  To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and 

to  align  it. 

635.  The  battalion,  marching  in  the  line  of  battle,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

636.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  halt ;  the  color- 
rank  and  the  general  guides  will  remain  in  front ;  but  if  the  colo- 
nel should  not  wish  immediately  to  resume  the  advance  in  line, 
nor  to  give  a  general  alignment,  he  will  command  : 

Color  and  general  guides — Posts. 

637.  At  this  command,  the  color-rank  and  general  guides  will 
retake  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  the  captains  in  the  left  wing 
will  shift  to  the  right  of  their  companies. 

638.  If  the  colonel  should  then  judge  it  necessary  to  rectify  the 
alignment,  he  will  command  ; 

Captains,  rectify  the  alignment. 

639.  The  captains  will  immediately  cast  an  eye  towards  the  cen- 
ter, align  themselves  accuratel}',  on  the  basis  of  the  alignment, 
which  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  see  well  directed,  and  then 
promptly  dress  their  respective  companies.  The  lieutenant-colo- 
nel will  admonish  such  captains  as  may  not  be  accurately  on  the 
alignment  by  the  command  :  Captain  of  (such)  company,  or  cap- 
tains of  (such)  companies,  move  up  or  fall  back. 

640.  But  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  the  battalion  a  gen- 
eral alignment,  either  parallel  or  oblique,  instead  of  rectifying  it 
as  above,  he  will  move  some  paces  outside  of  one  of  the  general 
guides  (the  right  will  here  be  supposed)  and  caution  the  right  gen- 
eral guide  and  the  color-bearer  to  face  him,  and  then  establish 
them  by  signal  of  the  sword,  on  the  direction  which  he  may  wish 
to  give  to  the  battalion.  As  soon  as  they  shall  be  correctly  estab- 
lished, the  left  general  guide  will  place  himself  on  their  direction, 
and  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  major.  The  color-bearer 
will  carry  the  color-lance  perpendicularly  between  his  eyes, and  the 
two  corporals  of  his  rank  will  return  to  their  places  in  the  front 
rank  the  moment  he  shall  face  to  the  colonel. 

641.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Guides — On  the  Line. 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    BATTALION. 


151 


642.  At  this  command,  the  right  guide  of  each  company  in  the 
right  wing,  and  the  left  guide  of  each  company  in  the  left,  will 
each  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  color-bearer,  and  the 
two  general  guides,  face  to  the  color-bearer,  place  himself  in  rear 
of  the  guide  who  is  next  before  him,  at  a  distance  equal  to  the 
front  of  his  company,  and  align  himself  upon  the  color-bcaror  and 
the  general  guide  beyond. 

643.  The  captains  in  the  right  wing  will  shift  to  the  leftof  their 
companies,  except  the  captain  of  the  color-company,  who  will  re- 
main on  its  right,  but  step  into  the  rear  rank  ;  the  captains  in  the 
left  wing  will  shift  to  the  right  of  their  companies. 

644.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  promptly  rectify,  if  necessary, 
the  i)ositions  of  the  guides  of  the  right  wing,  and  the  major  those 
of  the  other  ;  which  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


2.  On  the  center — Dress. 


152  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

645.  At  this  command,  the  companies  will  move  up  in  quick 
time  against  the  guides,  ^yhe^e,  having  arrived,  each  captain  will 
align  his  company  according  to  prescribed  principles,  the  lieuten- 
ant colonel  aligning  the  color-company. 

646.  If  the  alignment  be  oblique,  the  captains  will  take  care  to 
conform  their  companies  to  it  in  conducting  them  towards  the 
line. 

647.  The  battalion  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  Color  and  guides — Posts. 

648.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer,  the  general  and  com- 
pany guides,  and  the  captains  in  the  right  wing,  will  take  their 
places  in  the  line  of  battle,  and  the  color-bearer  will  replace  the 
heel  of  the  color-lance  against  his  right  hip. 

649.  If  the  new  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  be  such  that  one 
or  more  companies  find  themselves  in  advance  of  that  line,  the 
colonel,  before  establishing  the  general  guides  on  the  line,  will 
cause  such  companies  to  be  moved  to  the  rear,  either  by  the  back 
step,  or  by  first  facing  about,  according  as  there  may  be  less  or 
more  ground  to  be  rej^assed  to  bring  the  companies  in  rear  of  the 
new  direction. 

650.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  a  general  alignment, 
and  the  color  and  general  guides  are  not  on  the  line,  he  will  cause 
them  to  move  out  by  the  command  : 

1.  Color  and  general  guides — On  the  Line. 

651.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer  and  the  general  guides 
will  place  themselves  on  the  line,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed, 
m.  640. 

Article  TV  .—^Change  of  direction  in  marching  in  line  of  battle. 

652.  The  battalion' marching  in  line  of  battle,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  it  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Change  direction  to  the  right.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — 

March). 

653.  At  the  command  mairh,  the  movement  will  commence ;  the 
color-rank  will  shorten  the  step  to  fourteen  or  seventeen  inches, 
and  direct  itself  circularly  to  the  right,  taking  care  to  advance  the 
left  shoulder,  but  only  insensibly;  the  major  will  place  himself  be- 
fore the  color-bearer,  facing  him,  and  so  direct  his  march  that  he 
may  describe  an  arc  of  a  circle  neither  too  large  nor  too  small ;  he 
will  also  see  that  the  color-bearer  takes  steps  of  fourteen  or  seven- 
teen inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

654.  The  right  general  guide  will  wheel  on  the  right  captain  of 
the  battalion  as  his  pivot ;  the  left  general  guide  will  circularly 
march  in  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches  or  thirty-three  inches, 
according  to  the  gait,  and  will  align  himself  upon  the  color-bearer 
and  the  right  general  guide. 

655.  The  corporal  placed  in  the  center  of  the  battalion,  will 
take  steps  of  fourteen  or  seventeen  inches,  and  will  wheel  to  the 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION.  153 

right  by  advancing  insensibly  the  left  shoulder  ;  the  battalion  will 
conform  itself  to  the  movement  of  the  center;  to  this  end,  the 
captain  of  the  color-company,  and  the  captain  of  the  next  to  the 
left,  Avill  attentively  regulate  their  march,  as  Avell  as  the  direction 
of  their  shoulders,  on  the  three  center  corporals.  All  the  other 
captains  will  regulate  the  direction  of  their  shoulders  and  th6 
length  of  their  step  on  this  basis. 

656.  The  men  -will  redouble  their  attention  in  order  not  to  pass 
the  line  of  captains. 

657.  In  the  left  wing,  the  pace  will  be  lengthened  in  proportion 
as  the  file  is  distant  from  the  center;  the  captain  of  the  eighth 
company  who  closes  the  left  flank  of  the  battalion  will  take  steps 
of  twenty-eight  or  thirty-three  inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

658.  In  the  right  wing  the  pace  will  be  shortened  in  proportion 
as  the  file  is  distant  from  the  center;  the  captain  who  closes  the 
right  flank  will  only  slowly  turn  in  his  person,  observing  to  yield 
ground  a  little  if  pushed. 

659.  The  colonel  will  take  care  to  prevent  the  center  of  the  bat- 
talion from  describing  an  arc  of  a  circle,  either  too  great  or  too 
small,  in  order  that  the  wings  may  conform  themselves  to  its  move- 
ment. He  will  see  also  that  the  captains  keep  their  companies 
constantly  aligned  upon  the  center,  so  that  there  may  be  no  open- 
ing and  no  crowding  of  files.  He  will  endeavor  to  prevent  faults, 
and,  should  they  occur,  correct  them  without  noise. 

660.  The  lieutenent-colonel,  placed  before  the  battalion,  will  give 
his  attention  to  the  same  objects. 

661.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  direct  march  to  be  re- 
sumed, he  will  command  : 

1.  Forvard.     2.  M.\RrH. 

662.  At  the  command  march,  the  color-rank,  the  general  guides, 
and  the  battalion  will  resume  the  direct  march  ;  the  major  will 
immediately  ])lace  himself  thirty  or  forty  paces  in  front,  face  to 
the  colonel,  placed  in  rear  of  the  center,  who  will  establish  him  by 
signal  of  the  sword  on  the  perpendicular  direction  which  the  cor- 
poral in  the  center  of  the  battalion  ought  to  pursue  ;  the  major  will 
immediately  cause  the  color-bearer,  if  necessary,  to  incline  to  the 
right  or  left,  so  as  to  be  exactly  opposite  to  his  file  ;  thecolor-bear- 
or  will  then  take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and 
the  majf>r. 

663.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  endeavor  to  give  to  the  color- 
company  and  the  next  on  the  left  a  direction  perpendicular  to  that 
pursued  by  the  center  corporal  ;  and  all  the  other  companies, 
without  precijtitancy,  will  conform  themselves  to  that  basis. 

Article  V. —  To  march  in  rdreat,  in  line  of  battle. 

664.  The  battalion  being  halted,  if  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel 
to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will  command : 

1.  Face  to  the  rear.    2.  Battalion,  about — Fack. 


154  SCHOOE  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

665.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face  about ;  the 
color-rank  and  the  general  guides,  if  in  advance,  will  take  their 
places  in  line ;  the  color-bearer  will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now 
leading  ;  the  corporal  of  his  file  will  step  behind  the  corporal  next 
on  his  own  right,  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass,  and  then  step  into 
the  -front  rank,  now  rear,  to  re-form  the  color-file  ;  the  colonel  will 
place  himself  behind  the  front  rank,  become  the  rear  ;  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel and  major  will  place  themselves  before  the  I'ear  rank, 
now  leading. 

666.  The  colonel  will  take  post  forty  paces  behind  the  color  file, 
in  order  to  assure  the  lieutenant-colonel  on  the  perpendicular,  who 
will  place  himself  at  a  like  distance  in  front,  as  loi-escribed  for  the 
advance  in  line  of  battle. 

667.  If  the  battalion  be  the  one  charged  with  the  direction,  the 
colonel  will  establish  markers  in  the  manner  indicated,  ^o.  589, 
except  that  they  will  face  to  the  battalion,  and  that  the  first  will 
be  placed  twenty-five  paces  from  the  lieutenant-colonel.  If  the 
markers  be  already  established,  the  oflicer  charged  Avith  replacing 
them  in  succession  will  cause  them  to  face  about,  the  moment  that 
the  battalion  executes  this  movement,  and  then  the  marker  nearest 
to  the  battalion  will  hasten  to  the  rear  of  the  two  others. 

668.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command ; 

3.  Battalion^  forward. 

669.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer  will  advance  six  paces 
beyond  the  rank  of  file  closers,  accompanied  by  the  two  corporjils 
of  his  guard  of  that  rank,  the  center  corporal  stepping  back  to  let 
the  color-bearer  pass  ;  the  two  file  closers  nearest  this  center  cor- 
poral will  unite  on  him  behind  the  color-guard  to  seiwe  as  a  basis 
of  alignment  for  the  line  of  file  closers ;  the  two  general  guides 
will  place  themselves  abreast  with  the  color  rank,  the  covering  ser- 
geants will  place  themselves  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  and  the  cap- 
tains in  the  rear  rank,  now  leading ;  the  captains  in  the  left  wing, 
now  right,  will,  if  not  already  there,  shift  to  the  left  of  their  com- 
panies, now  become  the  right. 

670.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

4.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

671.  The  battalion  will  march  in  retreat  on  the  same  principles 
which  govern  the  advance  in  line  :  the  center  corporal  behind  the 
color-bearer  will  march  exactly  in  his  trace. 

672!  If  it  be  the  directing  battalion,  the  color-bearer  will  direct 
himself  on  the  markers,  who  will,  of  their  own  accord,  each  place 
himself  in  succession  behind  the  marker  most  distant,  on  being 
approached  by  the  battalion  ;  the  ofiScer  charged  with  the  super- 
intendence of  the  markers  will  carefully  assure  them  on  the  direc- 
tion. 

673.  In  the  case  of  a  subordinate  battalion,  the  color-bearer  will 
maintain  himself  on  the  perpendicular  by  means  of  points  taken 
on  the  trround. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  155 

674.  The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will  each  discharge 
the  same  functions  as  in  the  advance  in  line. 

675.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  on  the  outside  of  the  file 
closers  of  the  color  company,  will  also  maintain  the  three  file  clo- 
sers of  the  basis  of  alignment  in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direc- 
tion :  the  other  file  closers  will  keep  themselves  aligned  on  this 
basis. 

Article  VI. —  To  halt  the  battalion  inarching  in  retreat^  and  to  face  it 

to  the  front. 

676.  The  colonel  having  halted  the  battalion,  and  wishing  to  face 
it  to  the  front,  will  command: 

1.  Face  to  the  front.     2.  Battalion,  about — Face. 

677.  At  the  second  command,  the  color-rank,  general  guides, 
captains  and  covering  sergeants,  will  all  retake  their  habitual  places 
in  line  of  battle,  and  the  color-bearer  will  repass  into  the  front 
rank. 

678.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle  by  the  front  rank, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Battalion.,  right  about.     2.  March. 

679.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  rear 
and  move  oflf  at  the  same  gait  by  the  rear  rank.  The  principles 
prescribed  Nos.  669  and  following  will  be  carefully  observed. 

680.  If  the  colonel  should  wisli  the  battalion  to  march  again  by 
the  front,  he  will  give  the  same  commands. 

Article  VII. — Change  of  direction,  in  marching  in  retreat. 

681.  A  battalion  retiring  in  line  will  change  direction  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  indicated  No.  652  and  following;  the  three  file 
closers,  united  behind  the  color  rank,  will  conform  themselves  to 
the  movement  of  this  rank,  and  wheel  like  it ;  the  center  file  closer 
of  the  three  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  or  seventeen  inches,  accord- 
ing to  the  gait,  and  keep  himself  steadily  at  the  same  distance 
from  the  color-bearer ;  the  line  of  file  closers  will  conform  them- 
selves to  the  movement  of  itw  center,  and  the  lieutenant-colonel  will 
maintain  it  on  that  basis. 


156 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION, 


Article  VIII. — Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and  retreating. 

'    %    ...„ -^..^ h  , 

^imil|llll!llllllllilHllllllllllll!!lllll|!lHmill!ll!li!illllllllllH^lillllllff^ 


rie.i. 


^t=i: 


1^ 


^ 


1.      a.      rr 


rsr 


[iiiiiiiiiiiHiiim:iaiiiiIilB»__ _ ^lllililliiiiiiii^BllHi 


■HI 


M  \.    r 


^ 


■F 


Tiff.  2. 


riE  *"     a,       ^  -, 


1  i 


.cf 


^         >■ 


682.  The  battalion  advancing  m  line  will  be  supposed  to  encoun- 
ter an  obstacle  which  covers  one  or  more  companies ;  the  colonel 
will  cause  them  to  ploy  into  column  at  full  distance,  in  rear  of  the 
next  company  towards  the  color,  which  will  be  executed  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  obstacle  only  covers 
the  third  company,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Third  company,  obstacle. 

683.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  third  company  will 
place  himself  in  its  front,  turn  to  it,  and  command,  1.   Third  com- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  157 

pany,  by  the  left  flank,  to  the  rear  into  column.     2.  Double  quick.     3. 
March.     lie  will  then  hasten  to  the  left  of  his  company. 

68-4.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face  to  the  left 
in  marching ;  the  two  lefl  files  will  promptly  disengage  to  the  rear 
in  double  quick  time  ;  the  left  guide  placing  himself  at  the  head  of 
the  front  rank,  will  conduct  it  behind  the  fourth  company,  direct- 
ing himself  parallelly  with  this  company  ;  the  captain  of  the  thii'd 
will  himself  halt  opposite  to  the  captain  of  the  fourth,  and  see  his 
company  file  past ;  when  its  right  file  shall  be  nearly  up  with  him, 
he  will' command,  1.  Third  company.  2.  By  the  right  flank.  3. 
March.  4.  Guide  right,  and  place  himself  before  the  center  of  his 
company. 

685.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right, 
preserving  the  same  gait,  but  the  moment  it  shall  be  at  the  pre- 
scribed distance,  its  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Quick  time.     2.  March. 

686.  This  company  will  thus  follow  in  column  that  behind  which 
it  finds  itself,  and  at  wheeling  distance,  its  right  guide  marching 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  captain  of  that  company. 

687.  As  soon  as  the  third  company  shall  have  faced  to  the  left, 
the  left  guide  of  the  second  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
front  rank  of  his  company,  and  maintain  between  himself  and  the 
right  of  the  fourth  the  space  necessary  for  the  return  into  line  of 
the  third. 

688.  The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Third  company,  forward  into  line. 

689.  At  this  command,  the  captain  turning  to  his  company,  will 
add: 

1.  By  company,  right  half  ichcel.     2.  Double  quick.     3.  March. 

690.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take  the  double 
quick  step,  and  execute  a  half  wheel;  its  captain  will  then  com- 
mand, 1.  Forward.  2.  March.  3.  Guide  left.  The  second  com- 
mand will  be  given  when  the  company  shall  have  sufficiently 
wheeled. 

691.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  direct  itself 
straight  forward  toward  tin;  line  of  battle,  and  retake  its  position 
in  it  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  tbrmation  for- 
ward into  line  of  battle. 

692.  It  will  be  suppo.sed  that  the  obstacle  covers  several  contig- 
uous companies  Tthe  three  companies  on  the  right  for  example), 
the  colonel  will  command  :  ' 


158 


SCHOOL   OF  THE    BATTALION. 


1.   Three  right  co7npanies,  obstacle.     2.  By  the  left  flank,  to  the  rear 
into  column.     3.  Double  quick — March. 


^ 

^lllMillMliyiSi 


'tMimiHIW  IffllllllllHWIJllllV' 


693.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  designated  com- 
panies will  each  place  himself  before  the  center  of  his  company, 
and  caution  it  as  to  tqe  movement  about  to  be  executed. 

694.  At  the  command  march,  the  designated  companies  will 
face  to  the  left  in  marching,  and  immediately  take  the  double 
quick  step  ;  each  captain  will  cause  the  head  of  his  company  to 
disengage  itself  to  the  rear,  and  the  left  guide  will  place  himself 
at  the  head  of  the  front  rank;  the  captain  of  the  third  company 
will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  684,  and  following; 
the  captains  of  the  other  companies  will  conduct  them  by  the  flank 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  159 

in  rear  of  the  third,  inclining  toward  the  licad  of  thecolunin  ;  and 
as  the  head  of  each  company  arrives  opposite  to  the  ris^ht  of  the 
one  next  before  it  in  column,  its  captain  will  himself  halt,  sec  his 
company  file  past,  and  confoi-m  himself  for  facin<j  it  to  the  front, 
in  marching,  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  684,  and  following. 

695.  When  the  last  company  in  column  shall  have  passed  the 
ob.stacle,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.   Three  right  companies,  foncard^  into  line. 

696.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  these  three  com- 
panies will  command,  By  company,  right  half  wheel.  The  colonel 
will  then  add  : 

1.  Double  quick.      2-  March. 

007.  At  this,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains  of  the  three  com- 
panies, each  company  will  conform  itself  to  what  is  prescribed  No. 
t!90,  and  following. 

698.  It  is  supposed,  in  the  foregoing  examples,  that  the  compan- 
ies belonged  to  the  right  Aving:  if  they  make  part  of  the  other, 
they  will  execute  the  passage  of  an  obstacle  according  to  the  same 
|)rinci])lcs  and  by  inverse  moans. 

699.  When  flank  companies  are  broken  off  to  pass  an  obsta- 
cle, the  general  guide  on  that  flank  Avill  place  himself  six  jiaces  in 
front  of  the  outer  file  of  the  nearest  company  to  him  remaining  in 
line. 

700.  In  the  preceding  movements,  it  has  been  supposed  that  the 
battalion  was  marching  in  quick  time,  but  if  it  be  marching  in 
double  quick  time,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  several  con- 
tiguous companies  to  break  to  *,'  -"'ill  first  order  the  bat- 

1 


709.  When  a  battalion,  retiring  in  line,  shall  encounter  a  defile 
which  it  must  pass,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion,  and  face  it 
to  the  front. 

710.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  in  rear  of  the  left 
flank,  and  that  its  width  is  Buflicient  to  give  passage  to  a  column 
by  platoon  ;  the  colonel  will  place  a  marker  fifteen  or  twenty  paces 
in  rear  of  the  file  closers  at  the  point  around  which  the  subdivi- 
sions will  have  to  change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the  defile;  ho 
will  then  command  : 

To  the  rear,  by  the  right  flank,  pass  the  defile. 

711.  The  captain  of  the  firet  company  will  immocfately  com- 
mand: 

n 


160  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION", 

will  afterwards  successively  put  thcmiHelves  into  line  by  the  oblique 
step,  as  the  ground  may  permit. 

705.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  i-etreat  in  double  quick 
time,  and  many  contiguous  companies  be  marching  before  the  rear 
rank  of  the  battalion,  the  colonel  will  not  change  the  gait  of  the 
battalion  in  causing  them  to  re-enter  into  line. 

706.  When  the  color-company  shall  bo  obliged  to  execute  the 
movement  of  passing  an  obstacle,  the  color-bearer  will  return  into 
lin&  at  the  moment  the  company  shall  face  to  the  left  or  right ;  the 
major  will  place  himself  six  paces  before  the  extremity  of  the  com- 
pany behind  which  the  color-company  marches  in  column,  in  or- 
der to  give  the  step  and  the  direction  ;  h6,  himself,  first  taking  the 
step  from  the  battalion. 

707.  As  soon  as  the  color-company  shall  have  returned  into  line, 
the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard  Avill  again  move  out  six  paces  in 
front  of  the  battalion,  and  take  the  step  from  the  major  ;  the  lat- 
terwill  immediately  place  himself  twenty  or  thirty  paces  in  front 
of  the  color-bearer,  and  face  to  the  colonel  placed  behind  the  cen- 
ter of  the  battalion,  who  will  establish  him  on  the  perpendicular  ; 
and  as  soon  as  he  shall  be  assured  on  it,  the  color-bearer  will  in- 
stantl}^  take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the 
major. 

708.  It  is  prescribed,  as  a  general  rule,  that  the  compasies  of 
the  right  wing  ought  to  execute  the  movement  of  passing  obstacles 
by  the  left  flank,  and  the  reverse  for  companies  of  the  other  wing; 
but  if  the  obstacle  cover  at  once  several  companies  of  the  center, 
each  will  file  into  column  behind  that.  Still  in  line,  and  of  the  same 
wing,  which  ma^J)e^i^___p  ^mw.,. 


693.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  designated  com- 
panies will  each  place  himself  before  the  center  of  his  company, 
and  caution  it  as  to  tqe  movement  about  to  be  executed. 

694.  At  the  command  march,  the  designated  companies  will 
face  to  the  left  in  marching,  and  immediately  take  the  double 
quick  step  ;  each  captain  will  cause  the  head  of  his  company  to 
disengage  itself  to  the  rear,  and  the  left  guide  will  place  himself 
at  the  head  of  the  front  rank;  the  captain  of  the  third  company 
will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  684,  and  following; 
the  captains  of  the  other  companies  will  conduct  them  by  the  flank 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION. 


161 


Article  IX. —  To  pass  a  defile,  in  retreat,  by  the  right  or  left  flank. 


zfir^rfp 


709.  When  a  battalion,  retiring  in  line,  shall  encounter  a  defile 
which  it  must  pasp,  the  colonel  will  halt  the  battalion,  and  face  it 
to  the  front. 

710.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  in  rear  of  the  left 
flank,  and  that  its  width  is  sufficient  to  give  passage  to  a  column 
by  platoon  ;  the  colonel  will  place  a  marker  fifteen  or  twenty  paces 
in  rear  of  the  file  closers  at  the  point  around  which  the  subdivi- 
sions will  have  to  change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the  defile;  ho 
will  then  command  : 

To  the  rear,  by  the  right  fi/ink,  pass  the  defile. 

711.  The  captain  of  the  first  company  will  immecCately  com- 
mand : 

n 


162  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

1.    First  company,  right — Face.       2.    March   (or   double   quick — 

March)  . 

712.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  compan}"-  will  commence 
the  movement ;  the  first  file  will  wheel  to  the  right,  march  to  the 
rear  till  it  shall  have  passed  four  paces  bej'ond  the  file  closers, 
when  it  will  wheel  again  to  the  right,  and  then  direct  itself  straight 
forward  toward  the  left  flank.  All  the  other  files  of  this  company 
will  come  to  wheel  in  succession  at  the  same  place  where  the  first 
had  wheeled. 

713.  The  second  company  will  execute,  in  its  turn,  the  same 
movement,  by  the  commands  of  its  captain,  who  will  give  the 
command  March,  so  that  the  first  file  of  his  company  may  imme- 
diately follow'  the  last  of  the  first,  Avithout  constraint,  however,  as 
to  taking  the  step  of  the  first ;  the  first  file  of  the  secpnd  company 
will  wheel  to  the  right,  on  its  ground  ;  all  the  other  files  of  this 
company  will  come  in  succession  to  wheel  at  the  same  place.  The 
following  companies  will  execute,  each  in  its  turn,  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

714.  When  the  whole  of  the  second  company  shall  be  on  the 
same  direction  with  the  first,  the  captain  of  the  first  will  cause  it 
to  form,  by  platoon,  into  line,  and  the  moment  that  it  is  in  column 
the  guide  of  the  first  platoon  will  direct  himself  on  the  marker 
around  whom  he  has  to  'change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the 
defile. 

715.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march  b}^  the  flank, 
direcing  itself  parallelly  with  the  line  of  battle  ;  and  it,  in  its  turn, 
will  form,  by  platoon,  into  line,  when  the  third  company  shall  be 
wholly  on  the  same  direction  Avith  itself. 

716.  The  following  companies  will  successively  execute  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  and  each  Avill  form,  b}-  platoon, 
into  line,  when  the  next  company  shall  be  on  the  same  direction 
with  itself. 

717.  The  first  platoon  of  the  leading  company,  having  arrived 
opposite  to  the  marker  placed  at  the  entrance  of  the  defile,  will 
turn  to  the  left,  and  the  following  platoons  Avill  all  execute  this 
movement  at  the  same  point.  As  the  last  comj^anies  will  not  be 
able  to  form  platoons  before  reaching  the  defile,  they  will  so  direct 
themselves,  in  entering  it,  as  to  leave  room  to  the  left  for  this 
movement. 

718.  The  battalion  will  thus  pass  the  defile  by  platoon;  and,  as 
the  two  platoons  of  each  company  shall  clear  it,  companies  Avill  be 
successively  formed  by  the  means  indicated.  School  of  the  Com- 
pany, No.  273,  and  following. 

719.  The  head  of  the  column  having  cleared  the  defile,  and 
having  reached  the  distance  atAvhich  the  colonel  wishes  to  re-form 
line  faced  to  the  defile,  he  may  cause  the  leading  company  to  turn 
to  the  left,  to  prolong  the  column  in  that  direction,  and  then  form 
it  to  the  left  into  line  of  battle ;  or  he  may  halt  tlae  column,  and 
form  it  into  line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  rear. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.         163 


720.  If  the  defile  be  in  the  rear  of  the  right  flank,  it  will  be 
])assed  b}' the  left ;  the  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

721.  If  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  receive  the  front  of  a  platoon, 
it  will  be  passed  by  the  flank.  Captains  and  file  closers  will  be 
watchful  that  the  files  do  not  lose  their  distances  in  marching. 
Comp.'inics  or  platoons  will  be  formed  into  line  as  the  width  of  the 
dcfil"  ma}'  permit,  or  as  the  companies  shall  successively  clear  it. 

Article  X. —  To  march  by  the  flank. 

722.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  battal- 
ion to  march  bj-  the  flank,  Avill  command  : 

1.  Battalion.      2.    Bight  (or  Z^/f)— Face.         '  '  ' 
3.  Forward.     4.  M.\rch  (or  double  quick 


-March).  n  i  i  i 

723.  At  the  second  command,  the  cap-  Liij^ 
tains  and  covering  sergeants  will  place  ^  ,  ,  ,  | 
themselves  as  prescribed.  Nos.  138  and 

Ul.  School  of  the  Company.  '  '  '  '  ' 

724.  The  sergeant  on  tli'c   left  of  the  -  ■  '  ' 

battalion   will  place  himself  to  the  left    nil'  '  1 ^^ 

and   by  the  side  of  the  last  file  of  his  ,  ^ 

company,  covering  the  captains  in  file.  <V    vv 

72.5.  The  battalion  having  to  fixce  by  ,  "vsP 

the  left  flank,  the  captains,  at  the  second  I-     "^ 

command,  will  shift  rapidly  to  the  left  ^  '  '  '' ■ ' 

of  their  companies,  and  each  place  him-  t-i  t  i  i 

self  by  the  side  of  the  covering  sergeant  i  i  i  r  i 

of  the  company  preceding  his  own,  ex-  c  |  i^  r  ^ 

copt  the  captain   of  the    left  company,  -— r-p- . 

who  will  place  himself  b}-  the  side  of  the  ^~^ 

sergeant  on    the    left   of    the    battalion.  '  '  '  ^  ' 

The  c^ivering  sergeant  of  the  right  com-  :  •  .  :.i 

pany  will  place  himself  by  the  right  side  *  r.  ;  i— i 

of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  rearmost  ■■    ^  y-, 
file  of  his  com]»any,  wavering  the  ca]itains 

in  fiio.  ^"^^^^^^ 

72G.  At  the  command  march,  the  bat-  '  '■'  -^ 

talion    will   step  off   with   life;   the  scr-  t  j.:  i--' 

gcant,  placed  before  the  leading  file  (right  r  I'l  n 

or  left  in  front),  will  be  careful  to  ]ire-  jj_^_j^ , 
serve  exact!}"  the  length  and  cadence  of 

the  step,  and  to  direct  himself  straight  forward  ;  to  this  end   he 

will  take  points  on  the  ground.  -mi^ 

727.  Whether  the  battalion  march  by  the  right  or  left  flank,  the 
li«'Utenant-colonel  will  yilace  himself  abreast  with  the  leading  file, 
ami  the  major  abreast  with  the  color  file,  both  on  the  side  of  the 
front  rank,  and  about  six  paces  from  it. 


164  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION. 

728.  The  adjutant,  placed  between  the  lieutenant-colonel  and 
the  front  rank,  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  head  of  the 
battalion,  and  the  sepfeant-major,  placed  between  the  major  and 
the  color-bearer,  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  adjutant. 

729.  The  captains  and  file  closers  will  carefully  see  that  the  files 
neither  open  out,  nor  close  too  much,  and  that  they  regain  insen- 
sibly their  distances,  if  lost. 

730.  The  colonel  wishing  the  battalion  to  wheel  by  file,  will 
command  : 

1.  By  file  right  (or  left).     2.  March. 

731.  The  files  will  wheel  in  succession,  and  all  at  the  place  where 
the  first  had  wheeled,  in  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  School  of  the  Company. 

732.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  it  to  halt,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

733.  These  commands  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the 
School  of  the  Company,  Ko.  146. 

734.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  line,  either  to  the  front  or  to 
the  rear,  the  movements  will  be  executed  b}^  the  commands  and 
means  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Company. 

Article  XI. —  To  form  the  battalion  on  the  right  or  left,  by  file,  into 

line  of  battle. 

735.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  right  flank,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  form  it  on  the  right  by  file,  he  will  determine  the 
line  of  battle,  and  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  two  markers  on 
that  line,  in  conformity  with  what  is  prescribed,  No.  415. 

736.  The  head  of  the  battalion  being  nearly  up  with  the  first 
marker,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   On  the  right,  by  file,  into  line.     2.  JVIarch  (or  double  quick — 

March). 

737.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  company  will  form 
itself  on  the  right  by  file,  into  line  of  battle,  as  indicated  in  the 
School  of  the  Company,  No.  149 ;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  first 
file  will  rest  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  the  first 
marker;  the  other  companies  will  follow  the  movement  of  the 
leading  company ;  each  captain  will  place  himself  on  the  line  at 
the  same  time  with  the  front  rank  man  of  his  first  file,  and  on  the 
right  of  this  man. 

738.  The  left  guide  of  each  company,  except  the  leading  one, 
will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the  markers,  and  opposite  to 
the  left  file  of  his  company,  at  the  instant  that  the  front  rank  man 
of  this  file  arrives  on  the  line. 

739.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  command : 

€hiides—Po&a!e. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION. 


166 


740.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  succcBsive  formation  of 
the  battalion,  moving  along  the  front  of  the  line  of  battle. 

741.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will,  in  succession,  assure  the  direc- 
tion of  the  guides,  and  see  that  the  men  of  the  front  rank,  in 
placing  themselves  on  the  line,  do  not  pass  it. 

742.  If  the  battalion  mai'ch  by  the  left  flank,  the  movement  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

Article  XII. — Changes  of  front. 
Change  of  front  perpendicularly  fonrard. 

743.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  it  is  supposed  to  be  the 
wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  a  change  of  front  forward  on  the  right 
company,  and  that  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new  positions 
be  a  right  angle,  or  a  few  degrees  more  or  less  than  one ;  he  will 
cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the  new  direction,  before  the 
position  to  be  occupied  by  that  company,  and  order  its  captain  to 
establish  it  against  the  markers. 

744.  The  captain  of  the  right  company  will  immediately  direct 
it  upon  the  markers  by  a  wheel  to  the  right  on  the  fixed  pivot; 
and  after  having  halted  it,  he  will  align  it  by  the  right. 

745.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.    Change  front  forward  on  first  company.      2.  By  company,  right 
half  wheel.     .3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 


746.  At  the  Fccond  command,  each  captain  will  place  bimAelf 
before  the  center  of  his  company. 


166  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

747.  At  the  third,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  right  on  the 
fixed  pivot ;  the  left  guide  of  each  will  place  himself  on  its  left  as 
80on  as  he  shall  he  able  to  pass ;  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge 
that  the  companies  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will  command : 

4.  Forward.     5.  March.     6.   Guide  right. 

748.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  comjjanies  ceasing  to  wheel  will 
march  straight  forward ;  at  the  sixth,  the  men  will  touch  elbows 
towards  the  right. 

749.  The  right  guide  of  the  second  comj^any  will  march  straight 
forward  until  this  comj)any  shall  arrive  at  the  point  where  it 
should  turn  to  the  right ;  each  succeeding  right  guide  will  follow 
the  file  immediately  before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the  wheel,  and 
will  march  in  the  trace  of  this  file  until  this  company  shall  turn 
to  the  right  to  move  upon  the  line ;  this  guide  will  then  march 
straight  forward. 

750.  The  second  company  having  arrived  opposite  to  the  left 
file  of  the  first,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to  turn  to  the  right ;  the 
right  guide  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  arrive  squarely  upon  the 
line  of  battle,  and  when  he  shall  be  at  three  paces  from  that  line, 
the  captain  wdll  command  : 

1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt. 

751.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt;  the  files 
not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide  will  come  into  it  jiromptly,  the  left 
guide  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  as  soon  as  he  is 
assured  in  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant-colonel,  the  captain  will 
align  the  company  by  the  right. 

752.  Each  following  company  will  conform  to  what  has  just 
been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

753.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

;  ■  Guides — Posts, 

754.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
change  front  forward  on  the  first  company,  and  that  the  angle 
formed  by  the  old  and  new  positions  be  a  right  angle,  he  will 
cause  two  markers  to  be  placed  on  the  new  direction,  before  the 
position  to  be  occuj^ied  by  that  company,  and  will  command : 

1.  Change  front  forward  on  first  company.     2.  By  company ,  right  half 
wheel.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

755.  At  the  fii'st  command,  the  caj)tains  will  move  rapidly  be- 
fore the  center  of  their  respective  companies  ;  the  captain  of  the 
first  comjDany  will  command:  1.  Right  turn;  2.  Quick  time;  the 
captains  of  the  other  comj^anies  will  caution  them  to  wheel  to 
the  right. 

756.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  first  company  will  turn  to  the 
right  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier.  No.  402 ;  its  captain  will  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  the 
markers,  and  the  files  in  rear  will  promj^tly  come  into  line.  The 
captain  will  align  the  company  by  the  right.  , 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION. 


167 


757.  Eacli  of  the  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the  right  on  a 
fixed  pivot ;  the  left  guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  left  of 
their  respective  companies,  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  they 
have  wheeled  sufficiently,  he  will  command  : 

4.  Foncard.     5.  March.     6.  Guide  right. 

758.  These  commands  will  be  executed  as  indicated  No.  74G  and 
following. 

759.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion  to  change  front  forward 
on  the  eighth  company  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means. 

Change  of  front  perpendicularly  to  the  rear. 


\  V 


"I 


168 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION. 


760.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  change  front  to  the  rear  on  the 
right  company,  will  impart  his  purpose  to  the  captain  of  this  com- 
pany. The  latter  will  immediately  face  his  company  about,  wheel 
it  to  the  left  on  the  fixed  pivot,  and  halt  it  when  it  shall  be  in  the 
direction  indicated  to  him  by  the  colonel  ;  the  captain  will  then 
face  his  company  to  the  front,  and  align  it  by  the  right  against 
the  two  markers,  whom  the  colonel  will  cause  to  be  established  be- 
fore the  right  and  left  files. 

761.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Change  front  to  the  rear,  on  first  company.  2.  Battalion,  ahoxit — 
Face.  3.  By  company,  left  half  icheel.  4.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

762.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies,  except  the 
right,  will  face  about. 

763.  At  the  third,  the  captains,  whose  companies  have  faced 
about,  will  each  place  himself  behind  the  center  of  his  company, 
two  paces  from  the  front  rank,  now  the  rear. 

764.  At  the  fourth,  these  companies  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the 
fixed  pivot  by  the  rear  rank  ;  the  left  guide  of  each  will,  as  soon 
as  he  is  able  to  pass,  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  of 
his  company,  now  become  the  right ;  and  when  the  colonel  shall 
judge  that  the  companies  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

5.  Forward.     6.  March.     7.  Gruide  left. 

765.  At  the  sixth  command,  the  companies  will  cease  to  wheel, 
inarch  straight  forward  towards  the  new  line  of  battle,  and,  at  the 
seventh,  take  the  touch  of  the  elbow  towards  the  left. 

766.  The  guide  of  each  company  on  its  right  flank,  become 
left,  will  conform  himself  to  the  principles  prescribed.  No.  748» 

767.  The  second  company,  from  the  right,  having  arrived  oppo- 
site to  the  left  of  the  first,  will  turn  to  the  left ;  the  guide  will  sa 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   BATTALION. 


169 


direct  himself  a8  to  arrive  parallolly  with  the  line  of  battle,  cross 
that  line,  and  when  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  shall  be  three 
paces  beyond  it,  the  captain  will  command:  1.  Second  company. 
2.  Halt. 

768.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt;  the  files 
which  may  not  yet  be  in  line  with  the  guide,  will  promptly  come 
into  it ;  the  captain  will  cause  the  company  to  face  aoout,  and 
then  align  it  by  the  right. 

769.  All  the  other  companies  will  execute  what  has  just  been 
prescribed  for  the  second,  each  as  it  successively  arrives  opposite 
to  the  left  of  the  company  that  precedes  it  on  the  new  line  of  bat- 
tle. 

770.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

771.  The  colonel  will  cause  a  change  of  front  on  the  left  com- 
pany of  the  battalion  to  the  rear,  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  by  inverse  means. 

772.  In  changes  of  front,  the  colonel  will  give  a  general  super- 
intendence to  the  movement. 

773.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of  the 
guides  as  they  successively  move  out  on  the  line  of  battle,  con- 
forming himself  to  what  has  been  prescribed  in  the  successive 
formations. 

Aeticlk  XIII. —  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  doubled  on  the 

center. 


170 


SCHOOL   OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Pier  3 


— -- JJ-, ,J1 a rj 


iiliiuiiililiiliijfliiiriiniiiiiiiiiiiglliiiiiiiiiliiiiii 


-y 


illllllMliriltplilllllllllilllbiillillllllllllllllllllMllllllllllllllllllllM 


iiniiiil''" 


1. 


776.  This  movement  consists  in  ploying  the  corresponding  com- 
panies of  the  right  and  left  wings  into  column  at  company  dis- 
tance, or  closed  in  mass,  in  rear  of  the  two  center  companies,  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed,  Article  III.,  Part  II.,  of  this 
School. 

777.  The  colonel,  wishingto  form  the  double  column  at  company 
distance,  (the  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,)  will  command  : 

1.  Boifble  column,  at  half  distance.     2.  Battalion,  inwards — Face.     3. 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

778.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  place  themselves 
two  paces  in  front  of  their  respective  companies  ;  the  captains  of 
the  two  center  companies  will  caution  them  to  stand  fast,  and  the 
other  captains  will  caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the  left  and 
right,  respectively.  The  covering  sergeants  will  step  into  the 
front  rank. 

779.  At  the  second  command,  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies  will 
stand  fast ;  the  others  of  the  right  wing  will  face  to  the  left,  and 
the  others  of  the  left  wing  will  face  to  the  right;  each  captain 
whose  company  has  faced,  will  hasten  to  break  to  the  rear  the  two 
files  at  the  head  of  his  comj)any ;  the  left  guide  of  each  right  com- 
j^any,  and  the  right  guide  of  each  left  company,  Avill  each  place 
himself  at  the  head  of  its  front  rank,  and  the  captain  by  the  side 
of  his  guide. 

780.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies, 
which  are  to  form  the  first  division,  will  stand  fast ;  the  senior  cap- 
tain of  the  two  will  place  himself  before  the  center  of  the  division 
and  command  :  Guide  right ;  the  junior  captain  will  place  himself 
in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies,  and  the  left  guide  of 
the  left  company  will  place  himself  in  the  front  rank  on  the  left  of 
the  division,  as  soon  as  he  shall  be  able  to  pass. 

781.  All  the  other  comj)anies,  conducted  by  their  captains,  will 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  171 

step  off  -with  life  to  arrancjc  themselves  in  column  at  company  dis- 
tance, each  company  behind  the  prccedinj?  one  in  the  column  of 
the  same  Aving,  so  that,  in  the  right  wino;,  the  third  may  be  next 
behind  the  fourth,  the  second  next  to  the  third,  and  so  on  to  the 
right  company  ;  and,  in  the  left  wing,  the  sixth  may  bo  next  be- 
hind the  tifth,  the  seventh  next  to  the  sixth,  and  so  on  to  the  left 
company  of  the  battalion. 

782.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  two  wings  will  unite 
into  divisions  in  arranging  themselves  in  column  ;  an  instant  be- 
fore the  union,  at  the  center  of  the  column,  the  left  guides  of  right 
companies  will  pass  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  and  each  captain 
will  command  :  1.  Such  company;  2.  Halt;  3.  Front. 

783.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
■of  union,  each  company  will  halt ;  at  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the 
front.  The  senior  captain  in  each  division  will  place  himself  on 
its  right,  and  command,  Bight — Dress,  and  the  junior  captain  will 
place  himself  in  the  interval  betAvccn  the  two  companies.  The 
division  being  aligned,  its  chief  will  command  Front,  and  take  his 
position  two  paces  before  its  center. 

784.  The  column  being  thus  formed,  the  divisions  will  take  the 
respective  denominations  of  first,  second,  third,  d:c.,  according  to  po- 
sition in  the  column,  beginning  at  the  front. 

785.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  who,  at  the  second  command,  given 
by  the  colonel.  Mill  have  placed  himself  at  a  little  more  than  com- 
pany' distance  in  rear  of  the  right  guide  of  the  first  division,  will 
assure  the  right  guides  on  the  direction  asthey  successively  arrive, 
by  placing  himself  in  their  rear. 

786.  The  music  will  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

787.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  form  the  double  column 
at  company  distance  without  halting  the  battalion,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.  Double  column  at  half  distance.     2.  Battalion  by  the  right  and  left 
flanJis.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

788.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move  briskly  in 
front  of  the  center  of  his  company;  the  captains  of  the  fourth  and 
fifth  will  caution  their  companies  to  march  straight  forward ;  the 
other  captains  will  caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the  right  and 
left.: 

7S9.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies  will 
continue  to  march  straight  ff)rward  ;  the  senior  captain  will  place 
himself  before  the  center  f»f  his  division,  and  command  :  Guide 
right ;  the  junior  captain  will  ]ilace  himself  in  the  interval  between 
the  two  companies.  The  l«ft  guide  of  the  fifth  company  will  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  division.  Tho  men 
will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right.  The  color  and  general 
guides  will  retake  their  places.  The  three  right  companies  will 
face  to  the  left,  and  the  three  left  companies  will  face  to  the  right. 
Each  captain  will  break  to  the  rear  two  fibs  at  the  head  of  his 
company ;  the  left  guides  of  the  right  companies,  and  the  right 


172  SCHOOL  OF   THE  BATTALION. 

guides  of  the  left  companies,  will  each  place  himself  at  the  head  of 
the  front  rank  of  his  company,  and  the  captain  by  the  side  of  his 
guide. 

790.  The  third  and  sixth  companies  will  enter  the  column  and 
direct  themselves  parallelly  to  the  first  division.  Each  of  the  other 
companies  will,  in  like  manner,  place  itself  behind  the  company  of 
the  wing  to  which  it  belongs,  and  will  bo  careful  to  gain  as  much 
ground  as  possible  toward  the  head  of  the  column. 

791.  The  corresponding  companies  of  each  wing  will  unite  into 
divisions  on  taking  their  positions  in  column,  and  each  captain, 
the  instant  the  head  of  his  company  arrives  at  the  center  of  the 
column,  will  command  :  1.  Such  company^  by  the  right  (or  left)  flaiik. 
2.  March.  The  senior  captain  of  the  two  companies  will  place 
himself  in  front  of  the  center  of  his  division,  and  command  :  Guide 
right ;  the  junior  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between 
the  two  companies.  The  two  companies,  thus  formed  into  a  divi- 
sion, will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right,  and  when  each 
division  has  gained  its  j^t'oper  distance,  its  chief  Avill  cause  it  to 
march  in  quick  time. 

792.  When  the  battalion  jjresents  an  odd  number  of  companies, 
the  formation  will  be  made  in  like  manner,  and  the  company  en 
either  flank  which  shall  find  itself  without  a  cori'esponding  one, 
will  place  itself  at  company  distance  behind  the  wing  to  which  it 
belongs. 

793.  The  double  column,  closed  in  mass,  will  be  formed  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same  commands,  substitu- 
ting the  indication,  closed  in  inass,  for  that  of  at  half  distance.    ■ 

794.  The  double  column  never  being  formed  when  two  or  more 
battalions  are  to  be  in  one  general  column,  it  will  habitually  take 
the  guide  to  the  right,  sometimes  to  the  left,  or  in  the  center  of  the 
column ;  in  the  last  case,  the  command  will  bo,  guide  center.  The 
column  will  march  and  change  direction  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  a  simple  column  by  division. 

795.  The  double  column  at  company  distance  will  be  closed  in 
mass,  or,  if  in  mass,  will  take  half  distance,  by  the  commands  and 
means  indicated  for  a  simple  column  by  division. 

Deployment  of  the  double  column,  faced  to  the  front. 

796.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  deploy  the  double  column,  will 
place  a  marker  respectively  before  the  right  and  left  files  of  the 
first  division,  and  a  third  before  the  left  file  of  the  right  company, 
same  division ;  which  being  done,  he  will  cause  the  two  general 
guides  to  spring  out  on  the  alignment  of  the  markers  a  little  be- 
yond the  points  at  which  the  respective  flanks  of  the  battalion  ought 
to  rest ;  he  will  then  command  : 

1.  Deploy  column.     2.  Battalion  outwards — Face.      3.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

797.  The  column  will  deploy  itself  on  the  two  companies  at  its 
head,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  deployment  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  173 

column  in  mass.  The  captains  of  those  companies  will  each,  at  the 
command  march,  place  himself  on  the  ri/jjlit  of  his  own  company, 
and  align  it  by  the  right;  the  captain  of  the  fourth  will  then  place 
himself  in  the  rear  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  in  the  rank  of 
file  closers,  at  the  moment  the  caj^tain  of  the  third  shall  come  to  its 
left  to  align  it. 

798.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 
790.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  the  fire  to  com- 
mence pending  the  deployment,  he  will  give  an  order  to  that  ef- 
fect to  the  captains  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  comjjaniee,  and  the  fire 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  438. 

800.  The  battalion  being  in  double  column  and  in  march,  if  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  without  halting  the  column,  he  will 
cause  three  markers  to  be  posted  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  when 
the  head  of  the  column  shall  arrive  near  the  markers  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Deploi/  column.      2.   Batwlion,    by  the  right  and  left  flanks.     3. 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

801.  Tlie  column  will  deploy  on  the  two  leading  companies,  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  deployment  of  a  close 
column  No.  533,  and  following ;  at  the  command  march,  the  chief 
of  the  first  division  will  halt  it,  and  the  captains  of  the  fourth  and 
fifth  companies  will  align  their  companies  by  the  right. 

802.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colo- 
nel to  deploy  the  column  and  to  continue  to  march  in  the  order  of 
battle,  he  will  not  cause  markers  to  be  established  at  the  head  of 
the  column.  The  movement  will  be  executed  b}-  the  commands 
and  means  indicated  No  800.  observing  what  follows.  At  the  first 
command,  the  chiel'  of  the  first  division  will  command,  Quick  time. 
At  the  comjiiand  march,  the  first  division  will  continue  to  march  in 
quick  time ;  the  colonel  will  command,  Guide  center.  The  cap- 
tains of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  the  color  and  the  men,  Avill 
immediatel}-  conform  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line  of  battle. 
The  companies  will  take  the  quick  step  by  the  command  of  their 
captainSj'as  they  successively  arrive  in  line.  The  movement  com- 
pleted, the  colonel  may  cause  the  battalion  to  march  in  double 
quick  time. 

To  form  the  double  column  into  line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  right  or  left. 

803.  The  double  column,  being  at  company  distance  and  at  a 
halt,  may  be  formed  into  line  of  battle  faced  to  the  right  or  loft; 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  faced  to  the  right,  ho  will 
oommand  : 

1.   Tfi<fht  into  line  rrheel,  left  comptnicJi  on  the  right  into  line.     2.  Bat- 
talion, guide  right.     3.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

804.  At  the  fi^t  command,  each  captain  will  place  himself  be- 
fore the  center  of  his  company ;  the  rij^ht  corapanies  will  be  c*u- 


174  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

tioned  that  they  will  have  to  wheel  to  the  right  into  line,  the  left 
companies  that  they  will  have  to  march  straight  forward. 

805.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  of  the  fourth  com- 
pany will  place  himself  briskly  on  the  direction  of  the  right  guides 
of  the  column,  face  to  them,  and  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  last 
files  of  his  company  when  in  line  of  battle:  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  assure  him  in  that  position. 

806.  At  the  command  maj-ch,  briskly  repeated  by  all  the  captains, 
the  right  companies  will  form  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  the 
left  companies  will  put  themselves  in  march  in  order  to  form  on 
the  right  into  line  of  battle  ;  these  formations  will  be  executed  by 
the  means  indicated  No.  391  and  following,  and  No.  416  and  fol- 
lowing ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  assure  the  guides  of  the  left 
wing  on  the  line  of  battle  as  they  successively  come  uj)on  it. 

807.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Right  into  line  wheel.     2.  Left  companies,  on  the  right  into  line.     3. 
Battalion,  guide  right.     4.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

808.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place  himself  prompt- 
ly before  the  center  of  his  company  ;  the  right  companies  will  be 
cautioned  that  they  will  have  to  wheel  to  the  right,  and  the  left 
companies  that  they  will  have  to  form  on  the  right  into  line. 

809.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated,  the  right  compa- 
nies will  form  to  the  right  into  line,  and  the  left  companies  on  the 
right  into  line.  These  formations  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
Nos.  402,  417,  and  following. 

810.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  the  battalion  forward, 
at  the  moment  the  right  companies  have  completed  the  wheel,  he 
will  command : 

5.  Forward.     6.  March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

811.  At  the  command /orjrarcZ,  the  captains  of  the  right  compa- 
nies will  command.  Quick  time.  At  the  command  march,  the  right 
companies  will  cease  to  wheel  and  march  straight  forward.  The 
colonel  will  then  add  : 

7.   Guide  center. 

812.  The  movement  of  the  left  companies  will  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time  as  prescribed  above,  and  as  they  arrive  on  the 
line  each  captain  will  cause  his  company  to  march  in  quick  time. 

813.  The  column  may  be  formed  faced  to  the  left  into  line  of  bat- 
tle according  to  the  same  principles. 

814.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass  instead  of  at  company  dis- 
tance, these  movements  Avill  be  executed  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  Nos.  417,  502  and  510. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   BATTALION. 


175 


Article  XIY. — Dispositions  agait^sf  Cavalry. 


817.  A  battalion  being  in  column  b}'  company,  at  full  distance^, 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form 
it  into  square,  he  will  first  cause  divisions  to  be  formed  ;  which  be- 
ing done,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To  form  square.     2.    To  half  distance,  close  column.     3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March.) 

818.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  close  to  company 
distance,  the  second  division  taking  its  distance  from  the  rear  rank 
of  the  first  division. 

819.  At  the  moment  of  halting  the  fourth  division,  the  file  clo- 
sers of  each  company  of  which  it  is  composed,  passing  by  the  outer 
flank  of  their  companies,  will  place  themselves  two  paces  before 
the  front  rank  opposite  to  their  respective  places  in  line  of  battle, 
and  face  towards  the  head  of  the  column. 

820.  At  the  commencement  of  the  movement,  the  major  will 
place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  column  abreast  with  the  first  di- 
vision j  the  buglers  formed  in  two  ranks  will  place  themselves  at 
platoon  distance,  behind  the  inner  platoons  of  the  second  division. 

821.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  may,  according 
to  circumstances,  put  the  column  in  march,  or  cause  it  to  form 
square ;  if  he  wish  to  do  the  latter,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Form  square.     2.  Right  and  left  into  line,  wheel. 

822.  At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel,  facing  to  the 
Icfl  guides,  and  tlic  major,  facing  to  those  of  the  right,  will  align 
them,  from  tlic  front,  on  the  respective  guides  of  the  f<^urth  divi- 
sion, who  Avill  stand  fast,  holding  up  their  pieces,  invertc«l  perpen- 
dicularly; the  right  guides,  in  placing  themselves  on  the  direc- 
tion, will  take  their  exact  dislancos. 

823.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
caution  it  to  stand  fast;  all  the  captains  of  the  second  and  third 
divisions  will  plar-e  themselves  before  the  centers  of  their  respec- 
tive companies  and  caution  them  that  they  will  have  to  wheel,  the 
right  companici*  to  the  right,  and  the  left  companies  to  the  left  into 
line  of  battle. 

824.  The  color-bearer  will  step  back  into  the  line  of  file  closers, 
opposite  to  his  place  in  lino  of  battle,  and  will   be  replaced  by  the 


176  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

corporal  of  his  file,  who  is  in  the  rear  rank  ;  the  corporal  of  the 
same  file  who  is  in  the  rank  of  file  closers  will  stej)  into  the  rear 
rank. 

825.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  command  :  1.  Fourth- 
division  forward;  2.  Guide  left,  and  place  himself  at  the  same  time 
two  paces  outside  of  its  left  flank. 

826.  These  dispositions  ended,  the  colonel  will  com-mand : 

March  (or  double  quick — March.) 

827.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  division  will 
stand  fast ;  but  its  right  file  will  face  to  the  right,  and  its  left  file 
to  the  left. 

828.  The  companies  of  the  second  and  third  divisions  will  wheel 
to  the  right  and  left  into  line,  and  the  buglers  will  advance  a  space 
equal  to  the  front  of  a  company. 

829.  The  fourth  division  will  close  up  to  form  the  square,  and 
when  it  shall  have  closed,  its  chief  will  halt  it,  face  it  about,  and 
align  it  by  the  rear  rank  upon  the  guides  of  the  division,  who  will 
for  this  purpose,  remain  faced  to  the  front.  The  junior  captain  will 
pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the  front,  and  the  covering 
sergeant  of  the  left  company  will  place  himself  behind  him  in  the 
front  rank,  become  rear.  The  file  closers  will  at  the  same  time 
close  up  a  pace  on  the  front  rank,  and  the  outer  file  on  each  flank 
of  the  division  will  face  outwards. 

830.  The  square  being  formed,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

831.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and  fourth  divisions, 
as  well  as  the  guides,  will  enter  the  square. 

832.  The  captains  whose  companies  have  formed  to  the  right 
into  line,  will  remain  on  the  left  of  their  companies  ;  the  left  guide 
of  each  of  those  companies  will,  in  the  rear  rank,  cover  his  cap- 
tain, and  the  covering  sergeant  of  each  will  place  himself  as  a  file 
closer  behind  the  right  file  of  his  company. 

833.  The  field  and  staff"  will  enter  the  square,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  placing  himself  behind  the  left,  and  the  major  behind  the 
right  of  the  first  division. 

834.  If  the  battalion  present  ten,  instead  of  eight  companies,  the 
fourth  division  will  make  the  same  movements  prescribed  above 
for  the  second  and  third  divnsions,  and  the  fifth,  the  movements 
prescribed  for  the  fourth  division. 

835.  A  battalion  ought  never  to  present,  near  the  enemy's 
g[j.va]ry,  an  odd  company.  The  odd  company,  under  that  circum- 
^ance,  ought,  when  the  battalion  is  under  arms,  to  be  consolidated, 
for  the  time,  with  the  other  companies. 

836.  The  fronts  of  the  square  will  be  designated  as  follows :  the 
first  division  will  always  be  the  first  fi'ont ;  the  last  division,  the 
fourth  front ;  the  right  companies  of  the  other  divisions  will  form 
the  second  front ;  and  the  left  companies  of  the  same  divisions  the 
thifrd  front. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION.  177 


837.  A  battalion  beinp  in  column  by  company,  at  full  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  in  march,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form 
square,  he  will  cause  this  movement  to  be  executed  by  the  coni- 
mands  and  means  indicated,  No.  817. 

838.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  close  to  company 
distance,  as  is  prescribed.  No.  278.  When  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  shall  command  Quick  march,  the  file  closers  of  this  division 
will  place  themselves  before  the  front  rank. 

S;jn.  The  major  and  the  buglers  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, No.  820. 

840.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Fon7i  square.     2.  Right  and  left  into  line,  wheel.     3.  March. 

841.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
caution  it  to  halt;  all  the  captains  of  the  second  and  third  divi- 
sions will  rapidly  place  themselves  before  the  centers  of  their 
respective  companies,  and  caution  them  that  they  will  have  to 
w^hcel,  the  right  companies  to  the  right,  and  the  left  companies  to 
the  left  into  line.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  caution  it 
to  continue  its  march,  and  will  hasten  to  its  left  flank.  At  the 
third  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  chief  of  the  first  division 
will  halt  his  division  and  align  it  to  the  left,  the  outer  files  will 
face  to  the  right  and  left,  the  rest  of  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  No.  828  and  following. 

842.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  the  major,  at  the  command 
march,  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  822. 

843.  If  the  battalion,  before  the  square  is  formed,  be  in  donble 
column,  the  two  leading  companies  will  form  the  first  front,  the 
two  rear  companies  the  fourth  ;  the  other  companies  of  the  right 
half  battalion  will  form  the  second,  and  those  of  the  left  half  bat- 
talion the  third  fi'ont. 

844.  The  first  and  fourth  fronts  will  be  commanded  by  the  chiefs 
of  the  first  and  fourth  divisions;  each  of  the  other  two  by  its 
senior  captain. 

845.  The  commander  of  each  front  will  place  himself  four  paces 
behind  its  present  rear  rank,  and  will  be  replaced  momcntaril}'  in 
the  command  of  his  company  by  the  next  in  rank  therein. 

840.  If  the  column  bo  at  full  distance,  instead  of  at  company 
distnnce,  as  has  been  supposed,  the  square  will  be  formed  in  the 
manner  prescribed.  No.  817  or  838.  and  following;  and  the  dispo- 
sitions indicat-cd,  Nos.  819  and  820,  will  be  executed  at  the  com- 
mand form  fiquare. 

847.  If  the  column  by  division,  whether  double  or  simple,  be  in 
mass,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  square,  he  will  first 
cause  it  to  take  company  distance;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command  : 

1 .   To  form  square.     2.  By  the  head  of  column,  take  half  distance, 

848.  The  divisions  will  take  half  distance  by  the  means  indi- 
cat^^d,  No.  324.  an<l  following.  What  is  iirescribed.  No.  820,  will 
be  exeoated  as  the  first  and  second  divisions  are  put  in  motion. 

12 


178  SfJHOOL  OF  THE   BATTALION. 

849.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  the  moment  the  third 
division  shall  have  its  distance.  As  soon  as  the  column  is  halted, 
the  dispositions  indicated,  No.  819,  will  be  executed,  and  when 
these  are  completed,  the  colonel  may  proceed  to  form  square. 

850.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  he  will  also,  in  the  first  place, 
cause  company  distance  to  be  taken,  and,  for  this  purpose,  will 
command  : 

1.   To  form  square.     2.  By  the  head  of  column,  take  half  distance.     3. 
MaAch  (or  double  quick — March). 

851.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed.  No.  330,  and 
following.  What  is  prescribed,  No.  820,  will  be  executed  as  the 
first  and  second  divisions  ai-e  put  in  motion. 

852.  The  colonel  will  proceed  to  form  square  the  moment  the 
third  division  shall  have  its  distance  ;  at  the  command  form  square, 
the  dispositions  indicated,  No.  819,  will  be  executed.  If  it  be 
intended  merely  to  dispose  the  column  for  square,  the  colonel  will 
not  halt  the  column  until  the  last  division  has  its  distance. 

853.  In  a  simple  column,  loft  in  front,  these  several  movements 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  b}'  inverse 
means ;  but  the  fronts  of  the  square  will  have  the  same  designa- 
tions as  if  the  right  of  the  column  were  in  front,  that  is,  the  first 
division  will  constitute  the  first  front,  and  thus  of  the  other  subdi- 
visions. 

854.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  distance  of  less  than  thirty 
paces,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  (such)  front,  foncard.     2.  March. 

855.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  advance  be  made  by  the  first 
front,  the  chief  of  this  front  will  command  : 

1.  First  division,  foncard.     2.   Guide  center. 

856.  The  chief  of  the  second  front  will  face  his  front  to  the  left. 
The  captains  of  the  companies  composing  this  front  Avill  place 
themselves  outside,  and  on  the  right  of  their  left  guides,  who  will 
replace  them  in  the  front  rank ;  the  chief  of  the  third  front  will 
ftice  his  front  to  the  right,  and  the  captains  in  this  front  will 
place  themselves  outside,  and  on  the  left  of  their  covering  ser- 
geants ;  the  chief  of  the  fourth  front  will  face  his  front  about, 
and  command  :  1.  Fourth  division,  forward ;  2.  Guide  center.  The 
captain  who  is  in  the  center  of  the  first  front,  will  be  charged  with 
the  direction  of  the  march,  and  will  regulate  himself  by  the  means 
indicated  in  the  School  of  the  Company,  No.  89. 

857.  At  the  command  march,  the  square  will  put  itself  in  mo- 
tion ;  the  companies  marching  by  the  flank  will  be  careful  not  to 
lose  their  distances.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  cause 
his  division  to  keep  constantly  closed  on  the  flanks  of  the  second 
and  third  fronts. 

858.  This  movement  will  only  be  executed  in  quick  time. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION. 


179 


859.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  in  rear  of  the  file 
of  direction  in  order  to  regulate  his  march. 

860.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  halt  the  square,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

861.  At  the  second  command,  the  square  will  halt;  the  fourth 
front  will  face  about  immediately,  and  without  further  command; 
the  second  and  third  fronts  will  fiice  outwards;  the  captains  of 
companies  will  resume  their  places  as  in  square. 

8G2.  In  moving  the  squai*e  forward  by  the  second,  third,  or 
fourth  fronts,  the  same  rules  will  be  observed. 

863.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  greater  distance  than  thirty 
paces,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Form  column. 

864.  The  chief  of  the  first  front  will  command  : 

1.  First  division  forward.     2.   Guide  left. 

865.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  caution  it  to  stand 
fast;  the  commander  of  the  second  front  will  cause  it  to  face  to 
the  left,  and  then  command,  By  company,  by  file  left.  The  com- 
mander of  the  third  front  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and 
then  command,  By  company,  by  file  right.  At  the  moment  the 
second  and  third  fronts  face  to  the  left  and  right,  each  captain  will 
cause  to  break  to  the  rear  the  two  leading  files  of  his  company. 

866.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

3.  MABcn  (or  double  quick — March). 


^4 


Erin 


Cm 


867.  At  this  command,  the  first  front  will  march  forward;  its 
chief  will  halt  it  when  it  shall  have  advanced  a  space  equal  to  half 
it«  front,  and  align  it  by  the  left. 

868.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  second  and  third 
fronts  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  left  and  right,  and  march  to  meet 
each  other  behind  the  center  of  the  first  division,  and  the  moment 
they  unite,  the  captain  of  each  company  will  halt  his  company 
and  face  it  to  the  front.  The  division  being  re-formed,  its  chief 
will  align  it  by  the  left. 

869.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  cause  it  to  face 
about;  its  file  closers  will  remain  before  the  front  rank. 


180  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

870.  The  column  being  thus  re-formed,  the  colonel  may  put  it 
in  march  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed,  No.  164,  and 
following ;  the  right  guides  will  preserve  company  distance  exact- 
ly as  the  directing  guides. 

871.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  square,  he  will  give 
the  commands  indicated,  No.  840. 

872.  To  cause  the  square  to  march  in  retreat  a  distance  greater 
than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  column  to  be  formed 
as  indicated.  No.  863 ;  and  when  formed,  he  will  cause  it  to  face 
by  the  rear  rank  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  march  in  retreat.      2.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.      3.  Battalion^ 

about — Face. 

873.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the  interior  di- 
visions will  place  themselves,  passing  by  the  outer  flanks  of  their 
respective  companies,  behind  the  front  rank  opposite  to  their  places 
in  line  of  battle  ;  the  file  closers  of  the  other  divisions  will  stand 
fast. 

874.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face  about;  each 
chief  of  division  will  place  himself  before  its  rear  rank,  become 
front,  passing  through  the  interval  between  its  two  companies; 
the  guides  will  step  into  the  rear  rank,  now  front. 

875.  The  column  being  thus  disposed,  the  colonel  may  put  it  in 
march,  or  cause  it  to  form  square,  as  if  it  were  faced  by  the  front. 
The  square  being  formed,  its  fronts  will  preserve  the  same  desig- 
nations they  had  when  faced  by  the  front  rank. 

876.  The  battalion  being  in  square  by  the  rear  rank,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat  or  in  advance,  a  distance 
less  than  thirty  paces,  he  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed.  No. 
854,  and  following;  otherwise,  he  will  re-form  the  column  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed.  No.  863,  by  marching  toward  the 
fourth  front. 

877.  If  the  square  is  to  be  marched  to  the  front  a  distance 
greater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will  face  the  column  by  the 
front  rank  ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To  march  in  advance.     2.  Face  by  the  front  rank.     "i.  Battalion, 

about — Face. 

878.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  873,  and  fol- 
lowing. 

879.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  advance,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  march  in  retreat.      2.  Battalion,  right  about.    3.  March  (or 
^,,  double  quick — March). 

880.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the  second  and 
third  divisions  will  place  themselves  rapidly  before  the  front  rank 
of  their  respective  divisions.  At  the  command  march,  the  column 
will  face  about  and  move  off  to  the  rear;  the  chiefs  of  divisions 
and  the  guides  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  874. 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION. 


181 


881.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  retreat,  and  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  march  it  in  advance,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To  march  in  advance.     2.  Battalion,  right  about.     3.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

882.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the  second  and 
third  divisions  will  place  themselves  before  the  rear  rank  of  their 
respective  divisions ;  at  the  third,  the  column  will  face  by  the 
front  rank. 

To  reduce  the  square. 


'^M^^S 


1 


l-=Rl 


^\M'/Mm'm'-fy/''/^/^''^^^^  ** 


E[;;^^w////LH\  -^^^«»"^  ^rllal 


Kg  2 


883.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  break  the  square,  will  command: 
1.  Reduce  square.     2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

884.  This  movement  will  be  executed  in  the  manner  indicated, 
No.  863,  and  following  ;  but  the  file  closers  of  the  fourth  front  will 
place  themselves  behind  the  rear  rank  the  moment  it  faces  about; 
the  field  and  staff,  the  color-bearer,  and  buglers,  will,  at  the  same 
time,  return  to  their  places  in  column. 

To  form  square  from  line  of  battle. 

885.  A  battalion  deployed,  may  be  formed  into  square  in  a  di- 
rection either  parallel  or  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle. 

886.  In  the  first  ca.se,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion  to 
break  by  division  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  and  then  close 
the  column  to  half  distance,  as  indicated.  No.  817,  and  follow- 
ing. 

887.  In  the  second  case,  he  will  ploy  the  battalion  into  simple 
column  by  division  at  half  distance  in  rear  of  the  right  or  left  di- 
vision, or  into  column  doubled  on  the  center. 

888.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  upen  one  of  the  flank 
divisions,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Column  at  half  distance  by  division.  3.  On 
the  first  (or  fourth)  division.  4.  Battalion,  right  (or  left)— Yaok. 
5.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

889.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed.  No   119,  and  following. 

890.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  liae  of  battle,  and  the  oolo* 


182  SCHOOL  OF  THE  ba.ttalio:n-. 

nel  shall  wish  to  foi*m  square  in  a  direction  perpendicular  to  the 
line  of  battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  On  the  first  (pv  fourth)  division^  form  column. 
3.  Battalion,  by  the  right  (or  left)  flank.  4.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

891.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  ploying  a  column  by  division  at  half  distance, 
Ko.  150.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  will  halt  his  division  at 
the  command  march. 

892.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  double  column,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1.   To  form  square.     2.  Double  column  at  half  distance.     S.  Battalion, 
inwards — Face.     4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

.  893.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  778,  and 
following. 

894.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  into  double  column 
to  form  square,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   To  form  square.      2.  Form  double  column.      3.  Battalion  by  the 
right  and  left  flanks.     4.  Makck  (ov  double  quick — March). 

895.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed.  No.  788. 
The  chief  of  the  leading  division  will  halt  his  division  at  the  com- 
mand march. 

Observations  relative  to  the  formation  of  squares  in  two  7-anks. 

896.  When  the  colonel  shall  judge  it  proper  to  have  a  reserve,. 
this  reserve,  in  a  column  of  three  divisions,  will  be  formed  of  the- 
inner  platoons  of  the  second  division.  The  second  division  will,  irt 
this  case,  close  to  platoon  distance  on  the  first  division.  When  the 
square  is  formed,  the  reserve  platoons  will  move  forward  a  distance 
nearly  equal  to  a  platoon  front. 

897.  In  re-forming  column,  the  first  division  will  move  forward 
platoon,  instead  of  company  distance. 

898.  If  the  column  be  formed  of  four  divisions,  the  inner  platoons 
of  the  third  division  will  compose  the  reserve;  then,  in  re-forming 
column,  the  first  division  will  conform  to  the  general  rule,  and  the 
chief  of  the  third,  as  soon  as  his  division  is  formed,  will  close  it  to 
platoon  distance  on  the  second  division.  The  colonel  may,  if  ne- 
cessary, form  the  reserve  of  the  entire  third  division.  In  this  case, 
the  movement  will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner: 

899.  If  the  column  be  at  full  distance,  when  it  shall  close,  at  the 
command  to  form  square,  to  half  distance,  the  chief  of  the  third 
division  will  cause  four  files  to  break  to  the  rear  from  the  right  and 
left  of  his  division;  the  guides  will  close  upon  the  outer  files  re- 
maining in  line,  and  the  left  guide  will  march  exactly  in  the  trace 
of  the  file  immediately  in  fi-ont  of  him.  This  division  will  then 
close  in  mass  on  the  second  division;  and  the  chief  of  the  fourth' 
division  will  close  to  half  distance  on  the  same  division. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  183 

900.  At  the  command  /onn  square,  the  chief  of  the  reserve  divi- 
sion will  command,  1.  Third  division,  forward.  2.  Guide  center;  at 
this  command,  tlic  guides  on  the  flanks  will  fall  into  the  line  of  file 
closers.  At  the  command  march,  the  reserve  will  move  forward 
the  distance  of  a  company  front.  When  halted,  its  chief  will 
cause  the  platoons  to  be  doubled,  and  for  this  purpose  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  On  the  center  double  platoons.     2.  March. 

901.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  place  them- 
selves in  front  of  the  center  of  their  respective  platoons ;  the  chief 
of  each  outer  platoon  will  face  his  platoon  toward  the  center,  and 
cause  to  break  to  the  rear  two  files  from  the  left  or  right.  At  the 
command  march,  the  outer  platoons  will  direct  their  march  so  as  to 
double  on  the  center  platoon  at  the  distance  of  four  paces  ;  their 
chiefs  will  align  these  outer  platoons  on  the  center,  and  the  files 
previously  broken  to  the  rear  will  come  into  lino. 

902.  If  the  column  be  at  half,  instead  of  full  distance,  the  colo- 
nel before  forming  square  will  oi-der  the  chiefs  of  the  third  and 
fourth  divisions  to  move  forward  their  divisions  as  prescribed  No. 
899. 

903.  If  the  columji  be  closed  in  mass,  at  the  command  t0  form 
square,  the  chief  of  the  third  division  will  break  four  files  to  the 
rear  from  each  of  the  flanks,  as  prescribed  No.  899. 

904.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  as  soon  as  the  second  divi- 
sion shall  have  gained  its  distance. 

905.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  column  to  continue  marching, 
at  the  command,  7?*/  the  head  of  column  take  half  distance,  the  chief 
of  the  reserve  division  will  give  his  cautionary  commands  in  suf- 
ficient time  to  place  his  division  in  motion,  simultaneously  with 
the  one  which  precedes  it.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will 
give  the  command  march.,  at  the  instant  there  is  company  distance 
betVcen  his  division  and  the  second. 

906.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  the  column,  at  the 
command  form  column^  the  chief  of  the  third  division  will  com- 
mand, Form  division  ;  at  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  outer  pla- 
toons which  have  doubled  in  rear  of  the  center  platoons,  will  give 
the  commands  and  make  the  preparatory  movements  for  deploy- 
ing on  the  center  platoons,  which  will  be  executed  at  the  command 
7?iarc/i,  given  by  the  c-olonel  and  briskly  repeated  by  the  chief  of 
this  division.  The  division  being  re-formed,  the  chiefs  of  the  outer 
platoons  will  retake  their  places  in  column,  and  the  chief  of  this 
division  will  again  cause  four  files  from  each  of  its  flanks  to  break 
to  the  rear. 

907.  If,  before  the  formation  of  the  square,  the  column  had  been 
left  in  front,  it  would  be  formed  b\'  the  same  commands  and  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles.  The  second  division,  in  this  case, 
would  form  the  reserve. 

90R.  The  column  being  formed,  if  the  colonel  should  wish  to 
march  it  in  retreat  he  will  face  it  by  the  rear  rank.     The  files  of 


184  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

the  third  division  broken  off  to  the  rear,  will  face  about  with  the 
battalion,  and,  when  the  column  is  put  in  motion,  will  march  in 
front  of  the  rear  rank.  But,  should  the  colonel  Avish  to  re-form 
the  square,  he  will  cause  the  battalion  to  face  by  the  front  rank.   , 

909.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line,  instead  of  in  column,  the  chief 
of  the  reserve  division  will  bring  it  into  column  in  such  manner 
that  there  may  be  a  distance  of  onl}-  four  paces  between  this  divi- 
sion and  the  one  which  is  to  be  immediately  in  front  of  it;  and 
when  this  division  is  halted  and  aligned,  its  chief  will  cause  the 
usual  number  of  files  to  be  broken  to  the  rear.  The  chief  of  the 
division  which  should  occupy  in  column  a  position  immediately  in 
rear  of  the  reserve  division  will,  on  entering  the  column,  take  a 
distance  of  twelve  paces  between  it  and  the  division  established 
immediately  in  front  of  the  reserve  division. 

Squares  in  four  ranks. 

910.  If  the  squai'e  formed  in  two  ranks,  according  to  the  prece- 
ding rules,  should  not  be  deemed  sufficiently  strong,  the  colonel 
may  cause  the  square  to  be  formed  in  four  ranks. 

911.  The  battalion  being  in  column  by  company  at  full  distance 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form 
square  in  four  ranks,  he  will  first  cause  divisions  to  be  formed,  which 
being  executed,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  fo7-7n  square  in  four  ranks.     2.   To  half  distance,  dose  column. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

912.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
caution  the  right  company  to  face  to  the  left,  and  the  left  com- 
pany to  face  to  the  right.  The  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will 
caution  their  divisions  to  move  foi'ward. 

913.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  company  of  the  first  di- 
vision will  form  into  four  ranks  on  its  left  file,  and  the  left  com- 
pany into  four  ranks  on  its  right  file.  The  formation  ended,  the 
chief  of  this  division  will  align  it  by  the  left. 

914.  The  other  divisions  will  move  forward  and  double  their 
files  marching  ;  the  right  company  of  each  division  will  double  on 
its  left  file,  and  the  left  company  on  its  right  file.  The  formation 
completed,  each  chief  of  division  will  command,  Gxiide  left.  Each 
chief  will  halt  his  division  when  it  shall  have  the  distance  of  a 
company  front  in  four  ranks  from  the  preceding  one,  counting  from 
its  rear  rank,  and  will  align  his  division  by  the  left.  At  the  in- 
stant the  fourth  division  is  halted,  the  file  closers  will  move  raj)idly 
before  its  front  rank. 

915.  The  colonel  will  form  square,  re-form  column,  and  reduce 
square  in  four  ranks,  by  the  same  commands  and  means  as  pi'e- 
scribed  for  a  battalion  in  two  ranks.     , 

916.  If  the  square  formed  in  four  ranks  be  reduced  and  at  a  halt, 
and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  the  battalion  into  two  ranks,  he 
will  command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION.  186 

1.  In  two  ronhs  undouble  files.     2.  Battalion  outwards — Face. 

3.  March. 

917.  At  tlio  first  command,  tl>e  captainn  will  step  before  the  cen- 
ters of  their  rospoctive  companies,  and  those  on  the  right  will  cau- 
tion them  to  face  to  the  right,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face  to  the 
loft. 

918.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  fiice  to  the  right 
and  left. 

919.  At  the  command  march,  each  company  will  undouble  its 
file-8  and  re-form  into  two  ranks  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the 
company  No.  376,  and  following.  Each  captflin  will  halt  his  com- 
pany and  face  it  to  the  front.  The  formation  completed,  each  chief 
of  division  will  align  his  division  by  the  left. 

920.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  with  divisions  formed  in  four 
ranks,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  them  into  two  ranks, 
he  will  command  : 

1.  Guide  center.     2.  In  two  ranks,  undouble  files.     3.  March. 

921.  The  captain,  placed  in  the  center  of  each  division,  will  con- 
tinue to  march  straight  to  the  front,  as  will  also  the  left  file  of  the 
right  company,  and  the  right  file  of  the  left  company.  Each  com- 
pany will  then  be  re-formed  into  two  ranks,  as  prescribed  in  tlie 
school  of  the  company. 

922.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  two  rank.«;,  the  colonel  Avill 
command,  Guide  left  (or  right). 

923.  To  form  square  in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the  flank  divisions, 
the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranis.  2.  Column  at  half  dist<in re.  by  di- 
vision. 3.  On  the  fir.^t  (or  fourth)  divi.sion.  4.  Battalion,  right 
(OT  left) — Facb.     5.  }\iIarcu  (or  double  quick — March). 

92.4.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division  will  place 
himself  before  the  center  of  his  divistt)n,  and  caution  it  to  'face  to 
the  right. 

925.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  right  guide  of  the  first  divi- 
sion will  remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the 
right. 

926  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four  men  of  the 
first  division  will  face  to  the  front  remaining  double<l.  All  the 
other  files  of  four  men  will  step  off  together,  and  each  in  succes- 
sion will  close  up  to  its  proper  distance  on  the  file  preceding  it, 
and  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  When  the  last  file  shall 
have  closed,  the  chief  of  division  will  command,  Left — Dress. 

927.  The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  column  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  with  a  battalion  in  two  ranks,  observing  what  follows;  tbc 
cbicfs  of  division,  instead  of  allowing  their  divisions  to  file  past 
them  on  entering  the  column,  will  continue  to  lead  them,  and  as 
each  division  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with  the  riglit  guide  of  the  first 
division,  its  chief  will  halt  the  right  guide,  who  will  immediately 


186  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

face  to  the  front ;  the  first  file  of  four  men  will  also  halt  at  the 
same  time  and  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The  second 
file  will  close  on  the  first,  and  when  closed,  halt,  and  face  to  the 
front,  remaining  doubled.  All  the  other  files  will  execute  succes- 
sively what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second.  When  the 
last  file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of  division  will  command,  Left 
— Dress. 

928.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  On  the  first  division,  form 
column.  3.  Battalion,  by  the  right  flank.  4.  March  (or  double 
guick — March), 

929.  At  the  second  command,  each  "chief  of  division  will  step  in 
front  of  the  center  of  his  division  and  caution  it  to  face  by  the 
right  flank.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  his  cover- 
ing sergeant  to  halt,  and  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

930.  At  the  command  march,  i\\Q  battalion  will  face  to  the  right; 
the  covering  sergeant  of  the  first  division  will  halt  and  remain 
faced  to  the  front,  the  first  division  will  then  form  into  four  ranks 
as  heretofore  prescribed.  The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  col- 
umn in  the  same  manner  as  if  the  movement  had  taken  place 
from  a  halt. 

931.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  a  pei'pendicular  square 
in  four  ranks,  by  double  column,  he  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Double  column,  at  half  distance. 
3.  Battalion  imcards — Face.  4.  March  (or  double  quick  — 
March). 

932.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  companies  will 
place  themselves  before  the  centers  of  their  respective  companies, 
and  caution  those  on  the  right  to  face  to  the  left,  and  those  on  the 
left  to  face  to  the  right.  The  captain  of  the  fifth  company  will 
caution  his  covering  sci-gcant  to  stand  fast. 

933.  At  the  thii-d  command,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  left 
and  right ;  at  the  command  march,  the  left  file  of  the  fourth,  and 
the  right  file  of  the  fifth  compan}',  will  face  to  the  front,  remaining 
doubled.  The  fourth  company  will  close  successively  by  file  of 
fours  on  the  left  file,  and  the  fifth  company,  in  like  manner,  on  the 
right  file  ;  the  files  will  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The 
formation  completed,  the  chief  of  division  will  command.  Right 
dress.  The  junior  captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval 
between  the  two  com^janies. 

934.  The  other  companies  will  close  as  prescribed  for  the  double 
column  in  two  ranks,  observing  what  follows :  each  captain  will 
halt  the  leading  guide  of  his  company  the  moment  the  head  of  his 
company  arrives  on  a  line  with  the  center  of  the  column.  In  the 
right  companies,  the  left  guides  will  step  into  the  line  of  file  closers, 
and  the  left  file  of  four  men  will  face  immediately  to  the  front, 
remaining  doubled,  and  by  the  side  of  the  right  guide  of  the  left 
company.     The  companies  will  each  form  into  four  ranks,  as  pre- 


SCHOOL    OF  THE    BATTALION. 


187 


scribed  No.  926,  the  right  companies  on  the  left  file,  and  the  left 
companies  on  the  right  file.  The  formation  completed,  the  junior 
captain  will  place  himself  between  the  two  companies,  and  the 
senior  will  command,  Jiight  d?'css. 

935.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  To  form  square^  in  four  ranks.  2.  Form  double  column.  ,3.  Bat- 
talion by  the  right  and  left  flanks.  4.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March. 

936.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  will  place  themselves 
before  the  centers  of  their  respective  companies,  and  those  on  the 
right  will  caution  them  to  face  by  the  left  flank,  and  those  on  the 
left  to  face  by  the  right  flank ;  the  captain  of  the  fifth  company 
will  caution  his  covering  sergeant  to  halt,  and  remain  faced  to  the 
front. 

937.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies  will 
halt.  The  battalion  will  face  to  the  left  and  right;  the  covering 
sergeant  of  the  fifth  company  will  halt  and  remain  faced  to  the 
front,  the  movement  will  then  be  executed  as  if  the  battalion  was 
at  a  halt. 

Oblique  squares. 


938.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  form  the  oblique  square,  he  will  command  : 

1.   To  form  oblique  .square.     2.   On  the  first  division  form  column. 

939.  At  the  second  command,  the   lieutenant-colonel  will  trace 
the  alignment  of  the  first  division  in  the  following  manner :  he 


188  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

will  place  himself  before  and  near  the  right  file  of  this  division, 
face  to  the  left,  march  twelve  paces  along  the  front  rank,  halt,  face 
to  the  right,  march  twelve  paces  perpendicularly  to  the  front,  halt 
again,  face  to  the  right,  and  immediately  place  a  marker  at  this 
point.  The  covering  sergeant  of  the  right  company  will  step,  at 
the  same  time,  before  its  right  file,  face  to  the  left,  and  conform 
the  line  of  his  shoulders  to  that  of  the  shoulders  of  the  marker 
■established  by  the  lieutenant-colonel.  These  two  markers  being 
established,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  a  third  marker  on  the 
same  alignment,  at  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  division  will 
halt. 

940.  The  chiefs  of  division  will  place  themselves  in  front  of  the 
centers  of  their  divisions ;  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will  im- 
mediately establish  it  by  a  wheel  to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot, 
against  the  markers,  and  align  it  by  the  left.  The  chiefs  of  the 
other  divisions  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the  right.  The  colonel 
will  then  command : 

3.  Battalion  right — Face.     4.  March  (or  double  quick  ^—M-Aucb). 

941.  The  three  rear  divisions  will  direct  their  march  so  as  to 
place  themselves  at  half  distance  from  each  other,  and  in  the  rear 
of  the  first  division,  as  previously  indicated,  observing  what 
follows : 

942.  The  chief  of  the  second  division,  instead  of  breaking  the 
headmost  files  to  the  rear,  "will  break  them  to  the  front,  and  at  the 
command  march,  will  conduct  his  division  towards  the  point  of 
entrance  into  the  column.  Arrived  at  this  point,  he  will  halt  in 
his  own  jjerson,  cause  his  division  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  right, 
instructing  the  right  guide  to  direct  himself  parallelly  to  the  first 
division;  and  as  soon  as  the  left  file  has  passed,  its  chief  will  halt 
the  division,  and  align  it  by  the  left.  The  other  divisions  will 
break  to  the  rear,  but  slightly ;  each  will  enter  the  column  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  second,  and  the  moment  the  battalion  is  ployed  in- 
to column,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  form  square. 

943.  The  formation  of  a  battalion  into  oblique  square  on  the  left 
division,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means. 

944.  Should  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will  first 
cause  it  to  halt.  ^, 

945.  In  the  preceding  example,  the  battalion  was  supposed  to 
be  deployed  ;  but  if  it  be  already  formed  in  column,  the  desired 
obliquity  will  be  established  by  causing  it  to  change  direction  by 
the  flank ;  to  this  end,  the  colonel  will  command  : 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION, 


189 


1.  To  form  oblique  square.     2.  Change  direction  by  the  right  (or  leff) 

flank. 


13  o  a  aaocTDrcTTTLra 


D 

il 

M         k 

oaoaoO'Dn'O  ooo 

m 

•r  '■ 

1             ]< 

a  C'C  DQCODDDDD 

a 

z\ 

M               li 

ca 

oo  onoa  o  odd 

■ 

S.' 

m             1. 

crjo  a  nnnaoaon 


046.  At  the  second  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  trace 
the  new  direction  in  the  following  manner ;  lie  will  place  before 
the  right  and  left  files  of  the  headmost  division,  two  markers,  and 
a  third  on  the  prolongation  of  the  first  two,  on  the  side  of  the 
change  of  direction,  and  at  twelve  paces  from  the  flank  of  the 
column.  He  will  then  place  himself  before  the  third  marker, 
march  twelve  paces  perpendicularly  to  the  front,  halt,  and  finish 
tracing  the  new  direction  in  the  manner  indicated,  Ko.  030. 

947.  The  colcmel  will  then  command  : 

3.  Battalion  right  (or  left) — Face.      4.  March   (or  double  quick — 

March.) 

04S.  The  rhangp  of  direction  having  been  executed,  the  colonel 
will  cause  tho  square  to  bo  formed. 

040.  Should  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  Will  first  cause 
it  to  halt. 


190  SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION. 

950.  Oblique  squares  in  four  ranks,  "will  be  executed  by  the  same 
means,  and  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  formation 
of  squares  in  four  ranks. 

951.  Whether  the  battalion  be  ployed  into  simple  or  double 
column,  the  particular  dispositions  for  the  formation  of  the  square 
will  be  executed  as  pi*escribcd  No.  819  and  following.  The  divi- 
sion which  is  to  form  the  rear  of  the  column,  will  be  closed  in 
mass,  and  as  soon  as  it  is  aligned,  the  major  will  rectify  the  position 
of  the  guides  on  the  side  of  the  column  opposite  to  the  direction. 

952.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  merely  to  prepare  for  square, 
he  will  in  all  formations  with  that  view  substitute  the  command 
'prepare  for  square  in  place  of  to  form  square,  and  in  that  case,  the 
last  division  will  enter  the  column  at  company  distance. 

Remarks  on  the  formation  of  squares. 

953.  It  is  a  general  principle  that  a  column  by  company,  which 
is  to  be  formed  into  square,  will  first  form  divisions,  and  close  to 
half  distance.  Nevertheless,  if  it  find  itself  suddenly  thi*eatened 
by  cavalry  without  sufficient  time  to  form  divisions,  the  colonel 
will  cause  the  column  to  close  to  platoon  distance  and  then  form 
square  by  the  commands  and  means  which  have  been  indicated ; 
the  leading  and  rearmost  comj^anies  will  conform  themselves  to 
what  has  been  prescribed  for  divisions  in  those  positions.  The 
other  comjianies  will  form  by  platoon  to  the  right  and  left  into 
line  of  battle,  and  each  chief  of  platoon,  after  having  halted  it, 
will  2)lace  himself  on  the  line,  as  if  the  platoon  were  a  company, 
and  he  will  be  covered  by  the  guide  in  the  rear  rank. 

954.  A  battalion  in  column  at  full  distance,  having  to  form  square, 
will  always  close  on  the  leading  subdivision  ;  and  a  column  closed 
in  mass,  will  always,  for  the  same  purpose,  take  distances  by  the 
head.  In  either  case,  the  second  subdivision  should  be  careful,  in 
taking  its  distance,  to  reckon  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  subdivis- 
ion in  front  of  it. 

955.  If  a  column  by  company  should  bo  required  to  form  square 
in  four  ranks,  the  doubling  of  files  will  always  take  place  on  the 
file  next  the  guide. 

956.  When  a  column,  disposed  to  form  square,  shall  be  in  march, 
it  will  change  direction  as  a  column  at  half  distance  ;  thiis,  having 
to  execute  this  movement,  the  column  will  take  the  guide  on  the 
side  opposite  to  that  to  which  the  change  of  direction  is  to  be 
made,  if  that  be  not  alread}^  the  side  of  the  guide. 

957.  A  column  doubled  on  the  center  at  company  distance  or 
closed  in  mass,  may  be  formed  into  square  according  to  the  same 
principles  as  a  simple  column. 

958.  When  a  battalion  is  ployed,  with  a  view  to  the  square,  it 
will  always  be  in  rear  of  the  right  or  left  division,  in  order  that  it 
may  be  able  to  commence  firing,  pending  the  execution  of  the 
movement.  The  double  column,  also,  affords  this  advantage,  and 
being  more  promptly  formed  than  any  other,  it  will  habitually  be 


SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION. 


191 


«mployed,  unless  particular  circumstances  cause  a  diflfcrent  form- 
ation to  be  preferred. 

959.  A  battalion,  in  square,  will  never  use  any  other  than  the 
fire  by  file  and  by  rank  ;  the  color  being  in  the  line  of  file  closers, 
its  guard  will  not  fall  back  as  prescribed  No.  41 ;  it  will  fire  like 
the  men  of  the  company  of  which  it  forms  a  part. 

960.  If  the  square  be  formed  in  four  ranks,  the  first  two  ranks 
will  alone  execute  the  firings  prescribed  above  ;  the  other  two  ranks 
will  remain  either  at  shoulder  or  support  arms. 

961.  The  formation  of  the  square  being  often  necessary  in  war, 
and  being  the  most  cumplicated  of  the  manoeuvres,  it  will  be  as 
frequently  repeated  as  the  supposed  necessity  may  require,  in  or- 
der to  render  its  mechanism  familiar  to  both  ofiicers  and  men. 

962.  In  the  execution  of  this  manoeuvre,  the  colonel  will  care- 
fully observe  that  the  divers  movements  which  it  involves  succeed 
each  other  without  loss  of  time,  but  also  without  confusion  ;  for, 
if  the  rapidity  of  cavalry  movements  requires  the  greatest  prompt- 
itude in  the  formation  of  squares,  so,  on  the  other  hand,  precipi- 
tancy always  results  in  disorder,  and  in  no  circumstance  is  disor- 
der more  to  be  avoided. 

963.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cover  by  skirmishers  the 
movements  of  a  column  preparing  to  form  square,  he  will  detach 
for  this  purpose  one  or  two  inner  platoons  of  one  of  the  interior 
divisions  of  the  column.  In  this  case,  the  exterior  platoons  of  this 
division  and  the  following  subdivisions,  will,  according  to  circum- 
stances, close  on  the  preceding  subdivision,  in  such  manner,  that 
there  may  be  between  them  only  the  distance  necessary-  for  form- 
ing into  line. 

964.  When  tlie  colonel  shall  be  ready  to  form  square,  he  will,  in 
order  to  recall  the  skirmishers,  cause  to  the  color  to  be  sounded.  If 
on  the  return  of  the  skirmishers,  there  be  not  room  for  them  to 
form  into  line  of  battle,  they  Avill  double  on  the  outer  platoons  of 
their  respective  companies. 

Column  against  Cavalry. 

-9^ 


965.  When  a  column  closed    i))  mass  has   to  form  square,  it  will 
begin  by  taking  company  dist-ince  ;  but  if  so  suddenly  threatenod 


192  SCHOOL   OF  THE    BATTALION. 

by  cavalry  as  not  to  allow  time  for  this  disposition,  it  will  be  formed 
in  the  following  manner  : 

966.  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.   Column  against  Cavalry.     2.  March. 

967.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading  division  will 
caution  it  to  stand  fast  and  pass  behind  the  rear  rank  ;  in  the  inte- 
rior divisions  each  captain  will  promptly  designate  the  number  of 
files  necessary  to  close  the  interval  between  his  company  and  the 
one  in  front  of  it.  The  captains  of  the  divisions  next  to  the  one 
in  rear,  in  addition  to  closing  the  interval  in  front,  will  also  close 
up  the  interval  which  separates  this  division  from  the  last;  the 
chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  caution  it  to  fi^ce  about,  and  its 
file  closers  will  pass  briskly  before  the  front  rank. 

968.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  guides  of  each  division  will 
place  themselves  rapidi}'  in  the  line  of  file  closers.  The  first  divi- 
sion will  stand  fast,  the  fourth  will  foce  about,  the  outer  file  of 
each  of  these  divisions  will  then  face  outwards;  in  the  other  divi- 
sions the  files  designated  for  closing  the  intervals  will  form  to  the 
right  and  left  into  line,  but  in  the  division  next  to  the  rearmost 
one,  the  first  files  that  come  into  line  will  close  to  the  right  or  left 
until  they  join  the  rear  division.  The  files  of  each  company  which 
remain  in  column  will  close  on  their  outer  files,  formed  into  line, 
in  order  to  create  a  vacant  space  in  the  middle  of  the  column. 

969.  Jf  the  column  be  in  march,  the  column  against  cavalry  will 
be  formed  by  the  same  commands  and  means.  At  the  command 
march,  the  first  and  fourth  divisions  will  halt  and  the  latter  divis- 
ion will  face  about ;  the  interior  divisions  will  conform  tp  what 
has  been  prescribed  above. 

970.  The  battalion  being  no  longer  threatened  by  cavah*y,  the 
colonel  will  command  : 

1.  Form  column.     2.  March. 

971.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  in  column  will  close  to  thQ 
left  and  right  to  make  room  for  those  in  line,  who  will  retake  their 
places  in  column  by  stepping  backwards,  except  those  closing  the 
interval  between  the  two  rear  divisions,  who  will  take  their  places 
in  column  by  a  flank  movement.  The  fourth  division  will  face 
about,  the  guides  will  resume  their  places. 

972.  If  the  colonel  should  be  so  pressed  as  not  to  have  time  to 
order  baj^onets  to  be  fixed,  the  men  will  fix  them,  without  com- 
mand or  signal,  at  the  cautionary  command,  column  against  cavalry. 

973.  As  this  manoeuvre  is  often  used  in  war,  and  with  decided 
advantage,  the  colonel  will  frequently  cause  it  to  be  executed,  in 
order  to  render  it  familiar. 

Article  XY. —  The  rally. 

974.  The  battalion,  being  in  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  some- 
times cause  the  disperse  to  be  sounded,  at  which  signal  the  bat- 
talion will  break  and  disperse. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION.  '193 

075.  When  the  colonel  sliall  wish  to  rallv  tho  lviff.,i;^^    u        -i, 
cause  fo^A.  .0^0. to  bo  sounded,  and  at  tirs^me  t  m^^^^^^^      Two 

of  S"  T^nce  ifFit'  ''''"  ''""^^  !•'■'  'r.P^">'  ^^^^""^  '^^  P^«««  in  rear 
^^\':!l^  lil'/^c  '  V^  ^"^ '^^'^^^1'^ '"  ^'"6  of  battle. 

P«fVii-  ,^'\^^«^oneMviU  cause  the  color-com])any  to  be  promntlv 
n  an    .?'".  '"^"T-^  the  markers,  and  each  dn^auy  by  the  com^ 
an  1  of  ,ts  capta.n  will  be  aligned  on  the  color^company    accoiS 
?4    i.%  Pi-'nciples  heretofore  prescribed.  ^     ^ ' 

J7a    When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the  battalion  in  mF 
umn   he  wil  cause  tl^e  asseucbly  to  be  sounded,  and  phac"  two  znark' 
ers  before  the  position  to  be  occupied   by  the  first  <?om nan vth^ 

niar-Keis  ana  each  of  the  other  capta  ns  will  rallv  his  commnv  nt 

Serlrilfel^lu;':^'"""  '"^  '""  ^''"*  '■'™'<'  P--do  uTK 

Article  XYI.—Eules  for  manoeuvring  by  the  rear  rank. 

hylL  \'cTlnt\^C  '''r'^'y  ^«  ^^"^<^  ^  b'-^ttalion  to  mancEuvre 
will  be  ohLlil '  '  ''"  '"''  P^"^"'^^  "^^•'^'  ^'^^^  ^^''--'".^  -^'es 
«).!n^'  .'^/^^;  ^""alion  being  by  the  front  rank,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  mancBuvre  by  the  rear  rank,  he  will  command 

I.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.     2.  Battalion.     3.  ^6om?— Pace. 
i.T}'^^  ^t  battalion  be  deployed,  this  movement  will  be  execu 

98^   Tf'tl 'T  T^r""''^  ^^'  ''^«  ^'^  ^y  ^he  rear  rank.  '" 

•   1..       ,  \:^^  battalion  be  in  column  by  company    or  bv  ^-,Ufnr.r. 
nght  or  left  in  front  the  chiefs  of  subd'ivisiol;  t^'  t'ke  'thet  new 

Les::'i^^^^j:'^,  te-.!S^^^«-^of  his  subdi:^ 

Lesson  III. — Principles   of  the  direct  step   in   common  and 

quick  time  (Nos.  94,  102) 12 

Lesson  IV. — Principles  of  the  double  quick  step  (No.  104) 13 

PART  SECOHD. 

General  rules 14 

Lesson  I. — Principles  of  shouldered  arms 16 

Lesson  TI. — Manual  of  arms.  Support  arms  (No.  133.)  Pre- 
sent arms  (No.  143.)  Order  arms  (No.  147.)  Position  of 
order  arms  (No.  149.)  Load  in  nine  times  (No.  156.) 
Ready  (No.  171.)  Aim  (No.  174.)  Fire  (No.  177.)  Fix 
bayonet  (No.  188.)  Charge  bayonet  (No.  193.)  Trail 
arms  (No.  197.)  Unfix  bayonet  (No.  200^  Secure  arms 
(No.  204.)  Right  shoulder  shift  arms  (No.  210.)  Arms 
at  will  (No.  219.)  Ground  arms  (No.  222.)  Inspection 
arras  (No.  227.)  Remarks  on  the  manual  of  arms  (No. 
237)     Mark    time   (No.    241.)     Change   st«p   (No.    245.) 


194  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

rear  rank  is  deployed,  the  subdivisions  which,  in  line  of  battle  by 
the  front  rank,  ought  to  find  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  subdi- 
vision on  -which  the  deployment  is  made,  will  face  to  the  left ;  and 
those  which  ought  to  be  placed  on  its  left,  will  face  to  the  right. 

988.  "When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  faced  by  the  rear  rank, 
is  to  be  ployed  into  column,  the  colonel  will  announce  in  the  com- 
mands, left  or  right  in  fronts  according  as  it  may  be  intended  that 
the  first  or  last  subdivision  shall  be  at  the  head  of  the  column,  be- 
cause the  first  subdivision  is  on  the  left,  and  the  last  on  the  right 
of  the  battalion  faced  by  the  rear  rank.  The  column  ]}y  the  rear 
rank  will  take  the  guide  to  the  right,  if  the  first  subdivision  be  in 
fi'ont,  and  to  the  left  in  the  reverse  case. 

989.  A  column,  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  will  be  brought  to  its 
proper  front  by  the  moans  heretofore  prescribed.  If  the  column 
be  formed  by  company,  or  by  platoon,  the  chiefs  @f  subdivision,  in 
order  to  take  their  new  places  in  column,  will  pass  by  the  left  of 
subdivisions,  now  right,  and  the  file  closers  by  the  right,  now  left. 


^j 


\^  V-^ 


iAi(h   ^  <tT^t-t 


I.  ■jL'orm  coiunm.     1.  March. 


971.  At  the  command  77iarch,  the  files  in  column  will  close  to  th^ 
left  and  right  to  make  room  for  those  in  line,  who  will  retake  their 
places  in  column  by  stepping  backwards,  except  those  closing  the 
interval  between  the  two  rear  divisions,  who  will  take  their  places 
in  column  by  a  flank  movement.  The  fourth  division  will  face 
about,  the  guides  will  resume  their  places. 

972.  If  the  colonel  should  be  so  jjressed  as  not  to  have  time  to 
order  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  the  men  will  fix  them,  without  com- 
mand or  signal,  at  the  cautionary  command,  column  against  cavalry. 

973.  As  this  manoeuvre  is  often  used  in  war,  and  with  decided 
advantage,  the  colonel  will  frequently  cause  it  to  be  executed,  in 
order  to  render  it  familiar. 

Article  XV. —  The  rally. 

974.  The  battalion,  being  in  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  some- 
times cause  the  disperse  to  be  sounded,  at  which  signal  the  bat- 
talion will  break  and  disperse. 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 


TITLE    FIEST. 

ARTICLE  FIRST. 

Formation  of  a  regiment  in  order  of  battle,  or  in  line 3 

Posts  of  company  officers,  sergeants  and  corporals 4 

Posts  of  field  officers  and  regimental  staff 4 

Posts  of  field  music  and  band 5 

Color-gua#d 5 

General  guides 6 

ARTICLE  SECOND. 

Instruction  of  the  battalion 6 

In struetion  of  officers 7 

Instruction  of  sergeants 7 

Instruction  of  corporals 8 

Commands 8 

TITLE  SECOND— SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 

PART  FIR8T. 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the  soldier 8 

Lesson  1. — Position  of  the  soldier  (No.  78.)     Eyes  right,  left 

and  front  (Nos.  80,  83) 10 

Lesson  //.—Facings  (Nos.  88,  91) 12 

Lesson  III. — Principles   of  the  direct  step   in   common  and 

quick  time  (Nos.  94,  102) 12 

Lesson  IV. — Principles  of  the  double  quick  step  (No.  104) 13 

PART  BECOWD. 

General  rules 14 

Lesson  I. — Principles  of  shouldered  arms 16 

Lesson  II. — Manual  of  arms.  Support  arms  (No.  133.)  Pre- 
sent arms  (No.  143.)  Order  arms  (No.  147.)  Position  of 
order  arms  (No.  149.)  Load  in  nine  times  (No.  156.) 
Ready  (No.  171.)  Aim  (No.  174.)  Fire  (No.  177.)  Fix 
bayonet  (No.  188.)  Charge  bayonet  (No.  193.)  Trail 
arms  (No.  197.)  Unfix  bayonet  (No.  200.)  Secure  arma 
(No.  204.)  Right  shoulder  shift  arms  (No.  210.)  Arms 
at  -will  fNo.  219.)  Ground  arms  (No.  222.)  Inspection 
arms  (No.  227.)  Remarks  on  the  manual  of  arms  (No. 
237)     Mark   time  (No.   241.)     Change   step   (No.   245.) 


198  TABLE    OF   CONTENTS. 

March  backwards  (No.  247.) 15 

Lesson  III. — Load  in  four  times  (No.  250.)     Load  at  will  (No. 

257.) 28 

Lesson  IV. — Firings.  Direct  fire  (No.  261.)  Oblique  firi4igs 
(No.  266.)  Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  oblique  fire 
to  the  right  (No  267.)  Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the 
oblique  fire  to  the  left  (No.  270.)  Fire  by  file  (No.  275.) 
Fire  by  rank  (No.  285.) 29 

Lesson  V. — Fire  and  load  kneeling  (No.  292.)     Fire  and  load, 

lying  (No.  300.) 31 

Lesson  VI. — Eayonet  exercise 33 

PART   THIRD. 

Lesson  I. — Alignments 34 

Lesson  II. — March  by  the  front  (No.  325.)  March  by  the  front 
in  double  quick  time  (No.  334.)  Face  about  in  marching 
(No.  343.)     March  backwards  (No.  345.) * 35 

Lesson  III. — March  b}^  the  flank   (No.  351.)     March  by  the 

flank  in  double  quick  time  (No.  368.) 38 

Lesson  IV. — General  principles  of  wheeling  (No.  377.)  "Wheel- 
ing from  a  halt  (No.  383.)  Wheeling  in  marching  (No. 
393.)  Turning  (No.  400.)  Wheeling  and  turning  in 
double  quick  time  (No.  403.) 40 

Lesson  V. — Long  marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run 

(No.  406.)     Stack  arms  (No.  410.)     Take  arms  (No.  413.)     43 

TITLE  THIED— SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 
General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the  company 45 

LESSON  FIRST. 

Article  I. — To  open  ranks  (No.  8.) 46 

Article  II. — Alignments  in  open  ranks  (No.  18.) 47 

Article  J/J.— Manual  of  arms  (No.  26.) 48 

Article  IV— To  close  ranks  (No.  28.) 48 

Article  V. — Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed  ranks 

(No.  30) 49 

LESSON  SECOND. 

Article  I — To  load  in  four  times  and  at  will  (No.  44) 50 

AHicle  II. — To  fire  hy  company  (No.  48) 50 

Article  III— To  fire  by  file  (No.  55) 51 

Article  IV.— To  fire  by  rank  (No.  58) 51 

Article  F.— To  fire  by  the  rear  rank  (No.  68) 52 

LESSON  THIRD. 

Article  I. — To  advance  in  line  of  battle  (No.  84)...,. 53 

Article  II. — To  halt  the  company  marching  in  line  of  battle, 

and  to  align  it  (No.  99) 55 

Article  ZZ7.— Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle  (No.  101) 55 

Article  IV. — To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  and 

the  back  step  (No.  109.) 56 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS.  199 

Article  V. — To  march  in  retreat  (No.  119) 57 

LESSON  FOURTH. 

Article  I.—To  march  by  the  flank  (No.  135) 59 

Article  II.— To  change  direction  by  file  (No.  142) 60 

Avticle  III. — To  halt  the  company,  marching  by  the  flank,  and 

to  fiice  it  to  the  front  (No.  145) 60 

Article  IV. — The  company  being  in  mai*ch  by  the  flank,  to  form 

it  on  the  right  or  left,  by  file  into  line  of  battle  (No.  148)  61 
Article  Y. — The  companj-  marching  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  by 

company  or  platoon  into  line,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the 

right  and  left  in  marching  (No.  153) 62 

LESSON  FIFTH. 

Article  I. — To  break  into  column  by  platoon,  either  at  a  halt 

or  marching  (No.  171) 64 

Article  II.— To  march  in  column  (No.  105) 67 

Article  III— To  change  direction  (No.  211) 69 

Article  IV.— To  halt  the  column  (No.  231) 71 

Article  V. — Being  in  column  b}^  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right 
or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt,  or  marching  (No. 
235) 72 

LESSON  SIXTH. 

Article  I. — To  break  the  company  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form 

the  company  (No.  205) 75 

Article  II. — To  break  files  to  the  rear  and  to  cause  them  to  re- 
enter into  line  (No.  289) 77 

Article  III. — To  march  in  column  in  rout<?,  and  to  execute  the 

movements  incident  thereto  (No.  306) 79 

Article  7F.— Countermarch  (No.  334) .' 82 

Article  V. — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right 

or  left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  .343) 83 

Formation  of  a  company  from   two  ranks  into  single  I'anks, 

and  reciprocally  (No.  359) 85 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four,  and  recip- 
rocally, at  a  halt,  and  marching  (No.  371) 86 

TITLE  FOURTH— SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Formation  of  the  battalion  (No.  1) 91 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color-escort  (No.  4) 91 

Honors  paid  to  the  color  (No.  11) , 92 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the  battalion  (No. 

14) 92 

PART   FIRST. 

Article  I. — To  open  and  close  ranks  (No.  22)...  93 

Article  //.—Manual  of  arms  (No.  30) 93 

Article  III. — Loading  at  will,  and  the  firings  (No.  31) 94 

PART  SECOND. 

Article  I. — To  break  by  company  to  the  right  (No.  69).  Break 
by  company  to  the  left  (No.  74).     Break  by  division  (No. 


200  TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 

75).     To  break  by  company,  marching  (No.  84) 97 

Article  II. — Break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of  companies 
(No.  87).  Break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of  corn- 
companies,  marching  (No.  04).  Advance  or  retire  by  the 
right  or  left  of  companies  (No.  105).  Advance  or  retire 
by  the  right  or  left  of  companies,  marching  (No.  110). 
Advancing  or  retiring  by  the  right  or  left  of  companies, 

to  form  fine  to  the  front  (No.  flS) 99 

Article  III. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column  on  the  first 
division  (No.  119).  Ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column 
on  the  fourth  division  (No.  141).  Ploy  the  battalion  into 
close  column  on  any  interior  division  (No.  143).  Battal- 
ion being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  into  column  on  the  first  di- 
vision (No.  149) 103 

PART    THIRD. 

Article  I. — March  in  column  at  full  distance  (No.  164).  Col- 
umn being  in  march,  to  execute  the  about  (No.  170). 
Column  arriving  in  front  of  the  line  of  battle,  to  prolong 
it  on  this  line  (No.  175).  Column  arriving  behind  the  line 
of  battle,  to  prolong  it  on  this  line  (No.  184).  Column 
arriving  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  line  of  battle,  to  pro- 
long it  on  this  line  (No.  188).  Manner  of  prolonging  a 
line  by  mai-kers  (No.  189) 108 

Article  III. — Change  of  direction  in  column  at  full  distance 

(No  231) 112 

^r^zde /T'— Halt  the  column  (No.  239) 113 

Article  V — Close  the  column  to  half  distance,  or  in  mass  (No. 
252).  Close  the  column  on  the  eighth  company  (No.  267). 
Execute  this  movement  marching  (No.  273) 114 

Article  VI. — March    in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in 

mass  (No.  281) 116 

Article  VII. — Change  direction  in  column  at  half  distance  (No. 

287) 117 

Article  VIII. — Change  direction  of  a  column  closed  in  mass, 
marching  (No.  288).  Change  direction  of  a  column, 
closed  in  mass,  from  a  halt  (No.  306) 117 

Article  IX. — Take  distances  by  the  head  of  the  column  (No. 
323).  Take  distances  by  the  rear  of  the  column  (No. 
333).  Take  distances  on  the  head  of  the  column  (No. 
341) 121 

Article  X. — Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance 
(No.  351).  Countermarch  of  a  column  closed  in  mass 
(No.  352) 125 

Article  XL — Being  in  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  to 
form  divisions  (No.  364).  To  form  divisions,  marching 
(No.  376) 126 

PART    FOURTH. 

Article  II. — To  form  a  column,  at  full  distance,  to  the  left  into    . 


